Attachment_1_to_Item_No._1_-_NRIP_-_Calexco_Reach_Invitation_to_Bid_and_Specifications — Calexico City Council, August 10, 2022 (part 4 of 6)

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
Galvanized Coating Refer to Section 09 92 00
High-Strength
Structural Steel
Bolts (Connection
Bolts and Anchor
Bolts)
High-Strength
Carbon Steel –
Galvanized
Conform to ASTM F3125 free-cutting steel
¼”-½” shall project through tightened nut.

Heavy hexagon series
With self-locking nuts or lock-washers and
plain nuts
Threads Use taps and dies so bolts retain normal
clearance after hot-dip galvanizing
Galvanized Coating Refer to Section 09 92 00
Bolts (Connection
Bolts and Anchor
Bolts) - Stainless
Steel for
Underground
Ferrous
Installations
(Buried, or
Submersible
Locations, or in
Underground
Structures or
Chemical
Handling Areas)
Stainless Steel Conform to ASTM A193 Grade B8M bolts
ASTM A194 Grade 8M Class 2 nuts
¼”-½” shall project through tightened nut.

Heavy hexagon series
Alternate ASTM F593 Type 316 bolts with
ASTM F594 SAE Type 316 nuts
Washers – same material as nuts
Nuts Same Material as
Bolts and Washers
Capable of developing full strength of bolts.

Shape of nuts to match shape of bolt heads
Washers
(Galvanized)
Carbon Steel –
Galvanized
Square or rectangular smooth beveled
washers, tapered in thickness
Hardened washers for high-strength bolts
shall conform to AISC specification
Threads American Standard for Screw Threads
Coarse Thread Series
Use taps and dies so bolts retain normal
clearance after hot-dip galvanizing
Galvanized Coating Refer to Section 09 92 00
Washers
(Stainless Steel)
Stainless Steel SAE Type 316
Lock Washers Same Material as
Bolts
Provide where shown.

Stainless Steel
Members
Stainless Steel SAE Type 316 or SAE Type 304
Welding
Electrodes
Steel Electrodes Conform to AWS D1.1 E70xx except E7024 rods or electrodes shall not be used
Project Owner STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 05 12 00 - 9
D. The following product design criteria, options and accessories are required:

ITEM DESCRIPTION
Steel Fabrications Conform to CBC and AISC S327
E. Structural steel encased in concrete shall not be galvanized or painted, and shall have a clean surface for bonding to concrete.

F. Galvanized parts that warp during galvanizing shall be straightened.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Preparation
A. Make field measurements needed to install structural steel load-bearing systems before submitting shop drawings or ordering. Make minor changes in dimensions and alignments as needed to avoid utilities or structural conflicts.

B. Cast-in-place bolt locations shall be measured in field before drilling companion holes in structural steel beam or assembly.

C. Properly locate embedded anchor bolts and anchors using templates. Concrete wedge anchors and epoxy anchors set after concrete has hardened are not an acceptable substitute for cast-in-place anchor bolts.

D. After anchor bolts are embedded, protect threads with grease and by screwing on nuts until appurtenant metalwork is secured to anchors.

E. Where steel construction requires special inspection under CBC Chapter 17, coordinate with Owner regarding work schedule to facilitate inspection.

3.2 Installation
A. Refer to Sections 01 73 24 / 02 05 00 for basic execution and installation requirements.

B. Furnish and install structural steel load-bearing systems at locations shown on Plans and Submittals.

C. The following installation standards shall be followed:

1. Applicable OSHA and Cal OSHA regulations

2. California Building Code Chapter 22 “Steel”

3. Other applicable building code requirements

4. Manufacturer’s installation and warranty requirements

5. AWS B3.0 Welding Procedures and Performance Qualifications

6. AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code - Steel

7. AWS D1.3 Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel

8. AISC 360 Structural Steel Buildings

9. Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (Greenbook) §304-1 “Structural Steel”

10. SSPWC Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (Greenbook) Section 304 “Metal Fabrication and Construction”
D. Refer variances between above documents and Contract Documents to Owner’s Representative.

Project Owner STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 05 12 00 - 10
E. Install structural steel load-bearing systems to tolerances recommended by Manufacturer and AISC standards. Unless otherwise shown, install structural steel load-bearing systems plumb, square, and level using precision gauges and levels.

F. Protect dissimilar metals from galvanic corrosion using pressure tapes, coatings, or isolators.

G. Flame-cutting of structural members using a gas-cutting torch will not be permitted except on non-structural members and then, only with written permission from Owner’s Representative.

H. Structural assemblies and shop and field welding shall conform to AISC M011 and AISC S326.

I. Refer to Section 05 05 23 for requirements for bolting.

J. Refer to Section 05 05 23 for requirements for welding.

3.3 Field Quality Control
A. Special inspection and field testing required by Chapter 17 of CBC (Section 1705.2) shall be completed by an ICC-certified special inspector selected by Owner and shall include:

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER

TEST STANDARD) FREQUENCY
FIRST
TEST
PAID
FOR BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
Structural
Steel
Material
Verification
See plans See plans Owner Contractor
to reimburse
Owner for
costs of first
deputy
inspector
and testing if
re-inspection
is required
Bolting Refer to Section 05
05 23
Welding Refer to Section 05
05 23
B. Additional field testing of structural steel shall include:

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER

TEST STANDARD) FREQUENCY
FIRST

TEST PAID
FOR BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
Structural
Steel
Installation Visual inspection of
finished installation
No bends, twists or
open joints
No projecting
edges or corners at
intersections
1 inspection Owner Owner
11-month
Warranty
Inspection
Demonstrate
compliance to
Contract
Documents and
Manufacturer’s
printed literature
1 inspection Owner Contractor
Project Owner STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 05 12 00 - 11
C. Notify Owner’s Representative at least 24 hours in advance of required special inspections.

D. Provide copies of special inspection reports to Owner’s Representative and applicable Building Official.

END OF SECTION

Project Owner STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 05 12 00 - 12

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Project Owner COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 05 40 00 - 1
SECTION 05 40 00

COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Work Included
A. Materials, testing, and installation of cold-formed steel stud and joist systems.

1.3 System Description
A. Furnish and install complete operating cold-formed metal framing system including appurtenant structural, mechanical and/or electrical mountings or connections required for compliance with Manufacturer’s installation requirements and compliance with applicable building codes and standards.

1.4 Quality Assurance
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen trained and experienced in the necessary trades and crafts and completely familiar with specified requirements and methods for proper performance of Work of this section.

1.5 References
A. Reference publications below form part of this specification to extent referenced and are referred to within text by basic designation only.

1. AISI Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members

2. ASTM A36 Carbon Structural Steel

3. ASTM A123 Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products

4. ASTM A153 Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware

5. ASTM A307 Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs

6. ASTM A446 Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process, Structural

7. ASTM A525 Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process

8. California Building Code (CBC)

1.6 Submittals
A. Furnish the following submittals.

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION
Product Data Submit per Product Data requirements.

Installation Instructions Submit per Installation Instruction requirements.

Certificate of Compliance Submit coating system and application certification per Certificate of Compliance requirements.

Warranty Furnish one-year warranty from date of final acceptance B. Refer to Section 02 05 00 for definition of requirements for Shop Drawings, Product Data, Installation Instructions, Certificates of Compliance, and Test Record Transcripts.

1.7 Delivery, Storage and Handling
A. Refer to Sections 01 65 00 / 01 66 00 for delivery, storage, and handling requirements.

Project Owner COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 05 40 00 - 2
B. Strictly follow Manufacturer’s instructions and warranty requirements for delivery, storage, and handling of cold-formed metal framing.

C. Store materials above ground on platforms, skids, or other supports and protect from rain, dirt, grease, foreign matter, and corrosion.

1.8 Unit Prices
A. Payment for the Work in this section shall be included as part of lump-sum or unit-price bid amount for which such Work is appurtenant thereto.

B. Refer to Section 01 22 00 for measurement and payment clauses for cold-formed metal framing.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Acceptable Manufacturers
A. Acceptable Manufacturers include:

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION
Light Gauge Steel
Framing
Clark-Dietrich / Worthington Industries West Chester, OH (800) 365-5284 ConFab Consolidated Fabricators Corporation Fontana, CA (909) 770-8920 Custom Stud, Inc. Lakeville, MN (952) 985-7000
Scafco Corporation Spokane, WA (509) 343-9000
Steel-Con Orlando, FL (407) 438-1664
United Metal Products Corona, CA (951) 739-9535
Accepted equal

2.2 Materials
A. Refer to Section 02 05 00 for basic requirements for products and materials.

B. Materials for cold-formed metal framing shall be as indicated on the Plans.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Preparation
A. Make field measurements needed to install cold-formed metal framing before ordering.

Make minor changes in dimensions and alignments as needed to avoid utilities or structural conflicts.

3.2 Installation
A. Refer to Section 02 05 00 for basic execution and installation requirements.

B. Furnish and install cold-formed metal framing at locations shown on Plans.

C. The following installation standards shall be followed:

1. Applicable OSHA and Cal OSHA regulations

2. California Building Code Chapter 22 “Steel” Section 2210 “Cold-Formed Steel LightFramed Construction”

3. Other applicable building code requirements

4. AISI Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members

5. Manufacturer’s installation and warranty requirements D. Refer variances between above documents and Contract Documents to Owner’s Representative.

E. Install cold-formed metal framing to tolerances recommended by Manufacturer. Unless otherwise shown, install cold-formed metal framing true and level using precision gauges and levels.

Project Owner COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 05 40 00 - 3
F. Construct stud walls as follows:

1. Locate and align floor tracks accurately. Secure to floor with 5/32” diameter power-driven anchors at 24” on center unless noted otherwise and not less than 6 inches from ends of each piece of floor track. Install anchors with washers.

2. Align ceiling tracks by plumbing up from floor tracks. Fasten to structure above with screws at maximum 24” on center unless noted otherwise.

3. Install metal studs in floor and ceiling tracks or to floor and roof as shown and attach to tracks with screws. Do not use spliced studs. Space studs as shown. Where spacing is not shown. Spacing shall be 16” on center.

4. Install reinforcing studs as recommended by stud Manufacturer for mounting of items on or in partitions, furred walls or shafts. Firmly and solidly mount items attached to or in plaster surfaces.

5. Do not cut or drill holes through members unless specifically detailed or permitted by Owner’s Representative.

6. Do not wire-tie framing members. Use screws or welds.

7. Do not splice studs or runners.

3.3 Protection
A. Protect elements exposed to weather by covering with plastic as needed.

END OF SECTION
Project Owner COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 05 40 00 - 4

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Project Owner METAL FABRICATIONS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 05 50 00 - 1
SECTION 05 50 00

METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Work Included
A. Materials, testing, and installation of concrete anchor bolts.

B. Materials, testing, and installation of metal fabrications, including steel enclosures, eyebolts, metal screens, and formed metal fabrications.

C. Inspection, disassembly/reassembly refurbishment, and repair of metal fabrications, including framing, enclosures, access panels or doors, and trashracks.

D. Conform to Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (Greenbook) §206, applicable permits, and requirements herein.

E. Do not use adhesive anchors under the following circumstances:

1. For anchors subject to vibration

2. For anchors subject to fire

3. For anchors subject to concrete temperatures >100°F
F. Do not use expansion-bolt or powder-actuated anchors under the following circumstances:

1. For submerged anchors

2. For anchors in wet or splash environments

3. For anchors in corrosive environments

4. For overhead anchors

5. For applications where the preferred adhesive anchors are acceptable

6. For anchors for handrails

7. For anchors for reinforcing bars

1.2 Related Work
A. Section 01 22 00: Unit Prices
B. Section 01 33 00: Submittal Procedures
C. Section 01 40 00: Quality Requirements
D. Section 01 66 00: Product Storage and Handling Requirements E. Section 01 73 24: Seismic Restraint
F. Section 02 05 00: Basic Civil Engineering Requirements G. Section 03 15 00: Concrete Accessories
H. Section 03 30 00: Cast-in-Place Concrete
I. Section 03 60 00: Grouting
J. Section 05 12 00: Structural Steel Framing
K. Section 05 51 00: Stairs and Ladders
L. Section 05 53 00: Gratings and Floor Plates
M. Section 09 90 00: Painting and Coating
N. Section 09 92 00: Galvanizing
O. Section 32 31 13 Chain Link Fences
P. Section 33 05 38: Hangers and Supports

1.3 System Description
A. Furnish and install metal fabrications where shown including appurtenant mountings or connections required for compliance with Manufacturer’s installation requirements and compliance with applicable building codes and standards.

Project Owner METAL FABRICATIONS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 05 50 00 - 2

1.4 Quality Assurance
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen trained and experienced in necessary trades and crafts and completely familiar with specified requirements and methods for proper performance of Work of this section.

B. Shop quality control documentation shall be available in fabricator’s shop for Owner’s review.

1.5 References
A. Reference publications listed below and in various sections form part of specification to extent referenced. These are referred to within text by basic designation only.

1. AISC 316 Manual of Steel Construction

2. AISC 317 Manual of Steel Construction Volume II Connections

3. ASME/ANSI B1.1 Unified Inch Screw Threads

4. ANSI/ASME B18.15 Forged Eyebolts

5. ANSI AWS A2.4 Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing and Nondestructive Examination

6. API 9A Wire Rope

7. ASTM A36 Carbon Structural Steel

8. ASTM A167 Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip

9. ASTM A193 Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High-Temperature Service

10. ASTM A194 Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for High-Pressure and High Temperature Service

11. ASTM A240 Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications

12. ASTM A307 Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and Threaded Rod 60 000 psi Tensile Strength

13. ASTM A413 Carbon Steel Chain

14. ASTM A489 Carbon Steel Lifting Eyes

15. ASTM A780 Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings

16. ASTM A1011 Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength LowAlloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra-High Strength

17. ASTM C881 Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete

18. ASTM E10 Brinell Hardness of Metallic Materials

19. ASTM F541 Alloy Steel Eyebolts

20. ASTM F593 Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws and Studs

21. ASTM F594 Stainless Steel Nuts

22. ASTM F3125 High Strength Structural Bolts, Steel and Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 120 ksi (830 MPa) and 150 ksi (1040 MPa) Minimum Tensile Strength

23. ASTM F1267 Metal, Expanded, Steel

24. AWS Welding Handbook

25. AWS A5.5 Low-Alloy Steel-Covered Arc-Welding Electrodes

26. AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code – Steel

27. AWS QC1 Qualification and Certification of Welding Inspectors

28. California Building Code (CBC)

29. MIL A907E Antiseize Thread Compund, High-Temperature

30. SSPWC Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (Greenbook) Section 206 “Miscellaneous Metal Items”

31. SSPWC Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (Greenbook) Section 304 “Metal Fabrication and Construction”

1.6 Submittals
A. Furnish the following submittals.

Project Owner METAL FABRICATIONS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 05 50 00 - 3

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION
Shop Drawings Submit for bolts and formed metal fabrications per structural Shop Drawing requirements
Product Data Submit for manufactured products per Product Data requirements.

Include ICC test reports verifying strength and material equivalency for embedded anchors. Include temperature at which load capacity reduces to 90% of that determined at 75°F.

Installation
Instructions
Submit per Installation Instructions requirements for embedded anchors.

Certificate of
Compliance
Submit coating system and application certification per Certificate of Compliance requirements.

Submit ICC-ES or IAPMO-UES report for epoxy anchor grouts for adhesive anchors.

Foundry or Test
Record
Transcripts
Submit for factory tests upon request per Foundry or Test Record transcript requirements.

Material Samples Submit upon request
Welder
Qualification
Certificates
Submit for welders performing work on this project.

Also submit certifications of procedure qualifications for each welding procedure used.

1.7 Delivery, Storage, and Handling
A. Refer to Sections 01 65 00 / 01 66 00 for delivery, storage, and handling requirements.

B. Strictly follow Manufacturer’s instructions and warranty requirements for delivery, storage, and handling of metal fabrications.

C. Store materials above ground on platforms, skids, or other supports and protect from rain, dirt, grease, foreign matter, and corrosion.

1.8 Unit Prices
A. Payment for Work in this section shall be included as part of lump-sum or unit-price bid amount for which such Work is appurtenant.

B. Refer to Section 01 22 00 for measurement and payment clauses for metal fabrications.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Acceptable Manufacturers
A. Acceptable Manufacturers include:

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION
Concrete Anchor Systems
Concrete
Anchors – Epoxy
Adhesive Anchor
Systems
Hilti USA. Tulsa, OK (800) 879-8000
ITW Ramset / Redhead Glendale Heights, IL (800) 348-3231 Simpson Strong Tie Co. Riverside, CA (714) 871-8373
Accepted Equal
Concrete
Anchors –
Expansion Bolt
Systems
Hilti Corp. Tulsa, OK (800) 879-8000
ITW Ramset / Redhead Glendale Heights, IL (800) 348-3231 Simpson Strong Tie Co. Riverside, CA (714) 871-8373
Accepted Equal
Concrete
Anchors -Powder
Hilti Corp. Tulsa, OK (800) 879-8000
ITW Ramset / Redhead Glendale Heights, IL (800) 348-3231 Project Owner METAL FABRICATIONS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 05 50 00 - 4

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION
Actuated
Fastening
Systems
Accepted Equal
Metal Fabrications
Fabricated
Metalwork
Desert Iron and Machine
Works, Inc.

Thermal, CA (310) 773-0589
Accepted Equal
Lifting Eyebolts Cleveland City Forge Wellington, OH (440) 647-5400 Sierra Pacific Engineering and
Products
Long Beach, CA (800) 433-5554
Accepted Equal
Perforated Metal
and Expanded
Metal
AMICO Div. Gibraltar
Industries
Birmingham, AL (800) 326-8842
Bobco Metals Los Angeles, CA (888) 304-5927
McNichols Company Tampa, FL (877) 884-4653
Metalex Libertyville, IL (888) 639-6382
Accepted Equal
Steel Chain Bobco Metals Los Angeles, CA (888) 304-5927 Accepted Equal
Steel Wire Rope Bobco Metals Los Angeles, CA (888) 304-5927 McMaster Carr Supply Co. Santa Fe Springs, CA (562) 692- 5911
Southwest Wire Rope Houston, TX ((713) 453-8518
Accepted Equal

2.2 Materials
A. Refer to Section 02 05 00 for basic requirements for products and materials.

B. Refer to Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (Greenbook) §206-1 for materials requirements for metal fabrications.

C. Provide adequately sized anchor bolts for equipment loads and in no case less than size recommended by equipment Manufacturer.

1. Provide embedded sleeve or epoxy-adhesive type anchors whenever possible.

2. Anchor bolt assembly shall consist of anchor bolt, surrounding pipe sleeve, bottom plate, leveling nut, nut and washer.

3. Assembly shall permit reasonable lateral movement of bolts to facilitate matching of bolts to equipment.

4. If stainless steel anchor bolts are not provided, galvanize anchor bolts and anchor bolt assemblies after fabrication.

5. Size anchors per Section 01 73 24 for seismic accelerations shown in Contract Documents.

D. Structural steel shall conform to requirements of Section 05 12 00.

E. Materials for bolts, anchors and welds shall be:

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
Bolts (Connection Bolts
and Anchor Bolts)
High-Strength
Carbon Steel –
Galvanized
Conform to ASTM F3125
With self-locking nuts or lock-washers and
plain nuts
Project Owner METAL FABRICATIONS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 05 50 00 - 5

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
Galvanized
Coating
Refer to Section 09 92 00
Bolts (Connection Bolts
and Anchor Bolts) -
Stainless Steel
Stainless Steel Conform to ASTM A193 Grade B8M bolts
with ASTM A194 Grade 8M nuts
Alternate ASTM F593 Type 304 bolts with
ASTM F594 SAE Type 316 nuts
Washers – same material as nuts
Anti-Seize
Lubricant
Conform to MIL A907E
Bolts – Embedded
Eyebolts and Lifting
Eyebolts
Stainless Steel Conform to ASTM F541 SAE Type 304
Dimensions per ANSI/ASME B18.15
Welded eye type
Galvanized
Carbon Steel
Conform to ASTM A489 Dimensions per
ANSI/ASME B18.15
Welded eye type
Galvanized
Coating
Refer to Section 09 92 00
Chain Stainless Steel SAE Type 304
Length sufficient to provide 6” sag at center of
opening spanned.

Concrete Anchors –
Epoxy Adhesive Anchor
Systems
Stainless Steel
Threaded Rod
SAE Type 304
Galvanized
Carbon Steel
Threaded Rod
Conform to ASTM F3125
Anchor System Conform to ASTM C881 Type IV Grade 3,
Classes A, B, and C with exception of gel
time and epoxy content
Epoxy Adhesive 2- or 3-component non-shrink non-sag paste, Moisture insensitive when cured
Rated for cracked and uncracked concrete
Tested per ICC-ES AC308 and IBC
requirements
Epoxy-Grout
Aggregate
As furnished prepackaged by epoxy grout
Manufacturer
Concrete Anchors –
Expansion Bolt Systems
Stainless Steel SAE Type 304
Required for buried or submerged anchors.

Galvanized
Carbon Steel
Conform to ASTM F3125
Galvanized
Coating
Refer to Section 09 92 00
Powder Actuated
Fastening Systems
Carbon Steel Conform to AISI 1061
Hardness 52-58 Rockwell C
Galvanized
Coating
Refer to Section 09 92 00
Nuts Same Material
as Bolts and
Washers
Capable of developing full strength of bolts.

Steel Forgings Steel Conform to ASTM F3125
Class C forgings
≥0.35% carbon content, annealed
Brinell hardness 1.30-1.90 per ASTM E10
Turnbuckles Stainless Steel SAE Type 304
Project Owner METAL FABRICATIONS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 05 50 00 - 6

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
Washers (Stainless
Steel)
Stainless Steel SAE Type 304
Washers (Galvanized) Carbon Steel –
Galvanized
Square or rectangular smooth beveled
washers, tapered in thickness
Galvanized
Coating
Refer to Section 09 92 00
Welding Electrode -
Steel
Steel
Electrodes
Conform to AWS A5.5
Conform to AWS D1.1
E70xx, except E7024 rods or electrodes
shall not be used
Welding Electrode –
Stainless Steel
Stainless Steel
Electrodes
Type 347 electrode
F. Materials for metal shapes and members shall be:

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
Hardware – Steel
Including Castings,
Rolled, Pressed and
Forged Articles
Steel Hardware Conform to ASTM A36
Galvanized
Coating
Refer to Section 09 92 00
Perforated Metal and
Expanded Metal
Steel Conform to ASTM A1011
Gauge as shown on plans – minimum 16
gauge
Galvanized
Coating
Refer to Section 09 92 00
Plate and Sheet –
Stainless Steel
Stainless Steel Conform to ASTM A167 or ASTM A240 SAE
Type 304
Structural Members –
Stainless Steel
Stainless Steel SAE Type 304
G. The following product design criteria, options and accessories are required:

ITEM DESCRIPTION
Chain – ASTM Grade
43 High Test
Size and
Nominal
Strength
¼” chain 2600-lb rated
5/16” chain 3900–lb rated
⅜” chain 5400-lb rated
½” chain 9200-lb rated
⅝” chain 11,500-lb rated
¾” chain 16,200-lb rated
Enclosures – Expanded
Metal Steel Cage
Design
Standard
ASSE 1060
Eyebolt Size and
Diameter
¼” eyebolt (¾”ID / 1-3/16”OD)
5/16” eyebolt (⅞”ID / 1-7/16” OD)
⅜” eyebolt (1”ID / 1-21/32”OD)
7/16” eyebolt (1-3/32”ID / 1-27/32”OD)
½” eyebolt (1-3/16”ID / 2-1/16”OD)
9/16” eyebolt (1-9/16”ID / 2-9/32”OD)
⅝” eyebolt (1⅜”ID / 2½”OD)
¾” eyebolt (1½”ID / 2-13/16”OD)
⅞” eyebolt (1-11/16” ID / 3¼”OD)
1” eyebolt (1-13/16”ID / 3-9/16”OD)
1⅛” eyebolt (2”ID / 4”OD)
1¼” eyebolt (2-3/16”ID / 4-7/16”OD)
1½” eyebolt (2½”ID / 5-3/16”OD)
1¾” eyebolt (2⅞”ID / 6-1/16”OD)
2” eyebolt (3¼”ID / 6⅞”OD)
Project Owner METAL FABRICATIONS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 05 50 00 - 7

ITEM DESCRIPTION
2½” eyebolt (4½”ID / 8-9/16”OD)
Turnbuckles Design Eye x eye
Eye x jaw
Size to match wire rope or chain diameter
Wire Rope Size and
Nominal
Strength
¼” wire rope 6000-lb rated
5/16” wire rope 9000–lb rated
⅜” wire rope 13,000-lb rated
½” wire rope 23,000-lb rated
⅝” wire rope 36,000-lb rated
¾” wire rope 52,000-lb rated
⅞” wire rope 70,000-lb rated
1” wire rope 92,000-lb rated
H. Before leaving shop, steel not shown or specified to be galvanized or stainless shall receive one coat of pigmented primer recommended by Manufacturer of final paint system. Parts inaccessible after assembly shall be given second coat of same primer. Final painting shall conform to Section 09 90 00.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Preparation
A. Make field measurements needed to fabricate and install metal fabrications before submitting shop drawings or ordering. Make minor changes in dimensions and alignments as needed to avoid utilities or structural conflicts.

B. Clean surfaces of metalwork to be in contact with concrete, removing rust, dirt, grease and other foreign substances before concrete is placed.

C. Aluminum surfaces to contact concrete shall be coated with heavy alkali-resistant bituminous paint or one coat of zinc chromate.

D. Aluminum surfaces to contact dissimilar metals shall be insulated from dissimilar metals using neoprene gaskets or washers.

E. Embedded metalwork shall be secured accurately in position when concrete is placed to prevent displacement or undue vibration during or after placement of concrete.

F. Concrete anchors not cast in place shall be installed in holes drilled or cored to dimensions shown in anchor Manufacturer’s installation instructions.

G. Where metalwork is to be installed in recesses in formed concrete, said recesses shall be made, metalwork installed, and recesses filled with dry-pack mortar in conformance with Section 03 60 00.

3.2 Installation
A. Refer to Sections 01 73 24 / 02 05 00 for execution and installation requirements.

B. Furnish and install metal fabrications at locations shown on Plans and Submittals.

C. The following installation standards shall be followed:

1. Applicable OSHA and Cal OSHA regulations

2. California Building Code Chapter 20 “Aluminum”

3. California Building Code Chapter 22 “Steel”

4. Other applicable building and fire code requirements

5. Manufacturer’s installation and warranty requirements

6. SSPWC Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (Greenbook) §304 “Metal Fabrication and Construction”
D. Refer variances between above documents and Contract Documents to Owner’s Representative.

Project Owner METAL FABRICATIONS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 05 50 00 - 8
E. Drill and install epoxy adhesive anchor systems per Manufacturer’s specifications.

F. Install metal fabrications to tolerances recommended by Manufacturer. Unless otherwise shown, install metal fabrications true, plumb, and level using precision gauges and levels.

G. Refer to Section 05 12 00 for structural welding. Permanent connections shall be continuously welded along entire area of contact.

H. Refer to Section 05 12 00 for structural bolting.

I. Fastenings shall be concealed whenever possible.

J. Bolting for piping shall conform to Section 33 05 31.

K. Joints shall have close fit with corner joints coped or mitered and in true alignment.

L. Built-up parts shall be free of warp.

M. Exposed ends and edges of metal shall be slightly rounded.

3.3 Field Quality Control
A. Field testing shall include:

ITEM TEST FOR
TEST

STANDARD
(ASTM OR

OTHER TEST

STANDARD) FREQUENCY
FIRST
TEST
PAID
FOR BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
Metal
Fabrications
No Bends,
Twists or
Open Joints
No Projecting
Edges or
Corners at
Intersections
Visual
inspection
All metalwork Owner Owner
Edge
Distances and
Spacings
Visual
inspection and
measurement
per CBC Table
1911.2
All bolts Owner Owner
Field
Performance
Demonstrate
compliance to
Contract
Documents and
Manufacturer’s
printed
literature
1 test Contractor Contractor
11-month
Warranty
Inspection
Demonstrate
compliance to
Contract
Documents and
Manufacturer’s
printed
literature
1 test Owner Contractor

END OF SECTION
Project Owner STAIRS AND LADDERS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 05 51 00 - 1
SECTION 05 51 00

STAIRS AND LADDERS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Work Included
A. This section includes materials, testing, and installation of stairs and ladders.

1.2 Related Work
A. Section 01 22 00: Unit Prices
B. Section 01 33 00: Submittal Procedures
C. Section 01 40 00: Quality Requirements
D. Section 01 66 00: Product Storage and Handling Requirements E. Section 02 05 00: Basic Civil Engineering Requirements F. Section 05 12 00: Structural Steel Framing
G. Section 05 50 00: Metal Fabrications
H. Section 09 90 00: Painting and Coating
I. Section 09 92 00: Galvanizing

1.3 System Description
A. Furnish and install complete stairs and ladders where shown including appurtenant mountings or connections required for compliance with Manufacturer’s installation requirements and compliance with applicable building codes and standards.

1.5 References
A. Reference publications below form part of this specification to extent referenced and are referred to within text by basic designation only.

1. ANSI / ASC A14.3 Ladders - Fixed - Safety Requirements

2. ASTM A36 Carbon Structural Steel

3. ASTM A123 Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products

4. ASTM A276 Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes

5. ASTM B6 Zinc

6. California Mechanical Code (CMC) §904.10

7. OSHA Standard 29 CFR1910.27 Fixed Ladders

8. OSHA Standard 29 CFR 1926.1053 Ladders

1.6 Submittals
A. Furnish the following submittals.

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION
Shop Drawings Submit for fabricated ladders per structural Shop Drawing requirements .

Product Data Submit for manufactured products per Product Data requirements.

Installation Instructions Submit per Installation Instruction requirements Certificate of Compliance Submit coating system and application certification per Certificate of Compliance requirements.

Foundry or Test Record
Transcripts
Submit for factory tests upon request per Foundry or Test Record transcript requirements.

Material Samples Submit upon request
Welder Qualification
Certificates
Submit for welders performing Work.

Also submit certifications of procedure qualifications for each welding procedure used.

Project Owner STAIRS AND LADDERS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 05 51 00 - 2

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION
Warranty Furnish one-year warranty from date of final acceptance B. Refer to Section 02 05 00 for definition of requirements for Shop Drawings, Product Data, Installation Instructions, Certificates of Compliance, Foundry or Test Records and Material Samples.

1.7 Delivery, Storage, and Handling
A. Refer to Sections 01 65 00 / 01 66 00 for delivery, storage, and handling requirements.

B. Strictly follow Manufacturer’s instructions and warranty requirements for delivery, storage, and handling of stairs and ladders.

C. Store materials above ground on platforms, skids, or other supports and protect from rain, dirt, grease, foreign matter, and corrosion.

1.8 Unit Prices
A. Payment for Work in this section shall be included as part of lump-sum or unit-price bid amount for which such Work is appurtenant.

B. Refer to Section 01 22 00 for measurement and payment clauses for stairs and ladders.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Acceptable Manufacturers
A. Acceptable manufacturers include:

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION
Fall Prevention System Capital Safety Group DBI Sala “Lad-Saf” Bloomington, MN (800) 328-6146 Inwesco, Inc. “Safety Ladder Assistant” Azusa, CA (626) 334-9304 Miller / Honeywell (North) “Saf-T-Climb” Smithfield, RI (800) 430-5490 Accepted equal
Ladders – Galvanized
Steel
Alhambra Foundry A3400 or A3885 Alhambra, CA (626) 289-4294 Pipeline Products VL100 San Marcos, CA (800) 998-1079
Accepted equal
Ladders – Coating on
Rungs
McMaster-Carr Supply Company (6954-T322) Santa Fe Springs, CA (562) 692-5911 Accepted equal
Ladder Pop-Up Safety
Post - Steel
Bilco Company “Ladder Up” New Haven, CT (800) 366-6530
Inwesco “Safety Ladder Assistant” Azusa, CA (626) 334-9304 Accepted equal

2.2 Materials
A. Refer to Section 02 05 00 for basic requirements for products and materials.

B. Structural steel shall comply with requirements of Section 05 12 00.

C. Materials for ladders shall be:

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
Interior Ladders –
Stainless Steel
Stainless Steel Materials Conform to ASTM A276 SAE Type 304 Dimensions Conform to plans and OSHA Std CFR1910.27
Stringer 2½” x ¼” steel bar
Rung Diameter ≥¾”
Clear Length of
Rung or Cleat
≥16
Distance
Between Rungs
≤12”
Clearance
Between Rungs
and Walls or
≥ 7”
Project Owner STAIRS AND LADDERS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 05 51 00 - 3

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
Obstructions
Behind Ladder
Top Rung 6” below top of vault or roof
Bottom Rung ≤12” above floor
Exterior Ladders –
Steel
Welded Steel Materials Conform to ASTM A36 Carbon Steel - Galvanized Dimensions Conform to plans and OSHA Std CFR1910.27
Stringer 2½” x ¼” steel bar
Rung Diameter ≥¾”
Clear Length of
Rung or Cleat
≥16
Distance
Between Rungs
≤12”
Clearance
Between Rungs
and Walls or
Obstructions
Behind Ladder
≥ 7”
Galvanized
Coating
Conform to ASTM A123 - 3.4 mil thickness - 2.00 ounce/ft2 Coating on
Rungs
Coarse grain epoxy
Color - gray
Fall Prevention
System (Required
on ladders more
than 8’ high)
Stainless Steel Conform to ASTM A276 SAE Type 304
Standards ANSI / ASC A14.3
Cable Size 5/16”
Rated User
Weight
300 lbs
Ladder-Top PopUp Safety Post
(Interior Ladders)
(Required on
ladders without
exterior
handholds)
Stainless Steel Conform to ASTM A276 SAE Type 304
Same material and finish as ladder
Telescoping tubular section shall lock automatically when fully extended.

Upward and downward movement shall be controlled by stainless steel spring balancing mechanisms.

Units shall be factory-assembled with fasteners for securing to ladder rungs.

Ladder-Top
Handrail
Extensions
(Exterior Ladders)
Welded Steel Conform to ASTM A36 Carbon Steel - Galvanized D. Zinc coatings shall be applied by hot-dipped or electro-depositing process. Zinc shall comply with ASTM B6.

E. Before leaving shop, all steel not shown or specified to be galvanized or stainless shall receive one coat of pigmented primer recommended by Manufacturer of final paint system.

Parts inaccessible after assembly shall be given second coat of same primer. Final painting shall be as specified in Section 09 90 00 or 09 96 56.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Preparation
A. Make field measurements needed to fabricate and install stairs and ladders before submitting shop drawings or ordering. Make minor changes in dimensions and alignments as needed to avoid utilities or structural conflicts.

B. Clean surfaces of work to be in contact with concrete, removing rust, dirt, grease and other foreign substances before concrete is placed.

C. All embedded metalwork shall be secured accurately in position when concrete is placed to prevent displacement or undue vibration during or after placement of concrete.

Project Owner STAIRS AND LADDERS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 05 51 00 - 4
D. Where work is to be installed in recesses in formed concrete, said recesses shall be made, work installed, and recesses filled with dry-pack grout in conformance with Section 03 60 00.

3.2 Installation
A. Refer to Section 02 05 00 for basic execution and installation requirements.

B. Furnish and install stairs and ladders at locations shown on Plans and Submittals.

C. The following installation standards shall be followed:

1. Applicable OSHA and Cal OSHA regulations.

2. Applicable building and fire code requirements

3. Manufacturer’s installation and warranty requirements D. Refer variances between above documents and Contract Documents to Owner’s Representative.

E. Install stairs and ladders to tolerances recommended by Manufacturer. Unless otherwise shown, install stairs and ladders true, plumb and level using precision gauges and levels.

F. Welding shall comply with Section 05 12 00. Permanent connections shall be continuously welded along entire area of contact.

G. Bolting shall comply with Section 05 12 00. Conceal fastenings whenever possible.

H. Joints shall have a close fit with corner joints coped or mitered and in true alignment.

I. Built-up parts shall be free of warp.

J. Exposed ends and edges of work shall be slightly rounded.

K. Mount ladders so clearance from back of ladder to wall behind ladder exceeds 7”.

3.3 Field Quality Control
A. Field testing shall include:

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER TEST

STANDARD) FREQUENCY
FIRST

TEST PAID
FOR BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
Ladders No bends, twists
or open joints
No projecting
edges or corners
at intersections
Visual inspection All work Owner Owner
Field
Performance
Demonstrate compliance to
Contract Documents and
Manufacturer’s printed literature
1 test Contractor Contractor
11-month
Warranty
Inspection
Demonstrate compliance to
Contract Documents and
Manufacturer’s printed literature
1 test Owner Contractor

END OF SECTION
Project Owner GRATINGS AND FLOOR PLATES
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 05 53 00 - 1
SECTION 05 53 00

GRATINGS AND FLOOR PLATES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Work Included
A. Materials, testing, and installation of metal gratings and floor plates.

B. Plastic and fiberglass substitutes for metal products are also covered in this section.

1.2 Related Work
A. Section 01 22 00: Unit Prices
B. Section 01 33 00: Submittal Procedures
C. Section 01 40 00: Quality Requirements
D. Section 01 66 00: Product Storage and Handling Requirements E. Section 02 05 00: Basic Civil Engineering Requirements F. Section 05 12 00: Structural Steel Framing
G. Section 05 50 00: Metal Fabrications
H. Section 09 90 00: Painting and Coating
I. Section 09 92 00: Galvanizing
J. Section 33 05 38: Hangers and Supports

1.3 System Description
A. Furnish and install complete grating and/or floor plate system where shown including appurtenant mountings or connections required for compliance with Manufacturer’s installation requirements and compliance with applicable building codes and standards.

1.5 References
A. Reference publications below form part of this specification to extent referenced and are referred to within text by basic designation only.

1. ANSI/ASME B18.15 Forged Eyebolts

2. ASTM A36 Carbon Structural Steel

3. ASTM A123 Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products

4. ASTM A153 Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware

5. ASTM A167 Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip

6. ASTM A193 Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High-Temperature Service

7. ASTM A194 Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for High-Pressure and High Temperature Service

8. ASTM A325 Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength

9. ASTM A489 Carbon Steel Lifting Eyes

10. ASTM A490 Heat-Treated Steel Structural Bolts 150ksi Minimum Strength

11. ASTM B6 Zinc

12. ASTM B633 Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel

13. ASTM F541 Alloy Steel Eyebolts

14. ASTM F593 Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws and Studs

15. ASTM F594 Stainless Steel Nuts

16. AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code – Steel

Project Owner GRATINGS AND FLOOR PLATES
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 05 53 00 - 2

1.6 Submittals
A. Furnish the following submittals.

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION
Shop Drawings Submit for fabricated gratings, floor plates and cover plates per structural Shop Drawing requirements
Submit layout drawings for grating, showing direction of span, type and depth of gratings, size and shape of grating panels, seat angle details, and details of grating hold-down fasteners.

Product Data Submit for manufactured products per Product Data requirements.

Submit load and deflection tables for each style and depth of grating used.

Installation
Instructions
Submit per Installation Instructions requirements
Certificate of
Compliance
Submit coating system and application certification per Certificate of Compliance requirements.

Foundry or Test
Record Transcripts
Submit for factory tests upon request per Foundry or Test Record transcript requirements.

Material Samples Submit on request
Welder Qualification
Certificates
Submit for all welders performing work on this project.

Also submit certifications of procedure qualifications for each welding procedure used.

1.7 Delivery, Storage, and Handling
A. Refer to Sections 01 65 00 / 01 66 00 for delivery, storage, and handling requirements.

B. Strictly follow Manufacturer’s instructions and warranty requirements for delivery, storage, and handling of gratings and floor plates.

C. Store materials above ground on platforms, skids, or other supports and protect from rain, dirt, grease, foreign matter, and corrosion.

1.8 Unit Prices
A. Payment for Work in this section shall be included as part of lump-sum or unit-price bid amount for which such Work is appurtenant.

B. Refer to Section 01 22 00 for measurement and payment clauses for gratings and floor plates.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Acceptable Manufacturers
A. Acceptable manufacturers include:

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION
Lifting Eyebolts Cleveland City Forge Wellington, OH (440) 647-5400 Sierra Pacific Engineering and
Products
Long Beach, CA (800) 433-5554
Accepted Equal
Grating - Steel Grating Pacific, Inc. Los Alamitos, CA (562) 598-4314 Inwesco Inc. Azusa, CA (626) 334-9304
Project Owner GRATINGS AND FLOOR PLATES
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 05 53 00 - 3

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION
McNichols Company Tampa, FL (877) 884-4653
SlipNOT Div. W S Molnar Co. Detroit, MI (800) 754-7668
Accepted Equal

2.2 Materials
A. Refer to Section 02 05 00 for basic requirements for products and materials.

B. Structural steel shall conform to Section 05 12 00.

C. Materials for gratings, floor plates and cover plates shall be:

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
Cover Plates
– Checkered
Steel
Welded Steel Conform to ASTM A36
Provide each removable section with U-bolt lifting
handles located at opposite ends.

Galvanized Coating Refer to Section 09 92 00.

Lug Pattern Shall have raised lug pattern on top face and smooth bottom face.

Provide lugs ≥1” long raised at least ½” above
surface.

Lug pattern shall orient lugs at 90° from adjacent
lugs in 2 orthogonal directions.

Orient rows of lugs 45° from plate edges.

Thickness As required to limit total-load deflection to <L/240 per CBC Table 1604.3 or ¼”, whichever is less
Frame Miter and weld corners of embedded angle frames
and grind welds smooth.

Grating –
Steel
Welded Steel Conform to ASTM A36
Size – Refer to Plans
Frame – Miter and weld corners of embedded
angle frames and grind welds smooth.

Galvanized Coating Refer to Section 09 92 00.

Bolts –
Embedded
Eyebolts and
Lifting
Eyebolts
Stainless Steel Conform to ASTM F541 SAE Type 316
Dimensions per ANSI/ASME B18.15
Welded eye type
Carbon Steel Conform to ASTM A489
Dimensions per ANSI/ASME B18.15
Welded eye type
Galvanized Coating Refer to Section 09 92 00.

D. The following product design criteria, options and accessories are required:

ITEM DESCRIPTION
Gratings All grating shall be completely banded including cutouts for penetrations ≥1.0” before galvanizing or installation.

Design Live Load Rating
(Outdoor Paved Areas)
AASHTO H-20 Loading
Design Live Load Rating
(Indoors or Areas Above
Pavement Elevation)
Refer to Structural Load Sheet S-201 or S-301
for Floor Loads or 1000-lbf concentrated load,
whichever produces greater stress or
deflection
Span Refer to Plans
Allowable Live Load
Deflection
<L/360 per CBC Table 1604.3 or ¼”,
whichever is less
Allowable Total Load
Deflection
<L/240 per CBC Table 1604.3 or ¼”,
whichever is less
Project Owner GRATINGS AND FLOOR PLATES
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 05 53 00 - 4

ITEM DESCRIPTION
Maximum Weight of any
Piece or Leaf
100 lbs (when practical)
Minimum Depth See plans
Bearing Bar Size See plans
Bearing Bar Spacing See plans
Minimum Moment of Inertia
(Imin)
See plans
Minimum Section Modulus
(Smin)
See plans
Surface Serrated
Cross Bars Weld or mechanically lock bars into position so no movement occurs between bearing and
cross bars.

Banding Fully band gratings, including cutouts for
penetrations ≥1.0” before galvanizing or
installation.

Weld banding to each cut bearing bar.

Banding shall use same material and cross
section as bearing bars.

Lifting
Eyebolts
Size and Diameter ¼” eyebolt (¾”ID / 1-3/16”OD)
5 /16” eyebolt (⅞”ID / 1-7/16”OD)
⅜” eyebolt (1”ID / 1-21/32”OD)
7 /16” eyebolt (1-3/32”ID / 1-27/32” OD)
½” eyebolt (1-3/16”ID / 2’1/16” OD)
9 /16 eyebolt (1-9/32”ID / 2-9/32” OD)
⅝” eyebolt (1⅜” ID / 2½”OD)
¾” eyebolt (1½”ID / 2-13/16”OD)
⅞” eyebolt (1-11/16”ID / 3¼”OD)
1” eyebolt (1-13/16”ID / 3-9/16”OD
1⅛” eyebolt (2”ID / 4”OD)
1¼” eyebolt (2-3/16”ID / 4-7/16”OD)
1½” eyebolt (2½”ID / 5-3/16”OD)
1¾” eyebolt (2⅞”ID / 6-1/16”OD)
2” eyebolt (3¼”ID / 6⅞” OD)
2½” eyebolt (4”ID / 8-9/16”OD)
Fastenings Fasten grating pieces in 2 locations to each support.

Support
Angles
Support Around Openings Provide support angles matching grating material around openings.

Support angles in concrete shall be
embedded.

Miter and weld angles at corners
Floor
Plates and
Cover
Plates
Thickness See plans
E. Refer to Section 09 92 00 for galvanizing.

F. Before leaving shop, carbon steel not shown or specified to be galvanized or in contact with concrete shall receive one coat of pigmented primer recommended by Manufacturer of final paint system. Parts inaccessible after assembly shall be given second coat of same primer.

G. Final painting shall conform to Section 09 90 00.

Project Owner GRATINGS AND FLOOR PLATES
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 05 53 00 - 5
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Preparation
A. Make field measurements needed to fabricate and install gratings and floor plates before submitting shop drawings or ordering. Make minor changes in dimensions and alignments as needed to avoid utilities or structural conflicts.

B. Clean surfaces of metalwork to be in contact with concrete, removing rust, dirt, grease and other foreign substances before concrete is placed.

C. Aluminum surfaces to contact concrete shall be coated with heavy alkali-resistant bituminous paint or one coat of zinc chromate.

D. Aluminum surfaces to contact dissimilar metals shall be insulated from dissimilar metals using neoprene gaskets or washers.

E. All embedded metalwork shall be secured accurately in position when concrete is placed to prevent displacement or undue vibration during or after placement of concrete.

F. Where metalwork is to be installed in recesses in formed concrete, said recesses shall be made, metalwork installed, and recesses filled with dry-pack mortar in conformance with specifications in Section 03 60 00.

3.2 Installation
A. Refer to Section 02 05 00 for basic execution and installation requirements.

B. Furnish and install gratings and floor plates at locations shown on Plans and Submittals.

C. The following installation standards shall be followed:

1. Applicable OSHA and Cal OSHA regulations.

2. Applicable building code requirements.

3. Manufacturer’s installation and warranty requirements.

D. Refer variances between above documents and Contract Documents to Owner’s Representative.

E. Install gratings and floor plates to tolerances recommended by Manufacturer. Unless otherwise shown, install metal fabrications true and level using precision gauges and levels.

F. Welding shall conform to Section 05 12 00. Permanent connections shall be continuously welded along entire area of contact.

G. Bolting shall conform to Section 05 12 00. Fastenings shall be concealed whenever possible.

H. Built-up parts shall be free of warp.

I. Exposed ends and edges of metal shall be slightly rounded.

J. With written permission of Owner’s Representative, minor or unforeseen access openings and banding of grating may be made in field.

K. Set seat angles for grating flush with finished floor.

L. Maintain gratings and checker plates flush with finished floor.

Project Owner GRATINGS AND FLOOR PLATES
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 05 53 00 - 6

3.3 Field Quality Control
A. Field testing shall include:

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER

TEST STANDARD) FREQUENCY
FIRST
TEST

PAID FOR
BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
Gratings
and
Floor
Plates
No Bends,
Twists or
Open Joints
No
Projecting
Edges or
Corners at
Intersections
Visual Inspection All metalwork Owner Contractor
Field
Performance
Demonstrate
compliance to
Contract Documents
and Manufacturer’s
printed literature
1 test Contractor Contractor
11-Month
Warranty
Inspection
Demonstrate
compliance to
Contract Documents
and Manufacturer’s
printed literature
1 test Owner Contractor

END OF SECTION
Project Owner OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 08 33 23 - 1
SECTION 08 33 23

OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Work Included
A. Materials, testing, and installation of overhead coiling (roll-up) curtain-slat doors, including operating hardware, tracks, frames, and supports.

1.2 Related Work
A. Section 01 22 00: Unit Prices
B. Section 01 33 00: Submittal Procedures
C. Section 01 40 00: Quality Requirements
D. Section 01 66 00: Product Storage and Handling Requirements E. Section 02 05 00: Basic Civil Engineering Requirements F. Section 09 90 00: Painting and Coating
G. Section 13 34 00: Prefabricated Metal Building

1.3 System Description
A. Furnish and install complete operating overhead door including appurtenant structural, mechanical mountings or connections required for compliance with Manufacturer’s installation requirements and compliance with applicable building, fire, and electrical codes and standards.

B. Doors, tracks, motors, and accessories for doors shall be product of one Manufacturer and shipped in one shipment from factory. Secondary components shall be from source acceptable to door Manufacturer.

A. Ensure product is compatible with the prefabricated metal building.

1.5 References
A. Reference publications below form part of this specification to extent referenced and are referred to within text by basic designation only.

1. ASTM A653 Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy Coated (Galvanneald) by the Hot Dip Process

2. ASTM E84 Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

3. California Building Code (CBC)

4. California Fire Code (CFC)

5. Fed Spec QQ-S-775E Steel Sheets, Carbon, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) By Hot-dip Process

6. National Electrical Manufacturers’ Association (NEMA) standards

1.6 Submittals
A. Furnish the following submittals.

Project Owner OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 08 33 23 - 2

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION
Shop Drawings Submit per structural and architectural Shop Drawing requirements.

Product Data Submit per Product Data requirements.

Installation
Instructions
Submit per Installation Instruction requirements.

Submit templates required for installing anchorage devices.

O & M Instructions Submit per Operation and Maintenance Instruction requirements Certificate of
Compliance
Submit coating system and application certification per Certificate of Compliance requirements.

Warranty Furnish 3-year warranty from date of final acceptance B. Refer to Section 02 05 00 for definition of requirements for Shop Drawings, Product Data, Installation Instructions and O&M Instructions.

1.7 Delivery, Storage, and Handling
A. Refer to Sections 01 65 00 / 01 66 00 for delivery, storage, and handling requirements.

B. Strictly follow Manufacturer’s instructions and warranty requirements for delivery, storage and handling of overhead doors.

C. Store doors and materials in manner to prevent damage of marring of doors or finish.

1.8 Unit Prices
A. Payment for Work in this section shall be included as part of lump-sum or unit-price bid amount for which such Work is appurtenant.

B. Refer to Section 01 22 00 for measurement and payment clauses for overhead coiling doors.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Acceptable Manufacturers
A. Acceptable manufacturers include:

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION
Steel ChainOperated
Overhead Doors
and Frames
Cookson Door “FCWI” Phoenix, AZ (800) 294-4358
Kinnear Doors / Wayne “SDF7C” Columbus, OH (614) 487-8899 Accepted equal
B. Installers shall conform to the following:

1. Installer shall be company specializing in door installation with at least 5 years documented experience.

2. Installer shall be factory-authorized by Manufacturer to install their product.

2.2 Materials
A. Refer to Section 02 05 00 for basic requirements for products and materials.

Project Owner OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 08 33 23 - 3
B. Rollup steel doors and frames shall be metal curtain design, weather and dust resistant and shall be shop-fabricated and shop-assembled per referenced standards, complete with slats, guides, hoods, reduction gears, galvanized hand chain, operating mechanism, brackets, gears, head, bottom and side weather-stripping, hardware and other items necessary for functional installation and operation.

C. Provide custom shapes and sizes as defined. Reinforce doors for hardware where necessary.

After fabrication, grind smooth and fill tool marks and other surface imperfections.

D. Fire-rated doors and frames shall bear Underwriters Laboratory (UL) label showing certified rating of door. Steel doors and frames for fire-rated openings shall conform to Underwriter’s Laboratories listing and shall be UL labeled. Designs and construction of such products shall have specific UL approval according to current procedures for fire rating (3-hour, 1½-hour, ¾- hour or 20 minute) as shown.

E. Provide temporary stiffeners, spacers and other accessories needed to facilitate handling and accurate erection.

F. Materials for overhead coiling doors and frames shall be:

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
Door Curtain Slats Commercial
Grade ColdRolled Steel
Galvanized
Sheets
Conform to ASTM A653
20 gauge minimum thickness
Door Curtain Core
Material
Polyurethane
Foam
Conform to ASTM E84
Flame Spread 25 (maximum)
Fuel Contributed 5 (maximum)
Smoke
Developed
25 (maximum)
End Locks Malleable Iron Continuous castings designed to ensure curtain alignment and guard against lateral
movement.

Base Coat Rust-Inhibitive
Epoxy Primer
ASTM B117 - Pass 120-hour salt spray test
Conform to ASTM D1735 – Pass 250-hour
humidity test
Hardware
Reinforcement
Commercial
Grade Coldrolled Steel,
Galvanized
Conform to ANSI A115
Weather Seals Vinyl or
Neoprene
Flexible gaskets
Barrel Steel Pipe
Project Owner OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 08 33 23 - 4

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
Helical Torsion
Spring
Steel Oil-tempered, heat-treated
Hood Galvanized
Steel
24 gauge with bonderized treatment.

Hood Baffle Neoprene and
Sheet Metal
G. The following product design criteria, options and accessories are required for guides, stops, frames and accessories:

ITEM DESCRIPTION
Guides Galvanized steel angle assembly (3/16” min thick) of proper size to retain curtain.

Provide weather stripping on guides.

Do not paint inside working area of guides.

Guide Anchors Bolt Size ⅜” minimum
Maximum Spacing 30” on center
Extend anchors jamb angles and anchors above door head to support coil brackets.

Stops Provide removable stops on guides to prevent curtain overtravel.

Provide continuous bar for holding wind locks where required.

Surface Preparation After SSPC-SP6/NACE 3 Commercial blast cleaning, chemically treat doors to maximize paint adhesion.

H. The following product design criteria, options and accessories are required:

ITEM DESCRIPTION
Door Curtain Slats Exterior Surface 20-gauge minimum
Interior Surface 24-gauge minimum
Slat Height Approximately 3”
Core Filler Material Polyurethane foam
R Value 6.29 minimum
Operation Manual
Design Wind Load 30 pounds per square foot
Project Owner OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 08 33 23 - 5

ITEM DESCRIPTION
Maximum Gap No opening in installed door, between door and frame, and between frame/hood and concrete structure shall exceed ½”.

Endlocks Malleable iron castings galvanized after fabrication, secured to curtain slats with galvanized rivets. Provide locks on alternate curtain slats for curtain alignment and lateral resistance.

Bottom Bar Two 1½”x1½”x⅛” (minimum) angles galvanized and bolted back to back on each side of curtain to match floor profile. Provide replaceable flexible vinyl or neoprene gasket as weather seal and cushion bumper.

Surface Preparation After SSPC-SP6/NACE 3 Commercial blast cleaning, chemically treat doors to maximize paint adhesion.

Weather Seals Door Head Seal ⅛” continuous strip secured to inside of curtain coil hood
Door Jamb Strip ⅛” continuous strip secured to exterior side of jamb guide
Hardware Reinforce doors and frames and drill or tap for fully templated mortised hardware.

Counterbalancing
Mechanism
Spring Steel helical torsion spring(s) mounted
around steel shaft in spring barrel.

Connect to door curtain with required
barrel rings.

Spring shall transfer full load to steel
torsion bar in barrel.

Spring shall be adjustable from outside
barrel.

Barrel Assembly Steel pipe of sufficient diameter and
thickness to support roll-up curtain without
slat distortion
Diameter ≥ 4”
Maximum deflection of barrel - 0.03in//ft
span
Bearings Self-lubricated graphite or grease-sealed
ball bearings
Brackets 5/16” thick cold-rolled steel plate or equal
strength cast iron.

Shall have bell-mouth guide groove for
curtain.

Attach to jamb guide with ½” bolts
Project Owner OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 08 33 23 - 6

ITEM DESCRIPTION
Hood Hood shall fit over end brackets.

Roll and reinforce top and bottom edges of hood for stiffness.

Provide intermediate supports as needed.

Manual Operator Design Endless chain sprocket and reduction gearing to barrel
Chain Pull ≤ 35 lbf
Sprockets and
Gears
Machine cut or machine molded teeth.

Bearings Self-aligning and lubricated for life
(graphite or grease-sealed precision ball
bearings)
Chain Hot-dip galvanized continuous loop at
side of door.

Extend to 24” above floor.

Provide chain and gear guards as needed
to protect against malfunction or hazard.

Coating Baked Acrylic Refer to Section 09 90 00.

Shop prime exposed and concealed metal
parts and doors.

Do not paint inside working area of
guides.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Preparation
A. Make field measurements needed to install overhead doors before submitting Shop Drawings or ordering.

B. Verify required utilities are available, in proper location and ready for use.

C. Make minor changes in dimensions and alignments as needed to avoid utilities or structural conflicts.

3.2 Installation
A. Refer to Section 02 05 00 for basic execution and installation requirements.

B. Furnish and install overhead doors at locations shown on Plans and Submittals.

C. The following installation standards shall be followed:

1. Applicable OSHA and Cal OSHA regulations

2. Applicable building, fire, and electrical code requirements

3. Manufacturer’s installation and warranty requirements D. Refer variances between above documents and Contract Documents to Owner’s Representative.

Project Owner OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 08 33 23 - 7
E. Install overhead coiling doors as follows:

1. Accurately cut and fit doors and frames.

2. Install overhead doors and frames to tolerances recommended by Manufacturer using precision gauges and levels. Finished Work shall be strong, rigid, neat in appearance, square, plumb, true, level, in alignment, and free of defects, warp, or buckle.

3. Cut fasteners to sufficient length. Size for loads imposed.

4. Provide doors and frames with accurately made cutouts.

5. Reinforce doors for strength where necessary.

6. Adjust doors to provide smooth operation.

3.3 Field Quality Control
A. Field testing shall include:

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER

TEST STANDARD) FREQUENCY
FIRST
TEST

PAID FOR
BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
Door Installation Visual inspection of
finished installation
1 inspection Owner Owner
Verify no gaps
exceeding ½” exist.
1 inspection Owner Owner
Operation Shall open and
close with less than
35-lb pull on chain.
1 inspection Owner Owner
Field
Performance
Demonstrate
compliance to
Contract Documents
and Manufacturer’s
printed literature
1 test Contractor Contractor
11-month
Warranty
Inspection
Demonstrate
compliance to
Contract Documents
and Manufacturer’s
printed literature
1 test Owner Contractor
B. Repair damaged prime-painted zinc-coated surfaces and bare zinc-coated surfaces by spotpriming with galvanized repair compound.

C. Provide services of factory authorized representative on-site to provide:

1. Installation assistance, inspection and startup of complete overhead door system.

2. Field testing and adjustment.

3. Instruction of Owner’s personnel in operation and maintenance.

END OF SECTION

Project Owner OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 08 33 23 - 8

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Project Owner ALUMINUM WINDOWS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 08 51 13 - 1
SECTION 08 51 13

ALUMINUM WINDOWS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Work Included
A. Materials, testing, and installation of aluminum windows.

1.3 System Description
A. Furnish and install complete operating aluminum windows including appurtenant mountings or connections required for compliance with Manufacturer’s installation requirements and compliance with applicable building codes and standards.

B. California Energy Code §116 requires fenestration products to bear clearly visible temporary labels meeting Title 24 requirements and listing air leakage, U-factors, solar heat gain coefficients (SHGC’s) and methods used to determine these values. Do not remove label before inspection by both Owner’s Representative and Building Official’s inspector.

C. California Energy Code test requirements are as follows:

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER TEST

STANDARD) FREQUENCY
FIRST
TEST

PAID FOR
BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
Aluminum
Windows
U-Factor U≤0.40 / Do not exceed
limits in California Energy
Code Table 116A.

Refer to Section 08 81 00
All windows
shall bear
visible labels
Contractor Contractor
Solar Heat
Gain
Coefficient
(SHGC)
SHGC≤0.38 / Do not exceed
limits in California Energy
Code Table 116B. Refer to
Section 08 81 00
All windows
shall bear
visible labels
Contractor Contractor
Air Leakage 0.3 cfm/ft2 maximum at 1.57
psf test pressure per ASTM
A283 or NFRC 400
All skylights
shall bear
visible labels
Contractor Contractor
Project Owner ALUMINUM WINDOWS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 08 51 13 - 2

1.5 References
A. Reference publications below form part of this specification to extent referenced and are referred to within text by basic designation only.

1. AAMA/WDMA/ANSI 101 Windows, Doors, and Unit Skylights

2. ASTM E283 Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen

3. ASTM E2010 Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Window Assemblies

4. California Building Code (CBC)

5. California Energy Code (CEnC)

6. NFRC 100 (U-factors)

7. NFRC 200 (SHGC’s)

8. NFRC 400 (Fenestration Product Air Leakage)

1.6 Submittals
A. Furnish the following submittals.

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION
Shop Drawings Required per architectural Shop Drawing requirements.

Product Data Required per Product Data requirements.

Installation Instructions Required per Installation Instruction requirements.

O & M Instructions Required per Operation and Maintenance Instruction requirements.

Certificate of Compliance On each unit, provide AAMA-sponsored label certifying compliance.

Provide evidence of Energy Star Rating
Warranty Furnish one-year warranty from date of final acceptance B. Refer to Section 02 05 00 for definition of requirements for Shop Drawings, Product Data, Installation Instructions, O&M Instructions, and Certificates of Compliance.

1.7 Delivery, Storage, and Handling
A. Refer to Sections 01 65 00 / 01 66 00 for delivery, storage, and handling requirements.

B. Strictly follow Manufacturer’s instructions and warranty requirements for delivery, storage, and handling of aluminum windows.

1.8 Unit Prices
A. Payment for Work in this section shall be included as part of lump-sum or unit-price bid amount for which such Work is appurtenant.

B. Refer to Section 01 22 00 for measurement and payment clauses for aluminum windows.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Acceptable Manufacturers
A. Acceptable Manufacturers include:

Project Owner ALUMINUM WINDOWS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 08 51 13 - 3

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION
Fixed Aluminum
Windows
All Weather Architectural Aluminum Vacaville, CA (707) 452-1600 Harvey Building Products Waltham, MA (800) 598-5400
Jeld-Wen Inc. Charlotte, NC (800) 535-3936
Accepted equal

2.2 Materials
A. Refer to Section 02 05 00 for basic requirements for products and materials.

B. Comply with ANSI-AAMA 101 for designations specified..

C. Materials for aluminum windows shall be:

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
Fixed
Aluminum
Window
Aluminum Heavy gage extrusions
Vinyl Gaskets Channel-type
Glass Laminated Glass per Section 08 81 00
Double-Pane Insulated
Clear
Conform to energy efficiency requirements of Section 08 81 00 and California Energy Code §116
Finish Class 1 anodized clear finish
Color selected by Owner’s Representative to match adjacent surfaces
D. The following product design criteria, options and accessories are required:

ITEM DESCRIPTION
Aluminum
Windows
U-value Class U30
CRF Class C50
Performance Class 30
Vents Provide Manufacturer’s standard screen at vents
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Preparation
A. Make field measurements needed to install aluminum windows before submitting shop drawings or ordering. Make minor changes in dimensions and alignments as needed to avoid utilities or structural conflicts.

3.2 Installation
A. Refer to Section 02 05 00 for basic execution and installation requirements.

B. Furnish and install aluminum windows at locations shown on Plans and Submittals.

C. The following installation standards shall be followed:

1. Applicable OSHA and Cal OSHA regulations

2. California Building Code Chapter 24 “Glass and Glazing” Project Owner ALUMINUM WINDOWS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 08 51 13 - 4

3. California Energy Code §116 “Mandatory Requirements for Fenestration Products and Exterior Doors”

4. Applicable building and fire code requirements

5. Manufacturer’s installation and warranty requirements D. Refer variances between above documents and Contract Documents to Owner’s Representative.

E. Install aluminum windows to tolerances recommended by Manufacturer. Unless otherwise shown, install aluminum windows square, true, plumb and level using precision gauges and levels.

F. Anchor components firmly into position for long life under hard use.

G. Where aluminum surfaces contact metals other than stainless steel, zinc or white bronze of small area, isolate aluminum by one of the following methods:

1. Paint dissimilar metal with prime coat of zinc-chromate primer, followed by 2 coats of aluminum paint.

2. Paint dissimilar metal with coating of heavy-bodied bituminous paint.

3. Apply quality sealant material between aluminum and dissimilar metals.

4. Isolate dissimilar metals with non-absorptive tape or gaskets.

H. Leave labels on glass until inspection and acceptance by Owner’s Representative.

3.3 Field Quality Control
A. Field testing shall include:

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER

TEST STANDARD) FREQUENCY

FIRST TEST

PAID FOR
BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
Aluminum
Windows
Installation &
Leakage
Visual inspection of
finished installation
1 inspection Owner Owner
Field
Performance
Demonstrate
compliance to
Contract Documents
and Manufacturer’s
printed literature
1 test Contractor Contractor
11-month
Warranty
Inspection
Demonstrate
compliance to
Contract Documents
and Manufacturer’s
printed literature
1 test Owner Contractor

END OF SECTION
Project Owner GLASS GLAZING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 08 81 00 - 1
SECTION 08 81 00

GLASS GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Work Included
A. Materials, testing, and installation of glass.

1.3 System Description
A. Furnish and install glass where shown including appurtenant mountings or connections required for compliance with Manufacturer’s installation requirements and compliance with applicable building codes and standards.

B. Prior to tempering or heat-treating, seam glass on required sizes as determined by accurate measurements of glazed openings, making allowances for required edge clearances and glass lap in accordance with industry standards.

1.5 References
A. Reference publications below form part of this specification to extent referenced and are referred to within text by basic designation only.

1. ANSI Z97.1 Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings - Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test

2. ASTM C1036 Flat Glass

3. ASTM C1048 Heat-Treated Flat Glass—Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass

4. ASTM C1172 Laminated Architectural Flat Glass

5. ASTM E283 Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen

6. Flat Glass Marketing Association Sealant Manual

7. Flat Glass Marketing Association Glazing Manual

8. NFRC 100 Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product U-factors

9. NFRC 200 Non-Residential Fenestration Systems (SHGC’s)

1.6 Submittals
A. Furnish the following submittals.

Project Owner GLASS GLAZING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 08 81 00 - 2

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION
Product Data Submit per Product Data requirements.

Show weight, wind load capacity, U-value, light and heat transmittance and shading coefficient
Installation
Instructions
Submit per Installation Instruction requirements.

Certificate of
Compliance
Submit per Certificate of Compliance requirements.

Provide evidence of Energy Star Rating
Test Record
Transcripts
Submit for factory tests per Test Record Transcript
requirements.

Material Samples Required upon Owner request
Warranty Furnish one-year warranty from date of final acceptance.

B. Refer to Section 02 05 00 for definition of requirements for Product Data, Installation Instructions, Certificates of Compliance, Test Record Transcripts, and Material Samples.

1.7 Delivery, Storage, and Handling
A. Refer to Sections 01 65 00 / 01 66 00 for delivery, storage, and handling requirements.

B. Strictly follow Manufacturer’s instructions and warranty requirements for delivery, storage, and handling of glass.

1.8 Unit Prices
A. Payment for Work in this section shall be included as part of lump-sum or unit-price bid amount for which such Work is appurtenant.

B. Refer to Section 01 22 00 for measurement and payment clauses for glass glazing.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Acceptable Manufacturers
A. Acceptable Manufacturers include:

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION
Window Glass PPG Architectural Glass Cheswick, PA (888) 774-4332 Accepted equal

2.2 Materials
A. Refer to Section 02 05 00 for basic requirements for products and materials.

Project Owner GLASS GLAZING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 08 81 00 - 3
B. Materials for glass shall be:

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
Glass Laminated Glass Conform to ASTM C1172
Inner face – Quality q5 float glass
Inter-layer – 3.0-mil thick PVB
Outer face – Quality q5 float glass
¼” thick for maximum sizes of 60” x 120”
Tinting Clear
C. The following product design criteria, options and accessories are required:

ITEM DESCRIPTION
Fenestration Maximum
U-Factor
Fixed Metal-Frame
Windows

0.40 – double pane energy efficient
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Preparation
A. Make field measurements needed to install glass before submitting shop drawings or ordering.

Make minor changes in dimensions and alignments as needed to avoid utilities or structural conflicts.

B. Inspect each piece of glass immediately before installation.

C. Clean cut edges in accordance with glass Manufacturer’s recommendation.

D. Edge treatment in field is not permitted.

E. Do not install items which are improperly sized, which have damaged edges, or are scratched, nicked, cracked, abraded or deficient.

F. Do not install glazing at temperatures below 40°F unless precautions are taken to prevent moisture condensation in rabbets where glass is to be installed.

G. Where labels are provided by glass supplier, do not remove such labels until directed by Owner’s Representative.

3.2 Installation
A. Refer to Section 02 05 00 for basic execution and installation requirements.

B. Furnish and install glass at locations shown on Plans and Submittals.

C. The following installation standards shall be followed:

1. Applicable OSHA and Cal OSHA regulations

2. California Building Code Chapter 24 “Glass and Glazing”

3. Other applicable building and fire code requirements

4. Manufacturer’s installation and warranty requirements D. Refer variances between above documents and Contract Documents to Owner’s Representative.

E. Install glass to tolerances recommended by Manufacturer. Unless otherwise shown, install glass square, true, plumb, and level using precision gauges and levels.

Project Owner GLASS GLAZING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 08 81 00 - 4
F. Install glass so distortion waves, if present, run in horizontal direction.

G. Locate sill setting blocks of standard width and thickness at quarter points of glass lites unless otherwise recommended by Manufacturer or supplier.

1. Use blocks of proper Durometer size and thickness to support glass in accordance with Manufacturer’s recommendations.

2. Provide spacers for glass sizes larger than 50 united inches to separate glass from stops, except where continuous glazing gaskets or other resilient glazing materials are used.

3. Locate spacers no more than 24” apart and no closer to corners than 12”

4. Place spacers opposite one another.

5. Provide glass lap and edge clearances as required by governmental agencies having jurisdiction.

H. Set glass in manner which produces greatest possible uniformity in appearance, locating “bugs” in lower right-hand interior corner.

I. Where so directed, protect glass from breakage after installation by promptly installing streamers or ribbons, suitably attached to framing and held free from glass.

J. Do not apply warning markings, streamers, ribbons or other items directly to glass except as specifically directed by Owner’s Representative.

K. When tong marks are required, locate at bottom edge of lite and concealed by glazing rabbet.

L. Do not operate windows or doors when glazing compounds are used until glazing compound has set.

3.3 Field Quality Control
A. Field testing shall include:

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER

TEST STANDARD) FREQUENCY
FIRST
TEST

PAID FOR
BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
Glass Installation &
Air Leakage
Visual inspection of
finished installation
1 inspection Owner Owner
Field
Performance
Demonstrate
compliance to
Contract Documents
and Manufacturer’s
printed literature
1 test Contractor Contractor
11-month
Warranty
Inspection
Demonstrate
compliance to
Contract Documents
and Manufacturer’s
printed literature
1 test Owner Contractor

END OF SECTION
Project Owner FIXED LOUVERS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 08 91 19 - 1
SECTION 08 91 19

FIXED LOUVERS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Work Included
A. Materials, testing, and installation of stationary louvers, including bird screens and vandal protection.

1.2 Related Work
A. Section 01 22 00: Unit Prices
B. Section 01 33 00: Submittal Procedures
C. Section 01 40 00: Quality Requirements
D. Section 01 66 00: Product Storage and Handling Requirements E. Section 02 05 00: Basic Civil Engineering Requirements F. Section 07 62 00: Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
G. Section 09 90 00: Painting and Coating
H. Section 13 34 00: Prefabricated Metal Building

1.3 System Description
A. Furnish and install complete stationary louver including appurtenant mountings or connections required for compliance with Manufacturer’s installation requirements and compliance with applicable building codes and standards.

B. Factory testing shall include:

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER

TEST STANDARD)

FREQUENC
Y
FIRST
TEST

PAID FOR
BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
Stationary
Louvers
Airflow
Performance
Rating
AMCA Certified
Ratings Seal based
on AMCA 511
1 each louver
type
Contractor Contractor
Water
Penetration
Ratiings
AMCA Certified
Ratings Seal based
on AMCA 511
Maximum 0.01 oz
water per square
foot free area when
tested for 15
minutes
1 each louver
type
Contractor Contractor
C. Contractor shall ensure that louvers are compatible with prefabricated metal building.

Project Owner FIXED LOUVERS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 08 91 19 - 2

1.5 References
A. Reference publications below form part of this specification to extent referenced and are referred to within text by basic designation only.

1. AA - Designation System for Aluminum Finishes

2. AAMA 605.2 - High Performance Organic Coatings on Architectural Extrusions and Panels

3. AMCA 500 - Test Methods for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters

4. AMCA 511 - Certified Ratings Program for Air Control Devices

5. ASTM B221 – Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes and Tubes

6. ASTM E90 - Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions

7. SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual

1.6 Submittals
A. Furnish the following submittals.

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION
Shop Drawings Submit per structural and architectural Shop Drawing requirements.

Show louver layout plan and elevations, opening and clearance dimensions, tolerances, head, jamb, and sill details, blade configuration, screens, required blank-out areas, frames, materials, and finishes.

Product Data Submit per Product Data requirements.

Installation
Instructions
Submit per Installation Instruction requirements.

Certificates of
Compliance
Submit certified AMCA-licensed data showing louver provides minimum square footage of free area and passes required velocities through free area without exceeding specified pressure drop or causing vibration.

Material Samples Submit sample of louver to show frame, blades, insulation, bird screen, accessories, finish, and color
Warranty Furnish one-year warranty from date of final acceptance.

B. Refer to Section 02 05 00 for definition of requirements for Shop Drawings, Product Data, Installation Instructions, and Material Samples.

1.7 Delivery, Storage and Handling
A. Refer to Sections 01 65 00 / 01 66 00 for delivery, storage, and handling requirements.

B. Strictly follow Manufacturer’s instructions and warranty requirements for delivery, storage and handling of stationary louvers.

C. Protect louvers from damage. Remove louvers with kinked or pinched blades from site.

Project Owner FIXED LOUVERS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 08 91 19 - 3

1.8 Unit Prices
A. Payment for Work in this section shall be included as part of lump-sum or unit-price bid amount for which such Work is appurtenant.

B. Refer to Section 01 22 00 for measurement and payment clauses for fixed louvers.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Acceptable Manufacturers
A. Acceptable Manufacturers include:

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION
Stationary
Louvers
Airline Louvers Prince Frederick, MD
(570) 420-7079
Airolite Company Schofield, WI (715) 841-8757
All-Lite Louver Company Fort Worth, TX (817) 509-2300
American Warming and Ventilating
Company (AWV)
Holland, OH (419) 865-5000
Construction Specialties, Inc. (CS) Cranford, NJ (800) 233-8493 Greenheck Fan Corporation Schofield, WI (715) 359-6171
Industrial Acoustic Company Agawam, MA (413) 789-1770
Industrial Louvers, Inc Delano, MN (763) 972-2981
Reliable Architectural Products Geneva, AL (800) 624-3914 Ruskin Manufacturing Company Grandview, MO (816) 761-7476 United Enertech Louvers Chattanooga, TN
Accepted equal

2.2 Materials
A. Refer to Section 02 05 00 for basic requirements for products and materials.

B. Materials for stationary louvers shall be:

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
Louver Frame Aluminum Conform to ASTM B221 alloy 6063-T5 16-gauge (0.0598”) minimum casing
Blades Aluminum Conform to ASTM B221 alloy 6063-T5
16-gauge (0.0598”) minimum thickness
Rainwater Stops Same material
as blades
Provide integral and lateral rainwater stops
positioned on blades.

Project Owner FIXED LOUVERS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 08 91 19 - 4

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
Anchors, Fasteners,
Reinforcing
Stainless Steel Phillips flat-head machine screws
Extended Sills Aluminum Conform to ASTM B221 alloy 6063-T5 Minimum nominal wall thickness 0.060”
Mullions Manufacturer’s standard horizontal or
vertical for architectural accent as shown on
Drawings
Finish Anodized Coating
Class 1 per AA
Color selected by Owner from color chart
Bird Screen Aluminum 16-gauge ½” mesh
Bird Screen Frame
(Attach w/ #12 screws
at ≤ 16” on center)
Aluminum 18-gauge (0.478”) frame
Installation Factory-install screen in shape of frame,
reinforce corner construction, connect to
louver frame with stainless steel fasteners.

Security Bars Not Required
C. The following product design criteria, options and accessories are required:

ITEM DESCRIPTION
Stationary
Louvers
Construction Conform to SMACNA Figure 7-5.

Blade Angle Varies
Blade Style Varies
Louver Size See plans
Minimum Face Area 24% (0.71 sf)
Maximum Pressure Drop 0.10 in wg @ 850 fpm
Water Penetration Zero @ 850 fpm
Sound Attenuation Free Field Noise
Reduction (minimum across field)
STC-13 per ASTM E90
Frame Depth 4”
Wind Load Design mountings to withstand 25
psf
D. Louver performance data shall be as shown on the Plans.

E. Louvers shall permit free air velocities of up to 1025 fpm without blade vibration or noise.

Project Owner FIXED LOUVERS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 08 91 19 - 5
F. Frame and louver blades shall be assembled by welding.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Preparation
A. Inspect areas to receive louvers. Verify opening dimensions conform to Shop Drawing dimensions and prepared openings are ready to receive Work.

B. Notify Owner’s Representative of conditions that might adversely affect installation or subsequent use of louvers.

C. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

D. Make field measurements needed to install stationary louvers before submitting shop drawings or ordering. Make minor changes in dimensions and alignments as needed to avoid utilities or structural conflicts.

3.2 Installation
A. Refer to Section 02 05 00 for basic execution and installation requirements.

B. Furnish and install stationary louvers at locations shown on Plans and Submittals.

C. The following installation standards shall be followed:

1. Applicable OSHA and Cal OSHA regulations

2. Applicable building and fire code requirements

3. Manufacturer’s installation and warranty requirements D. Refer variances between above documents and Contract Documents to Owner’s Representative.

E. Install stationary louvers to tolerances recommended by Manufacturer. Unless otherwise shown, install stationary louvers true and plumb using precision gauges and levels.

F. Install stationary louvers as follows:

1. Secure louver/damper assembly in opening framing using concealed fasteners removable for maintenance purposes.

2. Install joint sealants as specified in Section 07 92 00.

3. Provide factory-matching touchup paint to repair scratches or scuffs.

3.3 Field Quality Control
A. Field testing shall include:

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER

TEST STANDARD) FREQUENCY
FIRST

TEST PAID
FOR BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
Louver Installation Visual inspection of
finished installation
1 inspection Owner Owner
11-month
Warranty
Inspection
Demonstrate
compliance to
Contract Documents
and Manufacturer’s
printed literature
1 test Owner Contractor

END OF SECTION
Project Owner FIXED LOUVERS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 08 91 19 - 6

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Project Owner GYPSUM BOARD
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 09 29 00 - 1
SECTION 09 29 00

GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Work Included
A. Materials, testing, and installation of gypsum board.

1.3 System Description
A. Furnish and install gypsum board where shown including appurtenant structural, mechanical and/or electrical mountings or connections required for compliance with Manufacturer’s installation requirements and compliance with applicable building codes and standards.

B. Factory testing shall include:

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER

TEST STANDARD) FREQUENCY
FIRST
TEST

PAID FOR
BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
Gypsum
Products
Building
Code
Compliance
ASTM C22, ASTM
C472 and ASTM
C473
As required
by CBC
Contractor Contractor

1.5 References
A. Reference publications below form part of this specification to extent referenced and are referred to within text by basic designation only.

1. ASTM C22 Gypsum

2. ASTM C36 Gypsum Wallboard

3. ASTM C442 Gypsum Backing Board, Gypsum Coreboard, and Gypsum Shaftliner Board

4. ASTM C472 Physical Testing of Gypsum, Gypsum Plasters and Gypsum Concrete

5. ASTM C473 Physical Testing of Gypsum Panel Products

6. ASTM C474 Testing Joint Treatment Materials for Gypsum Board Construction

7. ASTM C475 Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board

8. ASTM C514 Nails for the Application of Gypsum Board
Project Owner GYPSUM BOARD
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 09 29 00 - 2

9. ASTM C557 Adhesives for Fastening Gypsum Wallboard to Wood Framing

10. ASTM C645 Nonstructural Steel Framing Members

11. ASTM C665 Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing

12. ASTM C754 Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products

13. ASTM C841 Installation of Interior Lathing and Furring

14. ASTM C844 Application of Gypsum Base to Receive Gypsum Veneer Plaster

15. ASTM C954 Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs from 0.033 in. (0.84 mm) to 0.112 in. (2.84 mm) in Thickness

16. ASTM C955 Load-Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs, Runners (Tracks), and Bracing or Bridging for Screw Application of Gypsum Panel Products and Metal Plaster Bases

17. ASTM C1002 Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs

18. ASTM C1007 Installation of Load Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs and Related Accessories

19. ASTM C1047 Accessories for Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum Veneer Base

20. ASTM C1177 Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing

21. ASTM C1178 Coated Glass Mat Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Panel

22. ASTM C1278 Fiber-Reinforced Gypsum Panel

23. ASTM C1280 Application of Gypsum Sheathing

24. ASTM C1395 Gypsum Ceiling Board

25. ASTM C1396 Gypsum Board

26. CA SFM 12.7A-3 State Fire Marshall Test Standard for Under Eaves

27. California Building Code (CBC)

28. California Fire Code (CFC)

29. GA 216 Application and Finishing of Gypsum Panel Products

1.6 Submittals
A. Furnish the following submittals.

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION
Product Data Submit per Product Data requirements.

Installation Instructions Submit per Installation Instruction requirements.

Warranty Furnish one-year warranty from date of final acceptance B. Refer to Section 02 05 00 for definition of requirements for Product Data and Installation Instructions.

1.7 Delivery, Storage, and Handling
A. Refer to Sections 01 65 00 / 01 66 00 for delivery, storage, and handling requirements.

Project Owner GYPSUM BOARD
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 09 29 00 - 3
B. Strictly follow Manufacturer’s instructions and warranty requirements for delivery, storage, and handling of gypsum board.

1.8 Unit Prices
A. Payment for Work in this section shall be included as part of lump-sum or unit-price bid amount for which such Work is appurtenant.

B. Refer to Section 01 22 00 for measurement and payment clauses for gypsum board.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Acceptable Manufacturers
A. Acceptable Manufacturers include:

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION
Fire-Rated
Gypsum
Board
System
Fire Trak Corp Watkins, MN (320) 764-7660
Georgia Pacific DensDeck® Roof Board Atlanta, GA (800) 225-6119 National Gypsum Company Charlotte, NC (800) 628-4662
Accepted equal

2.2 Materials
A. Refer to Section 02 05 00 for basic requirements for products and materials.

B. Materials for gypsum board shall be:

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
Gypsum Conform to ASTM C22
Gypsum Board Fire-rated type Conform to ASTM C36 fire-resistive UL-rated
Corner Beads Metal
Fasteners Nails Conform to ASTM C1002 Type W
Hardened screws Conform to ASTM C1002 Type S12
Joint Materials Reinforcing tape,
joint compound,
adhesive and
water
Conform to ASTM C475
C. The following product design criteria, options and accessories are required:

ITEM DESCRIPTION
Gypsum Board Thickness 5/8”
Type Fire-rated type
Project Owner GYPSUM BOARD
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 09 29 00 - 4
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Preparation
A. Make field measurements needed to install gypsum board before submitting shop drawings or ordering. Make minor changes in dimensions and alignments as needed to avoid utilities or structural conflicts.

B. Examine areas and conditions under which work of this section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.2 Installation
A. Refer to Section 02 05 00 for basic execution and installation requirements.

B. Furnish and install gypsum board at locations shown on Plans and Submittals.

C. The following installation standards shall be followed:

1. Applicable OSHA and Cal OSHA regulations

2. California Building Code Chapter 25 “Gypsum Board and Plaster” Section 2508 “Gypsum Construction.”

3. Other applicable building and fire code requirements

4. Manufacturer’s installation and warranty requirements

5. ASTM C1280 (exterior surfaces)

6. GA 216 Application and Finishing of Gypsum Panel Products D. Refer variances between above documents and Contract Documents to Owner’s Representative.

E. Install gypsum board to tolerances recommended by Manufacturer. Unless otherwise shown, install gypsum board plumb, true, and level using precision gauges and levels.

F. Install gypsum board as follows:

1. Fasten gypsum board to furring or framing with nails or screws.

2. Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces as directed.

3. Place corner beads at external corners. Place edge trim where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials.

4. Tape, sand, and fill exposed joints, edges, and corners to a smooth surface ready to receive finish.

Project Owner GYPSUM BOARD
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 09 29 00 - 5

3.3 Field Quality Control
A. Field testing shall include:

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER

TEST STANDARD) FREQUENCY
FIRST
TEST

PAID FOR
BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
Gypsum
Board
Installation Visual inspection of
finished installation
1 inspection Owner Owner
Field
Performance
Demonstrate
compliance to
Contract Documents
and Manufacturer’s
printed literature
1 test Contractor Contractor
11-month
Warranty
Inspection
Demonstrate
compliance to
Contract Documents
and Manufacturer’s
printed literature
1 test Owner Contractor

END OF SECTION
Project Owner GYPSUM BOARD
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 09 29 00 - 6

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Project Owner PAINTING AND COATING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 09 90 00 1
SECTION 09 90 00

PAINTING AND COATING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Work Included
A. Requirements for preparation of surfaces and subsequent application of protective coatings.

Furnish labor, materials and equipment required for satisfactory completion of Work described herein.

B. Unless otherwise specified or directed by Owner’s Representative, paint all surfaces except:

1. Nameplates, Manufacturer’s data plates, UL labels, and stamping and instruction labels.

2. Grease fittings.

3. Threads of threaded fittings.

4. Door and window hardware.

5. Plumbing fixtures.

6. Glass, glazing, and porcelain materials.

7. Metal dimensional letters.

8. Light switches and receptacle plates.

9. Fusible links.

10. Mating, contacting, or rotating machined surfaces, shafts, gears, and bearings.

11. Gratings, hatch covers, manhole covers, and valve lids,

12. Aluminum items.

13. Decorative brass, bronze, chrome, copper, or nickel-plated items.

14. Stainless steel items.

15. Galvanized items.

16. Ductwork Interior Surfaces – (except interior surfaces of ducts, vents, dampers, and louvers shall be painted with 2 coats of flat black paint as far back as visible from room into which they open)

17. Ductwork galvanized exterior surfaces – Except exterior of insulation and duct tape shall be painted with same system as for gypsum board.

18. Electrical conduit

19. Electrical wiring and insulation.

20. Electrical and lighting fixtures.

21. Factory-coated items having a complete factory finish, including control panels, and motors,

22. Flexible items including flexible conduit, rubber items, and flexible or fabric connections to fans or ducts.

C. Coat contacting metal surfaces of structures to be bolted together as follows:

1. When bolted contact is to exist between surfaces of ferrous or other metal parts of identical chemical composition, such surfaces need not be painted, but resulting crevices shall be filled or sealed with paint. Such surfaces shall be protected during shipping and handling by rust-resistant coating to be removed before surfaces are mated.

Project Owner PAINTING AND COATING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 09 90 00 2

2. Do not paint contacting metal surfaces formed by high-strength bolts in friction-type connections.

3. Where nonmetal surface is in bolted contact with metal surface, clean contacting metal surfaces and coat with 3 coats of specified primer.

D. Structural and miscellaneous steel and metal floor decking which will not be exposed in final construction shall have no finish other than one coat of shop primer,

1.3 System Description
A. Furnish and install complete functional coating system for specified surface in compliance with applicable local air quality management regulations and NSF requirements for use with potable water where applicable. Comply with Manufacturer’s application requirements and applicable codes and standards.

B. Paint shall be homogenous, free of contaminants, and of consistency suitable for intended use. Pigment shall be finely ground and properly dispersed in vehicle such that pigment does not settle, cake, or thicken in container, or become granular or curdled.

C. “Dry film thickness” or DFT shall refer to thickness of fully cured coat of paint measured in mils (1/1000”)

B. Paint shall be homogeneous, free of contaminants, and of a consistency suitable for the specified use. Pigment shall be finely ground and properly dispersed in vehicle according to paint requirements, and dispersion shall be of such nature that pigment does not settle appreciably, does not cake or thicken in container, or become granular or curdled.

C. Do not use paint until at least 7 days have elapsed since manufacture.

Project Owner PAINTING AND COATING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 09 90 00 3
D. Factory testing shall include:

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER

TEST STANDARD) FREQUENCY
FIRST
TEST

PAID FOR
BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
Offsite
Surface
Preparation
and Priming
for
Prefabricated
Steel
Structures
Offsite
Inspection of
Priming
Operation
Applicable
standards
As directed Contractor
to pay
travel
expenses
for
Inspector
hired by
Owner
Contractor
to pay travel
expenses
and
Inspection
costs for
Inspector
hired by
Owner
Painting and
Coating
Materials
Compliance
with Contract
Requirements
Federal Standard
141
Test
representative
sample
Contractor Contractor
Paint from
Proposed
“equals”
Spectrographic
and Durability
Tests
Federal Standard
141 and applicable
ASTM standards
As directed Contractor Contractor
Valve, Pump,
Meter and
Pipeline
Appurtenance
Interiors
Holidays ASTM D5162
Certify as holiday
free using low
voltage (22.5-80V
with approximately
80,000 Ω
resistance) holiday
detector and a
sponge saturated
with a 0.5% sodium
chloride solution
Each lined
item
Contractor Contractor
Lining
Thickness
Verify thickness
with magnetic-type
dry film thickness
gauge.

Each lined
item
Contractor Contractor
E. Surface preparation and priming operations accomplished offsite for prefabricated structural members will be monitored 100% by Owner-appointed quality control inspector at Owner’s option. Additional costs incurred by offsite inspection shall be borne by Contractor. These include but are not limited to travel, lodging, food, auto rental (where applicable) and other expenses directly related to offsite inspection.

F. Submit schedule of shop activities as specified below under “Submittals.” G. If shop work is not scheduled on consecutive basis to facilitate scheduling of offsite inspector, expenses incurred by multiple trips to shop will be borne by Contractor.

H. Failure by Owner to exercise option for shop inspection shall in no way relieve Contractor of his duty to meet Contract requirements.

Project Owner PAINTING AND COATING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 09 90 00 4

1.5 References
A. Reference publications below form part of this specification to extent referenced and are referred to within text by basic designation only.

1. ASTM A780 Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings

2. ASTM D5162 Discontinuity (Holiday) Testing of Nonconductive Protective Coating on Metallic Substrates

3. ASTM D6386 Surface Preparation of Galvanized Surfaces

4. AWWA C550 Protective Epoxy Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants

5. Federal Standard 141 Paint, Varnish, Lacquer, and Related Materials: Methods of Inspection, Sampling, and Testing

6. NACE 6D-173 Manual for Painter Safety

7. NACE RP0188 Discontinuity (Holiday) Testing of Protective Coatings

8. SSPC Guide 12 Guide for Illumination of Industrial Painting Projects

9. SSPC PA1 Shop, Field and Maintenance Painting

10. SSPC PA2 Measurement of Dry Paint Thickness with Magnetic Gauges

11. SSPC PA3 Safety in Paint Applications

12. SSPC SP1 Solvent Cleaning

13. SSPC SP2 Hand Tool Cleaning

14. SSPC SP3 Power Tool Cleaning

15. SSPC SP5/NACE 1 White Metal Blast Cleaning

16. SSPC SP6/NACE 3 Commercial Blast Cleaning

17. SSPC SP7 Brush-off Blast Cleaning

18. SSPC SP10/NACE 2 Near White Blast Cleaning

19. SSPC SP11 Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal

20. SSPC SP13/NACE 6 Surface Preparation of Concrete

21. SSPC SP15 Commercial-Grade Power Tool Cleaning

22. SSPC Vis1 Pictorial Surface Preparation Standards for Painting Steel Surfaces

1.6 Submittals
A. Furnish the following submittals.

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION
Schedule of
Shop Activities
Show hours of work per day, days of work per week and total hours required for performance of shop cleaning and priming operations.

Notify Owner’s Representative at least 7 days in advance of shop cleaning and priming operations
Paint, Color, and
Finish Schedule
Submit finish schedule showing the following for each surface type.

1. Surface

2. Surface preparation

3. Proposed primer product and thickness
Project Owner PAINTING AND COATING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 09 90 00 5

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION

4. Proposed intermediate coat and thickness

5. Proposed finish coat and thickness

6. Proposed color

7. Proposed finish (flat, eggshell, satin, semi-gloss or high gloss) Product Data Submit per Product Data requirements.

Include VOC data
Application
Instructions
Submit for each paint and coating per Application Instruction requirements. Include:

1. Surface Preparation Requirements.

2. MSDS sheets identifying flammability, toxicity, allergenic properties and other characteristics requiring field precautions.

3. Safety practices

4. Minimum and maximum recommended dry-film thicknesses per coat for prime, intermediate, and finish coats.

5. Percent solids by volume.

6. Recommended thinners.

7. Statement verifying selected prime coat is recommended by Manufacturer for use with selected intermediate and finish coats.

8. Recommended application, equipment, humidity, and temperature limitations.

9. Curing requirements and instructions.

10. Patching, repair, and touch-up instructions.

O & M &
Cleaning
Instructions
Required per Operation and Maintenance Instruction requirements.

Certificate of
Compliance

1. With each delivery of paint and coating materials, Manufacturer shall certify materials conform to Contract Documents.

2. Submit certification that coatings conform to applicable local Air Quality Management District rules and regulations for products and application

3. Submit coating system and application certification that coatings conform to specified requirements and are suitable for intended application per certificate of compliance requirements.

Material and
Color Samples
Submit current Manufacturer’s color samples showing full range of available standard colors. Owner will select colors.

Applicator’s
Quality
Assurance
Submit list of at least 5 completed projects of similar size and complexity. Include product name and location, name of owner, name of contractor, name of engineer, name of coating Manufacturer, approximate area of coatings applied and date of completion Project Owner PAINTING AND COATING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 09 90 00 6

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION
Inspection
Reports

1. Submit inspection reports and data collection sheets for surface preparation and profile checks, coating thickness measurements for each coat, holiday tests, ambient conditions, and other pertinent records.

2. Submit written 3rd-party report from accepted testing agency describing inspections made and actions taken to correct nonconforming work.

3. Report nonconforming work not corrected.

Warranty Furnish one-year warranty from date of final acceptance B. Refer to Section 02 05 00 for definition of requirements for Product Data, Application Instructions, O&M Instructions, Certificates of Compliance, and Material Samples.

1.7 Delivery, Storage, and Handling
A. Refer to Sections 01 65 00 / 01 66 00 for delivery, storage, and handling requirements.

B. Strictly follow Manufacturer’s instructions and warranty requirements for delivery, storage, and handling of painting and coating products.

C. Labels on coating system containers shall show

1. Coating or material name

2. Generic type of material

3. Manufacturer

4. Color name and number

5. Batch or lot number

6. Date of manufacture

7. Shelf life date

8. Mixing and thinning instructions
D. Deliver materials to Project Site in their original, unopened containers bearing label information shown above.

E. Paint and coating materials used on job shall be stored in one place designated by Owner’s Representative.

F. Store materials in clean dry area within temperature range stipulated by Manufacturer.

G. Store flammable materials in accordance with local building codes.

H. Keep containers sealed until ready for use.

I. Do not open or use painting and coating system materials until Owner’s Representative has inspected containers and has obtained necessary data from information shown on containers and labels.

J. Do not use paint until at least 7 days have elapsed since date of manufacture.

K. Do not use materials beyond Manufacturer’s shelf life limits.

L. Do not use mixed materials beyond pot life limits.

M. Do not apply new coatings to surfaces beyond Manufacturer’s specified recoat limits.

N. Protect materials from damage or contamination. Keep containers closed when not in use.

Project Owner PAINTING AND COATING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 09 90 00 7
O. Mixing shall occur in enclosed areas designated by Owner’s Representative where materials are protected from direct sunlight, inclement weather, or freezing. Protect surfaces of Owner’s paving, structures, and improvements from material spillage within mixing area. Do not dispose of coating and coating-system washdown materials using floor drains, dikes, channels, or storm drains.

P. Deliver, store and handle shop-primed steel and shop-coated items as follows:

1. Upon completing blasting and priming, primer on steel shall be cured sufficiently to minimize damage during handling.

2. When transporting structural steel, use spacers and protective devices to eliminate scuffing during unloading.

3. If wood spacers are used, remove wood splinters and particles from shop-primed surfaces after separation.

4. Use padded chains or ribbon binders to secure loaded items and minimize damage to shop-coated surfaces during shipping.

5. Handle shop-coated items with care during loading/unloading, installation, and erection to minimize damage.

6. Prevent abrasion damage during loading, unloading, storage and erection. Do not slide steel across another plate or member except to fit sheets into position during fabrication.

7. Fully cover shop-primed or shop-coated items with protective coverings or tarpaulins to prevent deposition of road salts, fuel residue, and other contaminants in transit.

8. Do not place or store shop-coated items on ground or on top of other Work unless ground or Work is covered with protective covering or tarpaulin.

9. Steel may be elevated above ground level or other steel members using accepted spacers.

10. Place shop-coated items above ground upon platforms, skids, or other supports.

1.8 Unit Prices
A. Payment for Work in this section shall be included as part of lump-sum or unit-price bid amount for which such Work is appurtenant.

B. Refer to Section 01 22 00 for measurement and payment clauses for painting and coating.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Acceptable Manufacturers
A. Materials shall be of current manufacture and shall conform to applicable regulations for application and intended service. Materials shall meet applicable Federal, state and local regulations, including local Air Quality Management District Regulations. Coats of any coating system shall be products of same Manufacturer and shall be accepted by Manufacturer for intended service. If product specified herein is no longer manufactured or does not meet current regulations, substitute currently manufactured product of at least equal performance which meeting applicable regulations subject to Owner’s Representative’s acceptance, at no additional cost.

B. Materials specified are those that have been evaluated for the specific service. Listed products establish a standard of quality. Standard products of Manufacturers other than those listed will be accepted when it is proved to satisfaction of Owner’s Representative they are equal to or better than specified materials in the following properties:

1. Quality

2. Composition
Project Owner PAINTING AND COATING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 09 90 00 8

3. Utility

4. Durability

5. Resistance to abrasion and physical damage

6. Life expectancy

7. Ability to recoat in future

8. Solids content by volume

9. Dry film thickness per coat

10. Compatibility with other coatings

11. Suitability for intended service

12. Resistance to chemical attack

13. Temperature limitations in service and during application

14. Type and quality of recommended undercoats and topcoats

15. Ease and convenience of application

16. Ease and convenience of repairing damaged areas

17. Stability of colors
C. Products listed may not be available at time of Contract execution. If changes in air quality, water quality or other regulations render listed product obsolete, substitute equivalent product shown in Manufacturer’s literature as being formulated and appropriate for surface to be coated.

D. Factory-applied base coatings to specific products may differ slightly from those listed below where primers are factory-applied by Manufacturers. Such base-coat substitutions for convenience of Contractor are subject to the following stipulations.

1. Surface preparation shall meet or exceed surface preparations specified below.

2. Primer or base coat shall be that recommended and normally used by Manufacturer for condition and exposure of finished installation.

3. Chemical composition of factory-applied base coats shall be similar to chemical composition specified below.

4. If different coating system is recommended by Manufacturer to meet performance specifications of other sections, Manufacturer shall notify Contractor in writing and said notice shall be forwarded to Owner’s Representative.

5. Verify compatibility of adjacent coats with coating Manufacturers.

6. Total DFT shall equal or exceed DFT specified below.

7. Finish coat shall be as stipulated below.

8. In event of paint system failure, repair paint system in failed area to specifications of this section.

E. Acceptable Manufacturers for industrial and architectural applications include:

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION
Industrial
Coating
System
3M St Paul, MN (888) 364-3577
AkzoNobel - Ameritone - Devoe - Sinclair
- Dulux – Glidden
Amsterdam NED (800) 589-1267
Project Owner PAINTING AND COATING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 09 90 00 9

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION
Ameron Corrosion Control Division Brea, CA (714) 256-7755 Carboline Co. St Louis, MO (888) 227-2654
E I DuPont de Nemours & Co Wilmington, DE
Sherwin-Williams Co. Cleveland, OH (800) 524-5979
Tnemec Co Inc. Kansas City, KS (800) 863-6321
Accepted equal
F. Acceptable Manufacturers of architectural coatings for concrete, masonry, structural metalwork for normal exposure, wood, drywall and other architectural finishes include:

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION
Architectural
Coating System
AkzoNobel - Ameritone - Devoe -
Sinclair - Dulux - Glidden
Amsterdam NED (800) 589-1267
Ameron Corrosion Control Division Brea, CA (714) 256-7755 Benjamin Moore and Company Montvale, NJ (201) 573-9600
Carboline Co. St Louis, MO (888) 227-2654
Dunn Edwards Corp. Los Angeles, CA (888) 337-2468
E I DuPont de Nemours & Co Wilmington, DE
Olympic Paints and Stains / PPG Pittsburgh, PA (412) 434-3131 Sherwin-Williams Co. Cleveland, OH (800) 524-5979
Tnemec Co Inc. Kansas City, KS (800) 863-6321
Accepted equal
G. Acceptable Manufacturers for concrete waterproof sealant systems include:

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION
Concrete
Waterproof
Sealant
Raven Lining Systems AquataPoxy Broken Arrow, OK (800) 324-2810 Accepted equal
H. Substitutions will be considered providing the following minimum conditions are met.

1. Request for substitution shall be approved in writing by addendum before date of bid.

2. Proposed coating system dry film thickness shall equal or exceed specified system thickness.

3. Proposed coating system shall employ an equal or greater number of separate coats.

Project Owner PAINTING AND COATING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 09 90 00 10

4. Proposed coating system shall employ coatings or paints of same generic type.

5. Requests for substitution shall include full descriptive literature and required for submittal above including generic coating type, non-volatile content by volume and a list of 10 similar projects at least 3 years old where coatings or paints have been applied to similar exposure.

6. Owner’s Representative may also require submittal of laboratory data sheets certified by independent testing laboratory satisfactory to Owner’s Representative, showing results of complete spectrographic and durability tests on proposed substitute.

7. Owner’s Representative shall be sole and final judge of acceptability of substitutions.

I. In addition to requirements stated elsewhere, acceptable Manufacturers shall demonstrate at least 10 years’ domestic experience in manufacture of coating systems similar to those furnished.

J. In addition to requirements stated elsewhere, painting, coating, and coating application accessories shall be products of one Manufacturer.

K. Thinners, cleaners, driers, and additives shall conform to Manufacturer’s application instructions.

2.2 Materials - General
A. Refer to Section 02 05 00 for basic requirements for products and materials.

B. Surface preparation, prime coatings, and finish coats for various systems are specified herein.

Unless otherwise noted, intermediate and finish coats shall be of slightly contrasting colors.

Coating alternates specified herein shall serve as a general guide for type of coating desired.

C. Painting and coating materials shall be specially adapted for use around surface to be coated in its expected environment. Primer coats shall be used as recommended by Manufacturer for these conditions and shall be applied at rates and thicknesses recommended by Manufacturer.

D. Materials schedules below list competing products of 2 or 3 manufacturers to establish general standard of quality required. Other listed manufacturers shall furnish products of equivalent chemistry, thickness and product life where their products are not itemized.

E. The following colors are required:

ITEM PRIMER FINISH COLOR
Duct Interiors (visible portions only) Flat Black
Electrical Equipment, Motors, Controls, Panels Manufacturer’s Standard Instruments Manufacturer’s Standard
Plant Piping Refer to Section 01 73 33
Valve Interiors White
F. Final colors shall be selected by Owner from color samples submitted by Contractor.

2.3 Materials – Painting and Coating of Valves, Pumps, Flow Meters, Pipelines and Pipeline Appurtenances
A. Prime valve and pump exteriors at place of manufacture. Apply intermediate and finish coats to valves in field. Finish coat shall match color of adjacent piping. Coat hand-wheels and floor Project Owner PAINTING AND COATING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 09 90 00 11
stands same as valves. Coat exterior of hydrants and buried metal valves at place of manufacture.

B. Epoxy coatings per Section 09 96 56 may be substituted for epoxy system specified below for valve, pump, flowmeter or pipeline appurtenance exterior coating.

C. Coat non-buried valve, flow meter, pipeline and pipeline appurtenance exteriors with this coating system:

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION

ALTERNATE

SPECIFICATION

ALTERNATE

SPECIFICATION
Valve, Pump,
Flow Meter or
Pipeline
Appurtenance
Exterior
Coating
Epoxy Urethane AWWA D102 OCS-5 or 6
Total DFT 8.0-13.0 mils
Surface
Preparation
SSPC-SP6/NACE 3 Commercial blast cleaning

1.5-3.0-mil surface angular blast anchor profile
Base Coat
(ShopApplied)
Polyamidomine
Epoxy
Tnemec Series
V69 Epoxoline
DFT 3.0-5.0 mils
ICI Devoe
Bar Rust 231
DFT 2.0-3.0 mils
Sherwin Williams
Macropoxy 646
DFT 2.0-3.0 mils
Intermediate
Coat (Shop or
Field-Applied)
Polyamidomine
Epoxy
Tnemec Series
V69 Epoxoline
DFT 2.0-3.0 mils
ICI Devoe
Bar Rust 231 or
Devran 224HS
DFT 2.0-3.0 mils
Sherwin Williams
Macropoxy 646
DFT 2.0-3.0 mils
Finish Coat
(Field-Applied)
Aliphatic or
Acrylic Urethane
Tnemec EnduraShield II
Series 1095
(1E85 Low VOC
Urethane)
DFT 2.0-3.0 mils
ICI Devoe
Devthane 378H
Semi Gloss or
379H Gloss
DFT 2.0-3.0 mils
Sherwin Williams
Hi-Solids
Polyurethane 100
(Semigloss or
Gloss)
DFT 2.0-3.0 mils
D. Coating systems for buried valve, flow meter, pipeline and pipeline appurtenance exteriors shall meet requirements for buried metal specified elsewhere in this section.

E. Apply interior lining of valves 3” and larger as follows: Coat interior metal surfaces excluding seating areas and bronze and stainless-steel pieces. Remove protuberances which may produce pinholes in lining. Round sharp edges to be coated. Remove contaminants which may prevent bonding of lining.

F. Apply interior lining of valves 3” and larger per AWWA C550 and Section 09 96 56.

G. Where valves 3” and larger are specified to receive fusion-bonded epoxy lining, a similar fusion-bonded epoxy coating of thickness specified above may be substituted for liquid epoxy system above provided lining is factory-tested and certified in accordance with Section 09 96

56. Project Owner PAINTING AND COATING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 09 90 00 12

2.4 Metal, Interior and Exterior, Normal Exposure
A. Coat exposed steelwork, non-galvanized handrails, exposed pipework, fittings, mechanical equipment, pumps, motors, doors, door frames and window sash with this coating system.

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION

ALTERNATE

SPECIFICATION

ALTERNATE

SPECIFICATION
Coating for
NormalExposure
Steel
Polyamidoamine
Epoxy / Aliphatic
Acrylic Urethane
Total DFT 8.0-13.0 mils
Surface
Preparation
SSPC-SP6/NACE 3 Commercial blast cleaning

1.5-3.0-mil surface angular blast anchor profile
(Where blast cleaning is not possible, provide SSPC SP15 Commercial-Grade Power Tool cleaning.) Base Coat
(Shop-Applied)
Rust-Inhibitive
Polyamidoamine
Epoxy
Tnemec
Series V69 Epoxy
DFT 3.0-5.0 mils
ICI Devoe
Bar-Rust 233H
DFT 5.0-6.0 mils
Sherwin Williams
Macropoxy 646
DFT 5.0-6.0 mils
Intermediate
Coat (FieldApplied)
Polyamidomine
Epoxy
Tnemec
Series L69 Epoxy
DFT 5.0-6.0 mils
ICI Devoe
Bar-Rust 233H
DFT 5.0-6.0 mils
Sherwin Williams
Macropoxy 646
DFT 5.0-6.0 mils
Finish Coat
(Field-Applied)
Aliphatic or
Acrylic Urethane
Tnemec
Endura-Shield
Series 1095
(1E85 Low VOC
Urethane)
DFT 2.0-3.0 mils
ICI Devoe
Devthane 378H
Semi- Gloss or
379H Gloss
DFT 2.0-3.0 mils
Sherwin Williams
Hi-Solids
Polyurethane 100
(Semi-gloss or
Gloss)
DFT 2.0-3.0 mils
B. Metalwork previously given shop prime coat accepted by Owner's Representative shall be touched up as required in field with Tnemec Series 27 WB Typoxy or equal.

2.5 Metal, Submerged or Intermittently Submerged
A. Coat metalwork, gates, equipment, valves, exposed pipework and other metalwork within areas to be submerged, except as noted hereinafter, with this coating system.

TEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION

ALTERNATE

SPECIFICATION

ALTERNATE

SPECIFICATION
Coating for
Metal
Submerged or
Intermittently
Submerged in
Recycled
Water or
Wastewater
Cycloaliphatic
Amine Epoxy
Total DFT 16.0-32.0 mils
Project Owner PAINTING AND COATING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 09 90 00 13

TEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION

ALTERNATE

SPECIFICATION

ALTERNATE

SPECIFICATION
Surface
Preparation
SSPC-SP10/NACE 2 Near-white metal blast cleaning

2.0-3.0-mil surface angular blast anchor profile
Base Coat Cycloaliphatic
Amine Epoxy
Tnemec
Series 61 Tnemeliner
DFT 8.0-12.0
mils,
ICI Devoe
Bar-Rust 233H
DFT 6.0-8.0 mils
Sherwin Williams
Sherglass FF
DFT 8.0- 16.0 mils
Finish Coat Cycloaliphatic
Amine Epoxy
Tnemec
Series V69 Epoxy
DFT 8.0-12.0
mils,
ICI Devoe
Bar-Rust 233H
DFT 6.0-8.0 mils
Sherwin Williams
Tank Clad H.S.

DFT 8.0-16.0 mils

2.6 Nonferrous Metal, Galvanized Steel, Aluminum, Copper, or Brass A. Copper, bronze, chromium plate, nickel, stainless steel, aluminum, nonferrous, and factoryfinished materials and surfaces shall not be painted except as otherwise specified.

B. Nameplates painted over shall be replaced in kind.

2.7 Metal, Buried
A. Coat buried metal which includes valves, bolts, nuts, structural steel and fittings with this system.

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION

ALTERNATE

SPECIFICATION

ALTERNATE

SPECIFICATION
Coating for
Buried
Metal
Hybrid
Inorganic
Water-Based
Epoxy
Total DFT 12.0-

24.0 mils
Total DFT 24.0
mils
Total DFT 16.0-

32.0 mils
Surface
Preparation
SSPC-SP6/NACE 3 Commercial blast cleaning

1.5-3.0-mil surface angular blast anchor profile
Base Coat Hybrid
Inorganic
Water-Based
Epoxy
Tnemec
Series 27 WB
Typoxy
DFT 6.0-12.0 mils
Carboline Sherwin Williams
Sherglass FF
DFT 8.0-16.0
mils
Finish Coat Hybrid
Inorganic
Water-Based
Epoxy
Tnemec
Series 27 WB
Typoxy
DFT 6.0-12.0 mils
Carboline Sherwin Williams
Sherglass FF
DFT 8.0-16.0
mils
Project Owner PAINTING AND COATING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 09 90 00 14

2.8 Materials – Painting and Coating of PVC
A. Coat PVC items with this system.

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION

ALTERNATE

SPECIFICATION

ALTERNATE

SPECIFICATION

PVC, CPVC
and FRP pipe
Modified
Polyamine
Epoxy /
Pigmented
Aliphatic
Acrylic
Urethane
Total DFT 4.0-6.0 mils
Surface
Preparation
SSPC-SP1 Solvent cleaning followed by thorough and
uniform abrasion with medium grain sandpaper
Base Coat Modified
Polyamine
Epoxy
Tnemec
Series V69
Epoxy
DFT 2.0-3.0 mils
ICI Devoe Manufacturer’s
recommended
primer
Finish Coat Pigmented
Aliphatic
Acrylic
Urethane
Tnemec
Endura-Shield II
Series 1095
DFT 2.0-3.0 mils,
ICI Devoe
Devthane 378H
Semi Gloss or
379H Gloss
DFT 2.0-3.0 mils
Sherwin Williams
Hi-Solids
Polyurethane or
HSP-250 Gloss
DFT 2.0-3.0 mils
B. Coat PVC, where such pipe is above grade and exposed to sunlight, or where required in vaults and buildings for color coding of pipes, or to match adjacent finishes.

2.9 Concrete Structures – Waterproof Sealant
A. Where Contract Documents require concrete surfaces to be sealed, seal concrete surfaces with this system.

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
Finish Coat Epoxy Raven Lining Systems Aquatapoxy
DFT 10.0-12.0 mils

2.1 Plaster, Gypsum Board - Interior
A. Paint gypsum board with this system.

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION

ALTERNATE

SPECIFICATION

ALTERNATE

SPECIFICATION
Coating for
Interior
Gypsum
Board
Crosslinking
Hydrophobic
Acrylic /
HDP Acrylic
Polymer
Total DFT 6.0-9.0 mils
Project Owner PAINTING AND COATING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 09 90 00 15

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION

ALTERNATE

SPECIFICATION

ALTERNATE

SPECIFICATION
Surface
Preparation
Scrape, clean, and sand surfaces smooth.

Fill cracks and voids and smooth uneven tape joints with spackling material compatible with specified coating.

Allow spackle and joint treatment mud to dry.

Prime steel corner.

Base Coat HDP Acrylic
Polymer
Tnemec
Series 1029
Enduratone
DFT 2.0-3.0 mils
ICI Paint
Ultra-Hide
Gripper 3210
DFT 2.0-3.0 mils
Sherwin Williams
Preprite 200
Primer
DFT 2.0-3.0 mils
Intermediate
Coat
HDP Acrylic
Polymer
Tnemec
Series 6 TnemeCryl
DFT 2.0-3.0 mils
ICI Devoe
Devflex 4208

2.0-3.0 mils
Sherwin Williams
DTM Acrylic
DFT 2.0-3.0 mils
Finish Coat HDP Acrylic
Polymer
Semi-Gloss
Tnemec
Series 6 TnemeCryl
DFT 2.0-3.0 mils
ICI Devoe
Devflex 4208

2.0-3.0 mils
Sherwin Williams
DTM Acrylic
DFT 2.0-3.0 mils

2.10 Premanufactured Steel Buildings and Steel Decking
A. Paint premanufactured steel buildings and steel decking with this system except where Manufacturer’s factory-applied coating of equivalent thickness is furnished.

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION

ALTERNATE

SPECIFICATION

ALTERNATE

SPECIFICATION
Coating for
Premanufactured
Steel Buildings
and Steel
Decking
Self Cross
Linking
Hydrophobic
Acrylic
Total DFT 4.0-6.0 mils
Surface
Preparation
Steel provided to jobsite with shop prime must be patch tested for compatibility with top coats.

Remove surface contaminants by air blast cleaning,
hand cleaning, and solvent cleaning as required.

Coat puddle welds with Tnemec Series 115 Unibond DF
or equal.

Project Owner PAINTING AND COATING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 09 90 00 16

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION

ALTERNATE

SPECIFICATION

ALTERNATE

SPECIFICATION
Base Coat Self Cross
Linking
Hydrophobic
Acrylic
Tnemec
Series 115 Uni
Bond DF
DFT 2.0-3.0 mils
ICI Paint
Ultra-Hide Gripper
3210
DFT 2.0-3.0 mils
Sherwin Williams
ProCryl Universal
Primer
DFT 3.0-4.0 mils
Intermediate
Coat
Vinyl n/a ICI Devoe
Devflex 4208

2.0-3.0 mils
n/a
Finish Coat HDP Acrylic
Polymer
Tnemec
Series 1029
Enduratone
DFT 2.0-3.0 mils
ICI Devoe
Devflex 4208

2.0-3.0 mils
Sherwin Williams
DTM Acrylic
DFT 3.0-4.0 mils
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Preparation
A. Preapplication meeting shall be held one to 2 weeks before start of coating system application for products covering more than 100 square feet. Meeting shall be attended by Contractor, applicator, Manufacturer’s representative and Owner’s Representative and shall cover:

1. Environmental requirements set by Manufacturer for his product

2. Protection of surfaces not scheduled to be coated

3. Stormwater pollution prevention requirements

4. Surface preparation

5. Application

6. Repair

7. Field quality control

8. Cleaning

9. Protection of coating systems

10. Eleven-month inspection

11. Coordination with other work
B. Notify Owner’s Representative at least 3 days before start of field surface preparation work.

C. Surfaces to be coated or painted shall be in proper condition to receive material specified before coating or painting is done.

D. Do not apply painting materials to wet, damp, dusty, dirty, fingermarked, rough, unfinished, or defective surfaces.

E. Abrasive blast cleaning (sandblasting) shall be completed as follows:

1. Abrasive blast cleaning is defined as cleaning surfaces using fine abrasives, such as siliceous or mineral abrasives, 80 to 100 mesh, to clean surfaces of contamination or oxide.

Project Owner PAINTING AND COATING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 09 90 00 17

2. Implement debris containment systems for surfaces subject to abrasive blast cleaning, regardless of whether LBP/LCP materials are present.

3. Mask openings in motors and machinery to prevent paint and abrasive materials from entering equipment.

4. Place drop cloths or apply masking tape where required to prevent spatter, dripping and overspray from contact with floors, surfaces and equipment not scheduled to receive paint or coatings.

5. Protect surrounding areas and surfaces not scheduled to be blasted and/or coated from damage or coloration during surface preparation and coating application.

6. Do not sandblast or prepare more surface than can be coated or painted in same working day.

7. Sandblasting shall be done not more than 8 hours ahead of painting, subject to humidity and weather conditions between time of sandblasting and painting operations.

8. Complete abrasive blast cleaning using dry method unless otherwise directed. Maintain dust emissions within legal levels and that level which will not create a nuisance.

9. Hydroblasting (water blast cleaning) shall be used only when and as directed by Owner’s Representative, who will determine pressure to best remove loose, peeling/flaking paint or coating or other detrimental surface contaminants.

10. Do not use abrasives that have become contaminated in automatic equipment. When shop or field blast cleaning with handheld nozzles, do not recycle or reuse blast particles.

11. Abrasives used in blast cleaning shall be new, washed, graded and free of contaminants which might interfere with adhesion of coatings and paints. Do not reuse abrasive unless specifically approved by Owner’s Representative.

12. Particle size of abrasives used in blast cleaning shall produce specified surface profile in per recommendations of Manufacturer of paint or coating system, subject to acceptance by Owner’s Representative.

13. Abrasive blasting nozzles shall be equipped with “deadman” emergency shutoff nozzles.

Blast nozzle pressure shall be at least 95 psi and shall be verified using an approved nozzle pressure gauge at each start-up period or as directed by Owner’s Representative.

Nozzles used during blast cleaning operations shall be sufficient to ensure timely completion of work on schedule.

14. Blast cleaning from rolling scaffolds shall only be done within confines of interior perimeter of scaffold. Reaching beyond limits of perimeter will be allowed only if blast nozzle is maintained in position which will produce profile acceptable to Owner’s Representative.

15. Keep Work areas clean, and do not allow blasting particles to accumulate and constitute nuisance or hazard.

16. Remove spent abrasives and other debris at Contractor’s expense. If waste is determined to be hazardous, dispose of waste as required by law.

17. During abrasive blast cleaning, prevent damage to adjacent coatings. Schedule blast cleaning and coating such that dust, dirt, blast particles, old coatings, rust, mill scale, etc., will not damage or fall upon wet or newly coated surfaces.

18. Remove weld spatter, sharp edges, burrs, and weld slag from metal surfaces.

19. Grind smooth rough welds, beads, peaked corners, sharp edges, erection lugs, etc. in accordance with SSPC SP-2 and SSPC SP-3.

Project Owner PAINTING AND COATING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 09 90 00 18

20. Neutralize welds with chemical solvent compatible with specified coating materials. Use clean cloths and chemical solvent. Wipe dry with clean cloths. Do not leave residue on cleaned surfaces.

21. Remove oil and grease from metal surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP-1. Use clean cloths and cleaning solvents and wipe dry with clean cloths. Do not leave film or greasy residue on cleaned surfaces before sandblasting.

22. After blast cleaning and prior to applying coating, dry clean substrates by dusting, sweeping, and vacuuming to remove residue from blasting.

23. Reclean prior to application of primer or touch-up coating blast-cleaned surfaces not coated within said 8-hour period.

24. If rusting or discoloration of sandblasted surfaces occurs before painting, remove such rusting or discoloration by additional sandblasting. Sandblasted surfaces shall not be left overnight before painting.

25. Blast cleaned and coated/painted surfaces shall be cleaned before applying specified paint or coating systems by combination of blowing with clean dry air, brushing/brooming and/or vacuuming as directed by Owner’s Representative. Air hose for blowing shall be at least ½” diameter and shall be equipped with shut-off device.

26. Coat abrasive blast-cleaned surfaces with primer before visible rust forms on surface. Do not leave blast-cleaned surfaces uncoated for more than 8 hours. Cleaned areas not receiving base coat within an 8-hour period shall be recleaned prior to application of base coat.

F. Prepare concrete, iron, and steel surfaces in accordance with applicable Manufacturer’s instructions and SSPC standards.

G. Before application, examine areas and conditions under which coating systems are to be applied.

1. Concrete and masonry surfaces shall cure 30 days prior to coating or painting.

2. Ensure surfaces to receive coatings are dry and free from visible oil, grease, dirt, dust, laitance, mill scale, rust, paint oxides, corrosion products, blisters, loose paint, moisture, and other foreign matter in accordance with specified SSPC standards.

3. Neutralize spots showing effects of alkali.

4. Neutralize welds with suitable chemical compatible with specified paint or coating system.

5. Notify Owner’s Representative of areas or conditions which are not acceptable to receive coatings. Do not begin surface preparation or application until unacceptable areas or conditions have been corrected.

6. Prior to priming or coating application, arrange with Owner's Representative so surface preparation may be inspected and accepted.

H. Prior to application of paint or coating, notify Owner’s Representative to inspect prepared surfaces to receive paint or coating.

1. Surface preparation inspection for metals shall be based on comparison with SSPC-Vis1 “Surface Preparation Standards for Painting Steel Surfaces”

2. Prepare and submit report of surface preparation inspections. Failure to provide inspections and reports shall be cause for rejection of applied coating if there is reasonable doubt, as determined solely by Owner’s Representative, that specified surface preparation or paint application procedures were not followed.

Project Owner PAINTING AND COATING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 09 90 00 19
I. Using brush, stripe paint critical locations such as welds, corners, edges, roof lap seams, nuts, bolts, ends, rafter flanges and other areas identified by Owner’s Representative using specified primer.

J. Where surfaces are joined so closely that proper surface preparation and paint application is not possible, prepare and paint such surfaces prior to assembly or installation.

3.2 Application
A. Refer to Section 02 05 00 for basic execution and installation requirements.

B. Furnish and install paint and coating systems at locations shown on Plans and Submittals.

C. Unless otherwise specified, ferrous surfaces except for stainless steel or galvanized iron or steel surfaces shall be painted or coated, including top surfaces of steel roof support framing and underside of steel roof plates bearing on roof supports.

D. The following installation standards shall be followed:

1. Applicable OSHA and Cal OSHA regulations

2. SSPC PA3 Guide to Safety in Paint Application

3. NACE 6D-173 Manual for Painter Safety

4. Applicable building, fire, plumbing, mechanical and electrical code requirements

5. Manufacturer’s installation and warranty requirements

6. SSPC-PA1 “Shop, Field and Maintenance Painting
E. Refer variances between above documents and Contract Documents to Owner’s Representative.

F. Only good, clean brushes and equipment shall be used, and brushes, buckets, and spraying equipment shall be cleaned immediately at end of each painting period.

G. Do not apply coatings when environmental conditions are not appropriate or which jeopardize appearance or quality of coating. This includes but is not limited to the following unsatisfactory environmental conditions.

1. When air temperature is below 50°F or above 125°F or is outside limits recommended by Manufacturer for satisfactory application.

2. When it is expected air temperature will drop below 40°F or above 125°F within 8 hours after application of coating.

3. When surface temperature is not at least 5°F above dew point or is outside limits recommended by Manufacturer for satisfactory application.

4. When relative humidity is outside limits recommended by Manufacturer for satisfactory application.

5. During precipitation including rain, sleet, snow, fog or mist.

6. When wind velocity is outside limits recommended by Manufacturer for satisfactory application.

7. In dust or smoke-laden atmospheres.

H. When above conditions are prevalent, postpone paint or coating application until conditions are favorable. Complete daily paint or coating application in time to permit film sufficient drying and curing time before damage by atmospheric conditions.

I. Mixing shall be done as follows:

1. Mix thoroughly using slow-speed power mixer until components are thoroughly combined and are of smooth consistency.

Project Owner PAINTING AND COATING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 09 90 00 20

2. Use exact proportions specified by Manufacturer.

3. Exercise care to ensure all material is removed from containers during mixing and metering. Do not use partial batches.

4. Do not use multiple-component coatings that have been mixed beyond their pot life.

5. Provide small quantity kits for touch-up painting and for painting other small areas.

6. Mix only components specified and furnished by Manufacturer.

7. Do not intermix additional components for reasons of color or otherwise, even within same generic type of coating.

8. When power mixing multiple components, do not introduce moisture or air into product.

J. Thinning shall only be permitted within limits set by applicable regulatory agencies and as permitted by Manufacturer and accepted by Owner’s Representative. Thinning shall be done in presence of Owner’s Representative. If thinning is accepted, do not exceed maximum allowable amount of thinner per gallon of coating material. Stir coating materials when adding thinner. Do not flood coating material surface with thinner prior to mixing. Do not reduce coating materials more than necessary to obtain proper application characteristics and to obtain specified dry-film thicknesses.

K. Use application equipment, tools, pressure settings and techniques in accordance with Manufacturer’s application instructions.

L. Contractor’s painting and coating equipment shall be maintained in first class working condition. Compressors shall have suitable traps and filters to remove water and oils from air.

Blotter test shall be accomplished at each start-up period and as deemed necessary by Owner’s Representative.

M. Coating applications shall conform to the following:

1. Schedule coating work to avoid excessive dust and airborne contaminants. Protect work from dust and airborne contaminants during coating application and curing.

2. Work is subject to intermittent shutdown if, in opinion of Owner’s Representative, cleaning, coating and painting operations are creating localized condition detrimental to ongoing facility activities, personnel or adjacent property. In event of emergency shutdown by Owner’s Representative, immediately correct deficiencies. Additional costs created by shutdown shall be borne by Contractor.

3. Remove dust, blast particles, and other debris from blast-cleaned surfaces by dusting, sweeping, and vacuuming. Allow ventilator fans to clean airborne dust to provide good visibility of working area prior to coating applications. Remove dust from coated surfaces by dusting, sweeping, and vacuuming prior to applying succeeding coats.

4. Conform to Manufacturer’s Application Instructions, completing Work within over-coating timeframe of prime or intermediate coat. Follow recommendations of Manufacturer including selection of spray equipment, brushes, rollers, cleaners, thinners, mixing, drying time, temperature and humidity of application, and safety precautions. Painting shall not be performed under adverse ambient conditions that may affect life or appearance of coating.

5. Do not apply coatings over damp or moist surfaces.

6. Prepare undercoats and intermediate coats to differ noticeably in coloration to each other on succeeding coating applications to ensure even coverage by shading or tinting, as appropriate, for paint material and color. Shading or tinting shall be done by Manufacturer.

7. Uniformly apply coatings at spreading rate required to achieve specified DFT. Application shall be by airless spray method, except brush and roller application may be required for Project Owner PAINTING AND COATING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 09 90 00 21
exterior surfaces if environmental and neighborhood conditions preclude spray application.

8. Apply coatings to be free of film characteristics such as runs or blisters that might adversely affect performance or appearance of coating systems.

9. Spraying shall be done by cross-lap method of spraying, stroking first in one direction and shortly later, spraying across this section at right angles to first set of passes. Exercise care during spraying to hold nozzle perpendicular and sufficiently close to receiving surface to avoid excessive evaporation of volatile components or loss of material to air or bridging of cracks and crevices.

10. Brush coats shall be properly brushed out so as to show minimum of brush marks. When finished and dried, brush strokes shall appear in one direction only and there shall be no curved brush strokes showing.

11. Immediately remove spills, oversprays and coatings that fall on surrounding areas and surfaces not scheduled to receive specified coating.

12. After completing each coat application, request inspection by Owner’s Representative before applying next coat. Work performed in absence of inspection by Owner’s Representative may be required to be removed and replaced with proper inspection and entire cost of removal and replacement, including cost of materials which may be furnished by Owner and used in removed Work shall be borne by Contractor regardless of whether Work removed is found to be defective or not.

13. Work covered up without authority of Owner’s Representative shall, upon order of Owner’s Representative, be uncovered to extent required, and Contractor shall similarly bear entire cost of performing Work and furnishing materials necessary for removal of covering and its subsequent replacement as directed and accepted by Owner’s Representative.

14. Pinholes and holidays detected during testing shall be marked, repaired in accordance with Manufacturer’s printed instructions and retested. No pinholes or other irregularities will be permitted in final coating.

15. Coats that do not hide undercoat shall be given another coat.

16. Protect finished surfaces between coats. For subsequent coats, remove dust, dirt, oil, grease and foreign matter which will affect adhesion or durability of finish by washing with clean rags dipped in commercial cleaning solvent approved by paint and coating system Manufacturer. Surface shall then be rinsed with clean water and wiped dry with clean rags.

17. Cure coats in accordance with Manufacturer’s Application Instructions. Allow at least 24 hours between coats of paint for curing.

18. Strictly observe drying and curing time between coats stated in Manufacturer’s application instructions.

19. Upon completion, remove masking and other temporary coverings and protection of surrounding areas and surfaces.

20. Allow Owner’s Representative to examine each coat of paint, enamel, stain, shellac, and varnish before next coat is applied. Notify Owner’s Representative that such Work is ready for inspection.

N. Apply prime coats to steel or concrete as follows:

1. Apply prime coats in accordance with Manufacturer’s Application Instructions. Follow Manufacturer’s recommendations, including selection of spray equipment, brushes, rollers, cleaners, thinners, mixing, drying time, temperature and humidity of application, and safety precautions.

Project Owner PAINTING AND COATING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 09 90 00 22

2. Surfaces of miscellaneous metal and steel not embedded in concrete, and surfaces of unprimed plain sheet metal work shall be primed promptly upon delivery to project site.

3. Reclean surfaces by blast cleaning that have surface colored or become moist prior to coating application.

4. Do not apply prime coat over damp or moist surfaces.

5. Prime prepared ferrous surfaces immediately after completing surface preparation and before surface rusting or accumulation of dust, dirt, or foreign matter occurs.

6. Apply brush coat of primer on welds, sharp edges, nuts, bolts, and irregular surfaces prior to application of primer and finish coat. Brush coat shall be done prior to and in conjunction with spray coat application. Apply spray coat over brush coat.

7. For galvanized metal work, clean oil, grease and foreign materials from surfaces. Apply vinyl wash pretreatment coating. Follow manufacturer's instructions for drying time, then prime with one coat of metal primer.

8. For unprimed iron, steel, and uncoated metals specified to be painted, prime with one coat of metal primer.

9. For shop-primed metal items, touch up bare and abraded areas with metal primer prior to applying 2nd and 3rd coats.

10. Apply coats evenly and with full coverage so finished surfaces are free of sags, runs and imperfections.

11. Prime coats incompatible with finish coats or applied to improperly prepared surfaces shall be removed and appropriate prime coat applied at no additional cost to Owner.

12. Cure prime coats in accordance with Manufacturer’s written specifications and instructions.

O. Apply intermediate coats as follows:

1. Apply intermediate coats in accordance with Manufacturer’s Application Instructions, and within over-coating timeframe of prime coat.

2. Follow recommendations of Manufacturer including selection of spray equipment, brushes, rollers, cleaners, thinners, mixing, drying time, temperature and humidity of application, and safety precautions. Do not paint under adverse ambient conditions that may affect life or appearance of coating.

3. After applying prime coat, apply by brush, one stripe coat of intermediate coat epoxy, thinned 15% (or as recommended by Manufacturer), to welds, edges and corners, rivets, fasteners, and/or other difficult to reach areas.

P. Apply finish coats as follows:

1. Conform to requirements of SSPC PA-1, Shop, Field and Maintenance Painting.

2. Stir, strain, and keep coating materials at uniform consistency during application. Apply each coating evenly, free of brush marks, sags, runs, and other evidence of poor workmanship.

3. Apply coating systems to specified minimum dry-film thicknesses as measured from above peaks of surface profile.

4. Finished surfaces shall be free from holidays, pinholes, bubbles, runs, drops, ridges, waves, laps, excessive or unsightly brush marks, and variations in color, texture, and gloss. Verify absence of holidays, pinholes, gaps, etc. by appropriate testing. Recoat and retest areas failing these tests.

Project Owner PAINTING AND COATING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 09 90 00 23

5. Finish coats found to be incompatible with prime or intermediate coats or applied to improperly prepared surfaces shall be removed and appropriate finish coat applied at no additional cost to Owner.

Q. Following application and testing, protect surfaces of coating systems from damage during construction.

3.3 Field Quality Control
A. Contractor shall hold current C-33 Painting and Decorating Contractor’s license and have at least five years practical experience and successful history in applying specified products to surfaces of pumps, valves, piping and equipment similar in nature to this project. Upon request, he shall substantiate this requirement by furnishing list of references.

B. Employees working on project shall be skilled craftsmen, trained for application of specified coatings and qualified to perform required Work. Work shall be done in manner comparable with best standards of practice found in that trade. Apply materials evenly so as to be free from sags, runs, crawls, brush marks, wrinkles, skips, holidays or other application defects, blemishes or evidence of poor workmanship. Coats shall be of proper consistency. Cut lines shall be sharply cut to lines.

C. Before beginning work, prepare 10’ by 10’ mockup for each coating system using same materials, tools, equipment and procedures for actual surface preparation and application.

Obtain Owner’s Representative’s approval of mockups. Retain mockups on site to establish standards by which finished coating systems shall be compared.

D. Repair or replace damaged or colored materials and surfaces not scheduled to be coated.

E. Touch up or repair damaged coatings shall be acceptable if result is not visibly different from adjacent surfaces. Recoat entire surface where touch-up result is visibly different, either in sheen, texture or color.

F. Remove and clean up paint drips, spills, oversprays, and splashes from areas not being painted.

1. Remove rubbish, waste and surplus material and clean woodwork, hardware, floors and other adjacent work.

2. Remove paint, varnish and brush marks from glazing material and, upon completion of painting work, wash and polish glazing material both sides.

3. Remove and replace damaged glazing material with new material at no cost to Owner.

4. Clean hardware and other unpainted metal surfaces with accepted cleaner. Do not use abrasives or edged tools.

G. Repair in accordance with Manufacturer’s instructions coatings showing film characteristics or defects that might adversely affect their performance or appearance.

1. Clean and recoat surfaces with specified paint material to obtain specified color and coverage, if surfaces have improper finish color, or insufficient film thickness.

2. Sandblast or power-sand visible areas of chipped, peeled, or abraded paint, feathering edges.

3. Prime and finish coat in accordance with Manufacturer’s Application Instructions. Work shall be free of runs, bridges, shiners, laps, or other imperfections.

H. Manufacturer’s representative shall provide technical assistance and guidance as needed for proper surface preparation and coating system application.

I. Field testing shall include:

Project Owner PAINTING AND COATING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 09 90 00 24

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER

TEST STANDARD) FREQUENCY
FIRST

TEST PAID
FOR BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
Mock-up Compliance
with
Specifications
Described above 1 each coating
system
covering more
than 1000 sf
Owner Owner
Surface
Preparation
Visual
Inspection
SSPC Vis 1, ASTM
D2200, NACE Std
TM01-70
As directed Owner Owner
Contaminants Chemical or ultraviolet
tests
Owner’s option Owner Contractor
Anchor Profile As specified or
Manufacturer’s
requirement to be
verified by
nondestructive
instrument such as
Keane-Tator Surface
Profile Comparator or
Testex Press-O Film
System
As directed Owner Contractor
Compressor Verify
Absence of
Water and Oil
Blotter test 1 each startup Contractor Contractor
Atmospheric
Conditions
Dewpoint Sling Psychrometer
and US Dept of
Commerce Weather
Bureau Psychrometric
Tables
As directed Contractor Contractor
Each
Coating
System
Compliance
with Mockup
Comparison with
mockup
Contractor to submit
written report from
approved testing
agency on
reinspection
Owner’s option Owner Contractor
Project Owner PAINTING AND COATING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 09 90 00 25

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER

TEST STANDARD) FREQUENCY
FIRST

TEST PAID
FOR BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
Each Coat Holidays Nondestructive
holiday tester such as
Tinker-Rasor Model
AP or AP-W
(22.5-80V with
approximate 80,000Ω
resistance) Use
sponge saturated with

0.5% sodium chloride
solution. Coating shall
be holiday-free.

Contractor to submit
written reports from
accepted testing
agency on prime,
intermediate, and
finish coating
inspections.
100% of
surface of each
coating
Owner Contractor
Dry Film
Thickness
SSPC-PA2
Nondestructive
magnetic-type
thickness gauge such
as “Elcometer”,
“Inspector”
“Mikrotest”, or
“Positest” or when
destructive testing is
ordered, instrument
such as Tooke Gage
Average of
measurements shall
exceed specified DFT.

No single spot
measurement shall be
<80% or >140% of
specified DFT
Contractor to submit
written report from
accepted testing
agency on
reinspection
Wait until 8
hours elapse
after
application.

Then take at
least 5 spot
measurements
in each area..

Owner Contractor
Project Owner PAINTING AND COATING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 09 90 00 26

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER

TEST STANDARD) FREQUENCY
FIRST

TEST PAID
FOR BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
Film
Characteristics
and Defects
Visual inspection.

Repair identified
deficiencies.
1 inspection
attended by
Owner,
Contractor,
Owner’s
Representative
and
Manufacturer’s
representative
Owner Contractor
J. Furnish inspection devices in good working condition for detection of holidays and measurement of dry-film thickness of paints and coatings. Also furnish U.S. Department of Commerce, National Bureau of Standards certified thickness calibration plates to test accuracy of thickness gauges. Dry film thickness gauges and holiday detectors shall be available until final acceptance of application. Inspection devices shall be operated by, or in presence of Owner’s Representative with location and frequency basis determined by Owner’s Representative. Owner’s Representative is not precluded from furnish his own inspection devices and rendering his opinion based solely on their tests.

K. Owner’s Representative shall have right to reject unsatisfactory material or work and to replace it at Contractor’s expense if deficiencies are found in quality of installed coating.

L. Upon completion of work, remove staging, scaffolding and containers from project site. Clean site to satisfaction of Owner’s Representative.

M. Warranty Inspection shall be conducted during 11th month following completion of coating and painting work. Repair defective work in accordance with Contract Documents and to satisfaction of Owner’s Representative.

1. Owner will establish inspection date and will notify Contractor at least 30 days in advance.

Owner will uncover or otherwise expose surfaces to be inspected. Contractor shall provide at their expense suitable lighting and ventilation for inspection. Provide other necessary inspection equipment to Owner’s satisfaction.

2. Entire interior coating system shall be visually inspected. Defective coatings as well as damaged or rusting spots shall be satisfactorily repaired by and at sole expense of Contractor. Repaired areas shall then be tested as specified herein and repair/testing procedure repeated until surface meets specified requirements.

3. Entire exterior paint system shall be visually inspected. Defective, damaged or rusting areas shall be satisfactorily repaired by and at Contractor’s sole expense.

4. Warranty Inspection Report will be prepared by Owner’s Representative and delivered to Contractor. It will set forth number and type of failures observed, percentage of surface area where failure has occurred, and names of persons making inspection.

5. Repairs shall proceed promptly. Upon completion of inspection and receipt of Inspection Report, Owner will establish date for Contractor to proceed with remedial Work. Delay on Project Owner PAINTING AND COATING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 09 90 00 27
part of Contractor to proceed with remedial work on schedule shall constitute breach of this Contract. In such case, Owner may proceed to have defects remedied as outlined in Contract Documents.

6. Remedial Work shall occur at locations where paint or coating have peeled, bubbled, or cracked and at locations where rusting is evident. Such locations shall be considered failures. Make repairs at points where failures are observed by removing deteriorated coating or paint , cleaning surface and repainting or recoating with same system. If area of failure exceeds 25% of specific coated or painted surface, entire paint or coating system shall, at Owner’s option, be required to be removed and recoated or repainted in accordance with original Contract Documents.

7. Costs of warranty inspection and repair shall be borne by Contractor, who shall include an appropriate amount for testing and repair in his bid. No additional allowance will be paid by Owner for Warranty Inspection and repairs.

END OF SECTION

Project Owner PAINTING AND COATING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 09 90 00 28

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Project Owner GALVANIZING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 09 92 00 1
SECTION 09 92 00

GALVANIZING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Work Included
A. Materials, testing, and application of galvanizing by hot-dip or electro-depositing process.

B. All steel metalwork, shall be galvanized after fabrication, except for the following:

1. Stainless steel items.

2. Steel items specifically indicated or specified to be Teflon® (PTFE)-coated items.

3. Steel items specifically indicated or specified epoxy-coated items.

4. Steel items specifically indicated or specified Items to be mortar-coated or embedded in concrete.

5. Steel items specifically indicated or specified to be painted.

6. Steel items specifically indicated or specified not to be galvanized as directed by Owner’s Representative
C. Refer to Section 32 31 13 for galvanizing of chain link fence products.

D. Refer to Section 33 05 38 for galvanizing of hangers and supports.

1.2 Related Work
A. Section 01 22 00: Unit Prices
B. Section 01 33 00: Submittal Procedures
C. Section 01 40 00: Quality Requirements
D. Section 01 66 00: Product Storage and Handling Requirements E. Section 02 05 00: Basic Civil Engineering Requirements F. Section 05 50 00: Metal Fabrications
G. Section 09 90 00: Painting and Coating
H. Section 26 05 10: Common Work Results for Electrical I. Section 32 31 13: Chain Link Fences
J. Section 33 05 38: Hangers and Supports

1.3 System Description
A. Furnish and install galvanizing required for compliance with Manufacturer’s installation requirements and applicable building codes and standards.

1.4 Quality Assurance
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workers trained and experienced in necessary trades and crafts and completely familiar with specified requirements and methods for proper performance of Work of this section.

B. Complete machine work, die work, cutting, punching, bending, welding, drilling, threadcutting, straightening and other fabrication work before galvanizing.

C. Galvanize items after fabrication in largest sections possible.

D. Galvanize applicable fasteners before assembling structural units.

E. Zinc coating shall adhere tenaciously to base metal surface. Coatings shall be even, smooth, and uniform, free from blisters and excess zinc deposits.

F. Warped or distorted products shall be replaced.

G. Factory testing shall include:

Project Owner GALVANIZING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 09 92 00 2

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER

TEST STANDARD) FREQUENCY
FIRST

TEST PAID
FOR BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
Galvanizing Test Coupon
Preparation
Wire coupon to material
being galvanized before
immersion to represent
coating deposited.
1 coupon each unit
galvanized weighing over 1
lb or where requested by
Owner’s Representative
Contractor Contractor
Galvanizing Thickness ASTM E376 1 test each coupon Contractor Contractor

1.5 References
A. Reference publications below form part of this specification to extent referenced and are referred to within text by basic designation only.

1. ASTM A116 Metallic-Coated, Steel-Woven Wire Fence Fabric

2. ASTM A121 Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Barbed Wire

3. ASTM A123 Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products

4. ASTM A153 Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware

5. ASTM A392 Zinc-Coated Steel Chain Link Fence Fabric

6. ASTM A525 Preparation of Zinc-Coated and Zinc-Alloy-Coated Steel Panels for Testing Paint and Related Coating Products

7. ASTM A780 Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings

8. ASTM B6 Zinc

9. ASTM B633 Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel

10. ASTM B695 Coatings of Zinc Mechanically Deposited on Iron and Steel

11. ASTM E376 Measuring Coating Thickness by Magnetic-Field or Eddy-Current (Electromagnetic) Testing Methods

12. ASTM F1083 Pipe, Steel, Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Welded for Fence Structures

13. SSPC SP1 Solvent Cleaning

14. SSPC SP7 Brush-off Blast Cleaning

1.6 Submittals
A. Furnish the following submittals.

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION
Certificate of Compliance Submit coating system and application certification per Certificate of Compliance requirements.

Warranty Furnish one-year warranty from date of final acceptance.

B. Refer to Section 02 05 00 for definition of requirements for Certificates of Compliance.

1.7 Delivery, Storage, and Handling
A. Refer to Sections 01 65 00 / 01 66 00 for delivery, storage, and handling requirements.

B. Strictly follow Manufacturer’s instructions and warranty requirements for delivery, storage, and handling of galvanized materials.

1.8 Unit Prices
A. Payment for Work in this section shall be included as part of lump-sum or unit-price bid amount for which such Work is appurtenant.

B. Refer to Section 01 22 00 for measurement and payment clauses for galvanizing.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Acceptable Manufacturers
A. Acceptable Manufacturers include:

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION
Galvanized Touch Up
Material
American Solder and Flux Company (Drygalv) Paoli, PA (610) 647-3575 Cominco, Ltd “Galva-Guard” Vancouver, BC
Glidden ICI Dulux Paints Div. PPG Industries (GlidZinc
Organic 5526/5527/5528)
Strongsville, OH (440) 816-9021
Project Owner GALVANIZING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 09 92 00 3

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION
Koppers Industries (CarboZinc 11) Pittsburgh, PA (412) 227-2001 Lanco Manufacturing “Galvacon” San Lorenzo, PR (787) 736-6745 Metalloy Products Co. (Galvalloy) Los Angeles, CA
Rust-Oleum Corp (2185 Cold Galvanizing Compound) Vernon Hills, IL (877) 385-8155 Sherwin Williams (ZincClad I Low VOC B69AW9) Cleveland OH (800) 524-5979 Tnemec Co. Inc. (90-97) Kansas City, MO (800) 863-6321
Zaclon, LLC. “ Galvanizing Repair Rod” Cleveland, OH (216) 271-1601 Accepted lead-free equal

2.2 Materials
A. Refer to Section 02 05 00 for basic requirements for products and materials.

B. Materials for galvanizing shall be:

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
Galvanizing Zinc Conform to ASTM B6 Prime Western
Steel Products, Structural
Shapes, Tie-Rods, Handrails,
Castings, and Metal
Fabrications
Galvanized Coating Conform to ASTM A123, ASTM A153, ASTM B633 or ASTM B695
Thickness ≥ 3.4 mil (2.00 oz/ft2)
Structural Steel Bolts, Nuts,
and Washers (Connection
Bolts and Anchor Bolts
Galvanized Coating Conform to ASTM A153, ASTM B633 or ASTM B695 Thickness ≥ 2.1 mil (1.30 oz/ft2)
Steel or Iron Sheets Galvanized Coating Conform to ASTM A653 G90 Minimum Chain Link Fence Products Galvanized Coating Refer to Section 32 31 13 Hangers and Supports Galvanized Coating Refer to Section 33 05 38 Electrolier Standards ≥ 7-
gauge steel
Galvanized Coating Conform to ASTM A123, ASTM A153, ASTM B633 or ASTM B695
Thickness ≥ 3.4 mil (2.00 oz/ft2)
Electrolier Standards < 7-
gauge steel
Galvanized Coating Conform to ASTM A123, ASTM A153, ASTM B633 or ASTM B695
Thickness ≥ 2.5 mil (1.50 oz/ft2)
Hot-Stick Galvanizing Rod 50% Zinc, 50% Tin Do not use products containing lead.

C. Do not galvanize or paint structural steel to be encased in concrete. Provide clean surface for bonding to concrete.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Preparation
A. Examine areas and conditions under which Work of this section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of Work.

3.2 Installation
A. Refer to Sections 01 73 24, and 01 73 33 / 02 05 00 for basic execution and installation requirements.

B. Furnish galvanizing at locations shown on Plans and Submittals.

C. The following installation standards shall be followed:

1. Applicable OSHA and Cal OSHA regulations.

2. Other applicable building, fire, plumbing, mechanical and electrical code requirements

3. Manufacturer’s installation and warranty requirements D. Refer variances between above documents and Contract Documents to Owner’s Representative.

E. Apply galvanizing as follows:

1. Clean steel of rust and scale.

Project Owner GALVANIZING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 09 92 00 4

2. Galvanize in accordance with applicable specification.

3. Straighten galvanized parts that become warped during galvanizing operation.

F. Make repairs to zinc coatings which have been field or shop cut, burned by welding, abraded or otherwise damaged to such extent as to expose base metal.

G. Shop repairs may be made by stripping and cleaning damaged areas and re-applying a zinc coating by hot-dip process.

H. Shop repairs may be made by stripping and cleaning damaged areas and applying a zinc coating by metalizing process as follows:

1. Prepare surface, removing oil, grease, soil, and soluble material by cleaning with water and detergent (SSPC SP1) followed by brush off blast cleaning (SSPC SP7).

2. Blasted area shall lap undamaged zinc coating at least ½”.

3. Make metalizing repairs using zinc wire containing at least 99.98% zinc..

4. Apply zinc coating per ASTM A780 Annex A3.

5. Use metalizing gun to apply at least 5 mils zinc on damaged areas.

6. Repair coating shall taper to zero thickness at edge of blasted undamaged section.

I. Field repairs to field welded and damaged galvanizing may be made by applying a zinc-dust paint coating as follows:

1. Prepare surface, removing oil, grease, soil, and soluble material by cleaning with water and detergent (SSPC SP1) followed by brush off blast cleaning (SSPC SP7).

2. Blasted area shall lap undamaged zinc coating at least ½”.

3. Paint cleaned area with 2 coats un-thinned zinc paint to apply at least 5 mils zinc on damaged areas.

4. Apply repair compound per ASTM A780 Annex A3 and paint Manufacturer's Application Instructions, except coating shall have at least 90% dry film zinc content by weight.

J. Field repairs to field welded and damaged galvanizing may be made by applying zinc-alloy solder coating or a hot stick galvanizing repair rod zinc coating as follows:

1. Prepare surface, removing oil, grease, soil, and soluble material by cleaning with water and detergent (SSPC SP1) followed by brush off blast cleaning (SSPC SP7).

2. Blasted area shall lap undamaged zinc coating at least ½.

3. Deposit solder to apply at least 5 mils zinc-alloy solder on damaged areas or make repairs using specified hot stick galvanizing repair rod.

4. Apply repair compound per ASTM A780 Annex A3 and repair rod Manufacturer's Application Instructions.

Project Owner GALVANIZING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 09 92 00 5

3.3 Field Quality Control
A. Field testing shall include:

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER TEST

STANDARD) FREQUENCY

FIRST TEST

PAID FOR
BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
Galvanizing Installation Visual inspection of finished
installation
1 inspection Owner Owner
Field
Performance
Demonstrate Work conforms to
Contract Documents and
Manufacturer’s printed literature
1 test Contractor Contractor
11-month
Warranty
Inspection
Confirm Work conforms to
Contract Documents and
Manufacturer’s printed literature
1 test Owner Contractor

END OF SECTION

Project Owner GALVANIZING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 09 92 00 6

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Project Owner EPOXY LININGS AND COATINGS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 09 96 56 1
SECTION 09 96 56

EPOXY LININGS AND COATINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Work Included
A. Requirements for surface preparation, application and testing of fusion-bonded epoxy lining and coating systems for ferrous surfaces of valves, flow meters, pumps, pipelines, fittings, or pipeline appurtenances.

B. Do not apply fusion-bonded epoxy systems to aluminum, brass, bronze, copper, plastic, rubber, or stainless steel surfaces.

C. Where Owner deems fusion-bonded epoxy coatings to be impractical, liquid epoxy lining systems may be substituted as described herein.

1.3 System Description
A. Furnish and install complete functional coating system for specified surface in compliance with applicable local air quality management regulations where applicable. Comply with Manufacturer’s application requirements and applicable codes and standards.

B. The term “dry film thickness” or DFT shall refer to thickness of fully-cured paint coat measured in mils (1/1000”)

B. Cured lining or coating shall be smooth and glossy with no graininess or roughness. Lining or coating shall have no blisters, cracks, bubbles, under-film voids, mechanical damage, discontinuities or holidays.

C. Factory testing shall include:

ITEM TEST FOR
TEST

STANDARD
(ASTM OR

OTHER TEST

STANDARD) FREQUENCY

FIRST TEST

PAID FOR
BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
Offsite
Surface
Preparation
and Priming
Offsite
Inspection of
Priming
Operation
Applicable
standards
As directed on Contractor Contractor
Project Owner EPOXY LININGS AND COATINGS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 09 96 56 2

ITEM TEST FOR
TEST

STANDARD
(ASTM OR

OTHER TEST

STANDARD) FREQUENCY

FIRST TEST

PAID FOR
BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
Paint from
Proposed
“Equals”
Spectrographic
and Durability
Tests
Applicable ASTM
standards
As directed Contractor Contractor
Valve, Flow
Meter, Pump,
Pipe, Fitting,
or Pipeline
Appurtenance
Interior Lining
or Coating
Visual
Inspection
Pipe or items will
be rejected due to:
a. Sizeable
protrusions in
lining obviously
caused by lining
over foreign
material.
b.Defects
indicating double
flow or fold in
lining.
c. Chuck marks or
gouges extending
to bare metal.
d. Bubbles or area
which appears to
be unbonded to
underlying metal
surface
Each lined pipe
spool or item
Contractor Contractor
Holidays ASTM D5162 and
AWWA C213
§5.3.3.

If number of
holidays or
pinholes for items
≤12” is ≤5 per
item, repair per
coating
Manufacturer’s
recommendation
and retest. If more
holidays are
found, sandblast,
recoat and retest
entire item.

Each lined
Valve, Flow
Meter, Pump,
Pipe, Fitting, or
Pipeline
Appurtenance
Contractor Contractor
Project Owner EPOXY LININGS AND COATINGS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 09 96 56 3

ITEM TEST FOR
TEST

STANDARD
(ASTM OR

OTHER TEST

STANDARD) FREQUENCY

FIRST TEST

PAID FOR
BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
AWWA C213
§5.3.3 If less than
one holiday per 10
square feet of pipe
surface is found,
repair per coating
Manufacturer’s
recommendation
and retest. If more
holidays are
found, sandblast,
recoat and retest
entire pipe spool.

Also check weld
seam centerlines
to verify no porous
blisters, craters or
pimples lie along
peak of weld
crown.

Each lined
Valve, Flow
Meter, Pump,
Pipe Spool,
Fitting, or
Pipeline
Appurtenance
≥16”
Contractor Contractor
Lining
Thickness
Verify thickness
with magnetictype dry film
thickness gauge.

Average shall
exceed minimum
thickness, No
individual
thickness value
shall be more than
2 mils below or 3
mils above
specified minimum
thickness. Items
not meeting these
criteria shall be
sandblasted,
recoated and
retested.

Each lined
Valve, Flow
Meter, Pump,
Pipe, Fitting, or
Pipeline
Appurtenance
at 3 locations
per item
Contractor Contractor

1.5 References
A. Reference publications below form part of this specification to extent referenced and are referred to within text by basic designation only.

B. ASTM D1002 Apparent Shear Strength of Single-Lap-Joint Adhesively Bonded Metal Specimens by Tension Loading (Metal-to-Metal)
Project Owner EPOXY LININGS AND COATINGS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 09 96 56 4
C. ASTM D1044 Resistance of Transparent Plastics to Surface Abrasion D. ASTM D2370 Tensile Properties of Organic Coatings
E. ASTM D2583 Indentation Hardness of Rigid Plastics by Means of a Barcol Impressor F. ASTM D5162 Discontinuity (Holiday) Testing of Nonconductive Protective Coating on Metallic Substrates
G. ASTM G17 Penetration Resistance of Pipeline Coatings H. AWWA C210 Liquid Epoxy Coating Systems for Interior and Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines I. AWWA C213 Fusion-Bonded Epoxy Coating for Interior and Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines J. AWWA C550 Protective Epoxy Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants K. MSS SP98 Protective Coatings for Interior of Valves, Hydrants, and Fittings L. SSPC PA1 Shop, Field and Maintenance Painting
M. SSPC PA2 Measurement of Dry Paint Thickness with Magnetic Gauges N. SSPC SP5/NACE 1 White Metal Blast Cleaning
O. SSPC SP10/NACE 2 Near White Blast Cleaning
P. SSPC Vis1 Pictorial Surface Preparation Standards for Painting Steel Surfaces

1.6 Submittals
A. Furnish the following submittals.

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION
Product Data Submit product data sheets per Product Data requirements.

Application
Instructions
Required for each paint and coating per Application Instruction requirements. Include:

1. Surface Preparation Requirements.

2. MSDS sheets identifying flammability, toxicity, allergenic properties and other characteristics requiring field precautions.

3. Minimum and maximum recommended dry-film thicknesses per coat for prime, intermediate, and finish coats.

4. Percent solids by volume.

5. Statement verifying selected prime coat is recommended by Manufacturer for use with selected intermediate and finish coats.

6. Application and curing requirements and instructions.

Certificate of
Compliance
For work done in California, submit certification that coatings conform to applicable local Air Quality Management District rules and regulations for products and application
Submit coating system and application certification that coatings comply with specified requirements and are suitable for intended application per certificate of compliance requirements.

Submit description of repair procedures used if any.

Warranty Furnish one-year warranty from date of final acceptance Project Owner EPOXY LININGS AND COATINGS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 09 96 56 5
B. Refer to Section 02 05 00 for definition of requirements for Product Data, Application Instructions, and Certificates of Compliance.

1.7 Delivery, Storage, and Handling
A. Refer to Sections 01 65 00 / 01 66 00 for delivery, storage, and handling requirements.

1.8 Unit Prices
A. Payment for Work in this section shall be included as part of lump-sum or unit-price bid amount for which such Work is appurtenant.

B. Refer to Section 01 22 00 for measurement and payment clauses for epoxy linings and coatings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Acceptable Manufacturers
A. Materials shall be of current manufacture and shall meet applicable regulations for their application and intended service. Materials shall meet applicable Federal, state and local regulations, including Air Quality Management District Regulations. Coats of coating system shall be of same Manufacturer and shall be accepted by Manufacturer for intended service. If product specified herein is no longer manufactured or does not meet current regulations, provide a substitute, currently manufactured product of at least equal performance which meets applicable regulations subject to Owner’s Representative’s approval, at no additional cost.

B. Factory-applied base coatings to a specific product may differ slightly from those listed below where primers are factory-applied by Manufacturers. Such base-coat substitutions for Contractor’s convenience are subject to the following:

1. Surface preparation shall meet or exceed surface preparations specified below.

2. Primer or base coat shall be that recommended and normally used by Manufacturer for condition and exposure of finished installation.

3. Chemical composition of factory-applied base coats shall be similar to chemical composition specified below.

5. Verify compatibility of adjacent coats with coating Manufacturers.

6. Total DFT shall equal or exceed DFT specified below.

7. Finish coat shall be as stipulated below.

8. If paint system fails, repair paint system in failed area to specifications of this section.

C. Acceptable Manufacturers for fusion-bonded epoxy where NSF approval is not required include:

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION
Fusion-Bonded
Epoxy Linings
and Coatings
3M Scotchkote 134, 135, 203, 206,
206N or 6233
Saint Paul, MN (888) 364-3577
Accepted equal
Project Owner EPOXY LININGS AND COATINGS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 09 96 56 6
D. Acceptable Manufacturers for field-applied epoxy coating for patching include:

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION
Field-Applied Liquid Epoxy
Linings and Coatings for Patching
3M Scotchkote 306 Saint Paul, MN (888) 364-3577
Accepted equal
E. Acceptable Manufacturers for liquid epoxy where NSF 61 approval is not required include:

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION
Liquid
Epoxy
Linings
and
Coatings
where
NSF 61
Approval
is Not
Required
3M Scotchkote 312 or 314 Saint Paul, MN (888) 364-3577
AkzoNobel Devoe - Sinclair - Dulux –
Glidden
Amsterdam NED (800) 589-1267
PPG Industries Amercoat 370 Cheswick, PA (888) 774-4332 Tnemec Pota-Pox L140
(For nonpotable water use Tnemec Series
L69)
Kansas City, KS (800) 863-6321
Accepted equal

2.2 Materials - General
A. Refer to Section 02 05 00 for basic requirements for products and materials.

B. Fusion-bonded epoxy lining systems for valves, flow meter, pump, pipe, pipe fitting, or interiors shall conform to the following.

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION ALTERNATE SPECIFICATION*
Valve, Flow
Meter, Pump,
Pipe, Pipe
Fitting, or
Pipeline
Appurtenance
Interior Lining
or Coating
FusionBonded
Epoxy
AWWA C213
100% solids powdered thermosetting epoxy per AWWA
C550
Hardness per ASTM D2583: Barcol 17
Hardness on “M” Scale: Rockwell 50
Abrasion Resistance per ASTM D1044 with Tabor CS17
wheel 1000-gram wheel, 1000 cycles: 0.05 gram removed
/ 5000 cycles 0.115 gram removed
Adhesion 3,000 psi (Elcometer)
Tensile Strength per ASTM D2370: 7300 psi
Penetration per ASTM G17: 0 mil
Adhesion Overlap Shear, ⅛” steel panel, 0.010 glue line per ASTM D1002: 4300 psi
Impact (100 in-lb minimum (Gardner ⅝” diameter tip)
Total DFT 12.0 mils
Project Owner EPOXY LININGS AND COATINGS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 09 96 56 7
ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION ALTERNATE SPECIFICATION*
Total DFT 5.0-16.0 mils on ring grooves and flange faces Surface
Preparation
SSPC-SP5/NACE 1 White metal blast cleaning
Base Coat
(Apply at
Place of
Manufacture)
Polyamide
Epoxy
3M Company Epoxy
Primer
DFT 5.0-6.0 mils,
Finish Coat
(Apply at
Place of
Manufacture)
Polyamide
Epoxy
Scotchkote 134 or
206N
Lilly “Pipe Clad” 1500 Red
C. Field-applied epoxy coating for patching shall conform to the following.

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION

ALTERNATE
SPECIFICATION*
Valve,Flow Meter, Pump,
Pipe, Pipe Fitting, or Pipeline
Appurtenance Interior Lining
or Coating
Epoxy 80% solids liquid resin
Total DFT 12.0 mils
Patching Compound Polyamide
Epoxy
Scotchkote 323
D. Liquid epoxy lining systems for valve, flow meter, pump, pipe, pipe fitting, or pipeline appurtenance interiors shall be used only when Owner deems fusion-bonded epoxy coating to be impractical. Liquid epoxy lining systems for valve, hydrant and appurtenance interiors shall meet the following requirements.

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION

ALTERNATE

SPECIFICATION

ALTERNATE

SPECIFICATION
Valve, Flow
Meter, Pump,
Pipe, Pipe
Fitting, or
Pipeline
Appurtenance
Interior Lining or
Coating
Epoxy Total DFT 12.0 mils
Surface
Preparation
SSPC-SP5/NACE 1 White metal blast cleaning
Project Owner EPOXY LININGS AND COATINGS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 09 96 56 8

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION

ALTERNATE

SPECIFICATION

ALTERNATE

SPECIFICATION
Base Coat
(Apply at Place
of Manufacture)
Polyamide
Epoxy
Tnemec Pota-Pox L140
(For nonpotable water
use Tnemec Series
L69)
DFT 4.0-5.0 mils,
3M Company
Epoxy Primer
DFT 4.0-5.0 mils,
ICI Devoe BarRust 233V
DFT 5.0-6.0 mils
Intermediate
Coat (Apply at
Place of
Manufacture)
Polyamide
Epoxy
Tnemec Pota-Pox L140
(For nonpotable water
use Tnemec Series
L69)
DFT 4.0-5.0 mils,
3M Skotchkote
312 or 314
DFT 4.0-5.0 mils,
ICI Devoe BarRust 233V
DFT 4.0-5.0 mils,
Finish Coat
(Apply at Place
of Manufacture)
Polyamide
Epoxy
Tnemec Pota-Pox L140
(For nonpotable water
use Tnemec Series
L69)
DFT 4.0-5.0 mils,
3M Skotchkote
312 or 314
DFT 4.0-5.0 mils,
ICI Devoe BarRust 233V
DFT 4.0-5.0 mils,
*Powdered thermosetting epoxy or two coats of polyamide epoxy may be substituted.

E. Epoxy lining shall meet current Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) content regulations.

F. Powdered thermosetting epoxy coating systems for steel architectural surfaces shall meet the following requirements.

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION ALTERNATE SPECIFICATION*
Architectural
Exterior PowderEpoxy Coating
Powdered
Thermosett
ing Epoxy
100% solids powdered thermosetting epoxy per
AWWA C550
Hardness per ASTM D2583: Barcol 17
Hardness on “M” Scale: Rockwell 50
Abrasion Resistance per ASTM D1044 with Tabor
CS17 wheel 1000-gram wheel, 1000 cycles: 0.05
gram removed / 5000 cycles 0.115 gram removed
Adhesion 3,000 psi (Elcometer)
Tensile Strength per ASTM D2370: 7300 psi
Penetration per ASTM G17: 0 mil
Adhesion Overlap Shear, ⅛” steel panel, 0.010 glue
line per ASTM D1002: 4300 psi
Impact (100 in-lb minimum (Gardner ⅝” diameter tip)
Total DFT 12.0 mils
Surface
Preparation
SSPC-SP5/NACE 1 White metal blast cleaning
Project Owner EPOXY LININGS AND COATINGS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 09 96 56 9
ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION ALTERNATE SPECIFICATION*
Base Coat (Apply
at Place of
Manufacture)
Polyamide
Epoxy
3M Company
Epoxy Primer
DFT 5.0-6.0 mils,
Finish Coat (Apply
at Place of
Manufacture)
Polyamide
Epoxy
Scotchkote 134 or
206N
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Preparation
A. Surfaces to be coated or painted shall be in proper condition to receive material specified before coating or painting is done.

B. Prepare iron or steel surfaces in accordance with applicable Manufacturer’s instructions and SSPC standards.

C. Grind surface irregularities, welds, and weld spatter smooth before applying epoxy. Remove protuberances including slivers, scales, burrs and gouges which may produce pinholes in lining. Grind at least 0.020” off weld caps on pipe weld seams before beginning surface preparation and heating of pipe. Round sharp edges to be coated.

D. Allowable grind area shall not exceed 0.5 square feet per location and maximum grind area shall not exceed 2 square feet per item or piece of equipment. Do not use items, pipes or pieces of equipment not meeting these requirements.

E. Ensure surfaces to receive coatings are dry and free from visible oil, grease, dirt, dust, mill scale, rust, paint oxides, corrosion products and other foreign matter in accordance with specified SSPC standards.

F. Preheat pipe, item or piece of equipment prior to blast cleaning to remove surface moisture.

Preheat shall ensure surface temperature is at least 5°F above dew point temperature during blast cleaning and inspection.

G. Sandblast surfaces as specified, protecting beveled pipe ends from abrasive blast cleaning.

H. After sandblasting, apply 5% (by weight) phosphoric acid solution wash to pipe, item or piece of equipment. Average temperature measured in three different locations shall be between 80°F and 130°F during acid wash procedure. Duration of acid contact with surface shall be as follows:

TEMPERATURE CONTACT TIME
80°F 52 seconds
85°F 45 seconds
90°F 36 seconds
95°F 33 seconds
100°F 28 seconds
105°F 24 seconds
110°F 21 seconds
130°F 10 seconds
Project Owner EPOXY LININGS AND COATINGS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 09 96 56 10
I. After completing acid wash, remove acid with demineralized water having maximum conductivity of 5 micromhos/cm at a minimum nozzle pressure of 2500 psi.

3.2 Application
A. Refer to Section 02 05 00 for basic execution and application requirements.

B. Furnish and install fusion-bonded epoxy linings and coatings at locations shown on Plans C. The following installation standards shall be followed:

1. Applicable OSHA and Cal OSHA regulations

2. Manufacturer’s installation and warranty requirements including minimum and maximum drying time between required coats, except as modified herein

3. AWWA C213 Fusion-Bonded Epoxy Coating for Interior and Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines
D. Refer variances between above documents and Contract Documents to Owner’s Representative.

E. Coat interior metal surfaces excluding seating areas and bronze and stainless-steel pieces.

F. Uniformly apply coatings at spreading rate required to achieve specified DFT.

G. Apply coatings to be free of film characteristics such as runs or blisters that would adversely affect performance or appearance of coating systems.

H. Apply lining and coating by electrostatic spray or fluidized bed process. Heat and cure per epoxy Manufacturer’s recommendations. Heat source shall not leave residue or contaminant on metal surface. Do not allow surfaces to oxidize or flash rust prior to coating.

I. Pinholes and holidays detected during testing shall be marked, repaired in accordance with Manufacturer’s printed instructions and retested. No pinholes or other irregularities will be permitted in final coating.

J. Protect finished surfaces between coats. For subsequent coats, remove dust, dirt, oil, grease, and foreign matter which will affect adhesion or durability of finish by washing with clean rags dipped in commercial cleaning solvent approved by paint and coating system Manufacturer.

Surface shall then be rinsed with clean water and wiped dry with clean rags.

K. Coats shall be thoroughly dry and cured according to Manufacturer’s recommendations before next coat is applied.

L. Upon completion, remove masking and other temporary coverings and protection of surrounding areas and surfaces.

M. Following application and testing, protect surfaces of coating systems from damage during construction.

3.3 Field Quality Control
A. Repair or replace damaged or colored materials and surfaces not scheduled to be coated.

B. Repair in accordance with Manufacturer’s instructions coatings that exhibit film characteristics or defects that might adversely affect performance or appearance of coating systems. Wire brush or sandblast damaged areas per SSPC SP10. Lightly abrade or sandblast lining and coating on sides of damaged area before applying liquid repair coating specified above.

Patched areas shall overlap parent or base coating at least ½”. If damaged area exceeds 20 square inches, remove entire lining and coating and recoat and retest entire item.

Project Owner EPOXY LININGS AND COATINGS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 09 96 56 11
C. Field testing shall include:

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER TEST

STANDARD) FREQUENCY
FIRST
TEST
PAID
FOR BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
Finished
Lining or
Coating
Holidays Nondestructive holiday
tester such as TinkerRasor Model AP or AP-W
Contractor to submit
written report from
approved testing agency
on re-inspection
Owner’s option Owner Contractor
Dry Film
Thickness
SSPC-PA2
Nondestructive magnetictype thickness gauge
such as “Inspector” or
“Positest.” Coated items
failing inspection will be
subject to rejection.

Owner’s option Owner Contractor
Film
Characteristics
and Defects
Visual inspection.

Contractor to submit
written report from
approved testing agency
on reinspection
As directed Owner Contractor
Finished
Coating
System
11-Month
Warranty
Inspection
Demonstrate compliance
to Contract Documents
and Manufacturer’s
printed literature as
described below. Repair
identified deficiencies.
1 inspection
attended by
Owner,
Contractor,
Owner’s
Representative
and
Manufacturer’s
representative
Owner Contractor
D. Furnish inspection devices in good working condition for detection of holidays and measurement of dry-film thickness of paints and coatings. Also furnish U.S. Department of Commerce, National Bureau of Standards certified thickness calibration plates to test accuracy of thickness gauges. Dry film thickness gauges and holiday detectors shall be available until final acceptance of application. Inspection devices shall be operated by, or in presence of Owner’s Representative with location and frequency basis determined by Owner’s Representative. Owner’s Representative is not precluded from furnish his own inspection devices and rendering their opinion based solely on their tests.

E. Owner’s Representative shall have right to reject unsatisfactory material or work and to replace it at Contractor’s expense if deficiencies are found in quality of installed coating.

F. Upon completion of work, remove staging, scaffolding and containers from Work site. Clean site to satisfaction of Owner’s Representative.

Project Owner EPOXY LININGS AND COATINGS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 09 96 56 12
Warranty Inspection shall be conducted between 11th month following completion of coating and painting work. Repair defective work in strict accordance with Contract Documents and to satisfaction of Owner’s Representative.

1. Owner will establish inspection date and will notify Contractor at least 30 days in advance.

3. Entire exterior paint system shall be visually inspected. Defective, damaged or rusting areas shall be satisfactorily repaired by and at Contractor’s sole expense.

5. Repairs shall proceed promptly. Upon completion of inspection and receipt of Inspection Report, Owner will establish date for Contractor to proceed with remedial Work. Delay on part of Contractor to proceed with remedial work on schedule shall constitute breach of this Contract. In such case, Owner may proceed to have defects remedied as outlined in Contract Documents.

6. Remedial Work shall occur at locations where paint or coating has peeled, bubbled, or cracked and at locations where rusting is evident. Such locations shall be considered failures. Make repairs at points where failures are observed by removing deteriorated coating or paint, cleaning surface and repainting or recoating with same system. If area of failure exceeds 25% of coated or painted surface, entire paint or coating system shall, at Owner’s option, be required to be removed and recoated or repainted in accordance with original Contract Documents.

7. Costs of warranty inspection and repair shall be borne by Contractor, who shall include an appropriate amount for testing and repair in their bid. No additional allowance will be paid by Owner for Warranty Inspection and repairs.

END OF SECTION
Project Owner PREFABRICATED METAL BUILDING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 13 34 00 1
SECTION 13 34 00

PREFABRICATED METAL BUILDING
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Pre-engineered building and components including the following:

1. Structural steel frame, secondary framing, and miscellaneous framing.

2. Roof covering system including exterior roof panels, panel attachments, sealants, mastics, trim and flashings.

3. Exterior panels.

4. Insulation and insulation support system.

5. Manufactured roof insulation system.

B. Wall accessories including the following:

1. Windows.

2. Service doors.

3. Louvers

4. Wall openings.

C. Roof accessories including the following:

1. Eave gutters.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete
B. Section 08 33 23 – Overhead Coiling Doors
C. Section 08 51 13 – Aluminum Windows
D. Section 08 81 00 – Glass Glazing
E. Section 08 91 19 – Fixed Louvers
F. Section 09 29 00 – Gypsum Board
G. Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating

1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC):

1. AISC 360 - Specification for Structural Steel Buildings.

2. AISC 341 - Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings.

3. AISC Design Guide 3 - Serviceability for Steel Buildings B. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI):

1. AISI S100 - North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members.

C. American Welding Society (AWS):

1. AWS D1.1 / D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel.

2. AWS D1.3 / D1.3M - Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel.

D. Association for Iron & Steel Technology (AISE):

1. AISE 13 - Specifications for Design and Construction of Mill Buildings.

Project Owner PREFABRICATED METAL BUILDING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 13 34 00 2
E. ASTM International (ASTM):

1. ASTM A 325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength.

2. ASTM A 653 / A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

3. ASTM A 792 / A 792M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55 % Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.

4. ASTM B 117 - Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus.

5. ASTM C 518 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus.

6. ASTM C 1363 - Standard Test Method for Thermal Performance of Building Materials and Envelope Assemblies by Means of a Hot Box Apparatus.

7. ASTM D 522 - Standard Test Methods for Mandrel Bend Test of Attached Organic Coatings.

8. ASTM D 523 - Standard Test Method for Specular Gloss.

9. ASTM D 968 - Standard Test Methods for Abrasion Resistance of Organic Coatings by Falling Abrasive.

10. ASTM D 1308 - Standard Test Method for Effect of Household Chemicals on Clear and Pigmented Organic Finishes.

11. ASTM D 2244 - Standard Practice for Calculation of Color Tolerances and Color Differences from Instrumentally Measured Color Coordinates.

12. ASTM D 2247 - Standard Practice for Testing Water Resistance of Coatings in 100% Relative Humidity.

13. ASTM D 2794 - Standard Test Method for Resistance of Organic Coatings to the Effects of Rapid Deformation (Impact).

14. ASTM D 3361 - Standard Practice for Unfiltered Open-Flame Carbon-Arc Exposures of Paint and Related Coatings.

15. ASTM D 4214 - Standard Test Methods for Evaluating the Degree of Chalking of Exterior Paint Films.

16. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

17. ASTM E 96 / E 96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.

18. ASTM E 1592 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Sheet Metal Roof and Siding Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.

19. ASTM G 87 - Standard Practice for Conducting Moist SO2 Tests.

F. FM Global:

1. FMRC Standard 4471 - Approval Standard for Class 1 Roofs for Hail Damage Resistance, Combustibility, and Wind Uplift Resistance.

G. Metal Building Manufacturers Association (MBMA):

1. MBMA Metal Building Systems Manual.

2. Seismic Design Guide for Metal Building Systems.

H. North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (NAIMA):

1. NAIMA 202 - Standard For Flexible Fiber Glass Insulation to be Laminated for Use in Metal Buildings.

I. The Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC):

1. SSPC-Paint 15 - Primer for Use Over Hand Cleaned Steel performs to SSPC-Paint 15 standards.

2. SSPC-SP2 - Hand Tool Cleaning.

J. Underwriters Laboratories (UL):

1. UL 580 - Standard for Tests for Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies.

Project Owner PREFABRICATED METAL BUILDING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 13 34 00 3

2. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

K. US Army Corps of Engineers (COE):

1. COE Unified Facilities Guide Specification Section 07 61 13.

1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Building Width: Measured from outside to outside of sidewall girts. Typically edge to edge of concrete.

B. Building Length: Measured from outside to outside of end wall girts. Typically edge to edge of concrete
C. Building Line: Outside face of steel/girt.

D. Building Eave Height: Measured from the top of the eave member at the outside of the sidewall girt line to the bottom of the sidewall column base plate or to finished floor if columns are on grout or recessed below finished floor.

E. Bay Spacing: Measured from centerline to centerline of primary frames for interior bays and from centerline of the first interior frame to outside of end wall girts for end bays.

F. Roof Pitch: The ratio of the vertical rise to the horizontal run (i.e. 1:12 = 1 inch of rise for every foot of horizontal dimension).

1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. General:

1. Provide metal building frame, metal wall panels, metal roof panels, accessories and miscellaneous materials for a complete enclosure including supports for building components specified in other sections.

2. Design structural systems according to professionally recognized methods and standards and legally adopted building codes.

3. Design under supervision of professional engineer licensed in the State of California.

B. Design Requirements:

1. Bay size: Per plan.

2. Roof pitch: Per plan.

3. Building location zip code: 92231

4. Roof Live Load: 20 psf, reducible.

5. Collateral Loads: 5 psf.

6. Reliability/redundancy factor: Calculate in accordance with the 2019 California Building Code

7. Seismic Loads: Calculate in accordance with the 2019 California Building Code

8. Building use/importance category III, Soil Profile D, Effective Peak Velocity Related Acceleration Coefficient (Ss/Sa) 1.51, Effective Peak Acceleration Coefficient (S1/Sa)

0.60. 9. Dead loads, including the weight of all indicated permanent construction:
a. Elements required for support of lights and light battens, hanging fixtures, mechanical equipment, piping, ceiling hanger wires, and all other items required to provide a complete building and not specifically indicated on the drawings.

10. Wind Loads:
a. Roof Wind Load: Calculate in accordance with the 2019 California Building Code, using 104 mph Basic Wind Speed, Exposure Category C. Wind Enclosure enclosed.

11. Roof System tested and certified to meet Underwriters Laboratories UL 90 wind uplift rating.

Project Owner PREFABRICATED METAL BUILDING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 13 34 00 4

12. Panels tested in accordance with U.S. Corp of Engineers ASTM E 1592.

13. Panel fastening meeting uplift requirements based on tested fastener values with appropriate Safety Factors.

14. Purlin strength with roof panel determined and tested in accordance with AISI procedures.

C. Performance Requirements:

1. System to withstand gravity and lateral loads in compliance with contract documents.

2. Refer to contract drawings for additional concentrated loads to pre-engineered building hanger beams and support jacks.

3. Allowable Deflections: Deflection/drift criteria shall follow recommendations outlined in AISC Design Guide 3 and MBMA Serviceability recommendations.

4. Metal wall panels (interior and exterior) shall not to be used as shear elements.

5. Construct assembly to permit movement of components without buckling, failure of joint seals, undue stress on fasteners or other detrimental effects, when subject to temperature range of 100 degrees F (37 degrees C) in a 24 hour period.

6. Design and fabricate wall and roof systems free of distortion or defects detrimental to appearance or performance. Some oil canning in rolled panels especially in the flats of the panel is normal and is not cause for rejection.

D. Serviceability Criteria: Deflection limits for major components based on industry standards unless otherwise noted.

1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.

B. Design Data: Provide detailed design criteria and calculations prepared by a professional engineer licensed in the State of California.

C. Certification: Manufacturer certification that the building conforms to the contract documents and manufacturer's standard design procedures.

D. Shop Drawings: Show building layout, primary and secondary framing member sizes and locations, cross-sections, and product and connection details.

1. Anchor Bolt Installation Drawings: Layouts with minimum bolt diameters.

E. Product Data: Information on manufactured products to be incorporated into the project.

F. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns.

G. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size 6 inches square, representing actual product, color, and patterns.

H. Certificates: Welder certifications

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Not less than 5 years experience in the actual production of specified products.

1. Member of the Metal Building Manufacturer's Association (MBMA).

2. Primary manufacturer of frames, secondary steel, roof and wall sheeting, and trim.

B. Installer Qualifications - Firm experienced in application or installation of systems similar in complexity to those required for this project, plus the following:

1. Acceptable to or licensed by manufacturer.

2. 3 years experience with systems.

Project Owner PREFABRICATED METAL BUILDING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 13 34 00 5

3. Successfully completed not less than 5 comparable scale projects using this system.

C. Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of surface preparation techniques and application workmanship.

1. Finish areas designated by Owner’s representative.

2. Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship, color, and sheen are approved by Owner’s representative.

3. Refinish mock-up area as required to produce acceptable work.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.

B. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.

1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's recommended limits.

1.10 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer shall warranty installed system for the periods described herein, starting from Date of Substantial Completion or ninety days from delivery, whichever comes first, against all the conditions indicated below. When notified in writing from Owner, manufacturer/installer shall, promptly and without inconvenience and cost to Owner, correct said deficiencies.

1. Materials and Workmanship Warranty:
a. Warranty Period: 5 years

2. Finish Warranty:
a. Finish coating shall not peel, blister, chip, crack or check in finish, and shall not chalk in excess of 8 numerical ratings when measured in accordance with ASTM D 4214.
b. Finish coating shall not change color or fade in excess of 5 NBS units as determined by ASTM D 2244.
1) Panel finish: 25 years.

3. Performance Warranty: Furnish written warranty, stating sheet metal roofing system and flashing (flashing under premium warranty only) under this Section will be maintained in watertight condition and defects resulting from the following items will be corrected without cost to Owner for a period of 20 years. a. Faulty workmanship.
b. Defective materials including sealants and fasteners. c. Water infiltration.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Varco Pruden Buildings, Nucor Building Systems, or Approved Equal.

2.2 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
A. Primary Framing: Solid web framing consisting of tapered or uniform depth rafters rigidly connected to tapered or uniform depth columns. Provide a clear span that supports the loads at bay spacing indicated. Frames shall have roof pitch and span as indicated on the Project Owner PREFABRICATED METAL BUILDING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 13 34 00 6
drawings.

B. End Wall Framing: Corner posts, end posts and rake beams.

C. Steel Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP 2.

2.3 SECONDARY FRAMING
A. Purlins: Zee-shaped; depth as required; with minimum yield strength of 60,000 psi (410 MPa); simple span or continuous span as required for design. G-30 galvanized standard material with G-90 availability. Welded members are manufacturer's standard primer.

Continuous for zees only.

B. Girts: Zee- or Cee-shaped; depth as required, with minimum yield strength of 60,000 psi (410 MPa); simple span or continuous span as required for design. G-30 galvanized standard material with G-90 availability. Welded members are manufacturer's standard primer.

C. Wind Bracing: Portal, torsional, diagonal bracing or diaphragm in accordance with manufacturer's standard design practices; utilizing rods, angles, and other members, with minimum yield strengths as required for design but in most cases, 50 ksi.

D. Primary Frame Flange Bracing: Attached from purlins or girts to the primary framing, minimum yield strength as required for design but in most cases 60 ksi.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING
A. Base Angles: Nominal 2 inch by 3 inch by 0.060 inch acrylic coated G30 galvanized steel angles, with minimum yield strength of 55 ksi (380 MPa), anchored to the floor slab or grade beam with power driven fasteners or equivalent at a maximum spacing of 2 feet (610 mm) (on center and not more than 6 inches from the end of any angle member. Anchors are not provided by the metal building manufacturer.

B. Door Headers and Jambs: Zee- or Cee-shaped; depth as required; with minimum yield strength of 60 ksi (410 MPa).

2.5 ROOF COVERING SYSTEM
A. Roof Panels: Panel Rib; 36 inch wide net coverage, with 1-3/16 inch high major ribs at 12 inches on center with (2) minor ribs spaced between the major ribs.

1. Material (Painted): AZ50 Galvalume coated steel.

2. Thickness: 22 gage.

3. Side laps: At least one full major rib, with a supporting member bearing edge on the lower panel and an anti-capillary groove on the upper panel.

4. Length: Continuous from eave to ridge up to 43 feet (13.1 m) in length.

5. End laps, where required: minimum 4 inches (102 mm) wide, located at a support member.

6. The KXL paint system is a PVDF finish applied to the zinc aluminum coated steel to give a long life color that resists fading and chalking. KXL is a 1 mil nom. PVDF finish with 70 percent Kynar 500 or Hylar 5000 standard.

2.6 EXTERIOR PANELS
A. Wall Panels: ThermalClad Shallow Planked panel; 42 inch wide sturdy insulated sandwich panel ideal for exterior walls or interior partition applications.

1. 26 gage exterior face design is panel factory formed with vertical lines to present an attractive durable finish.

2. The embossed G-90 steel exterior panels are coated in 70% fluoropolymer finish to Project Owner PREFABRICATED METAL BUILDING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 13 34 00 7
provide long term low maintenance performance.

3. Interior panels are Light Mesa design 26 gage steel, factory coated with white polyester finish.

4. Offset double tongue and groove side joints

5. R-value minimum of R-9.8 continous.

6. Clips and fasteners concealed in side joints

7. Standard lengths from 8 feet to 42 feet.

8. Thickness: 4 inches.

2.7 INSULATION
A. Laminated Fiberglass: Owens-Corning Fiberglas, NAIMA 202, "Certified R" metal building insulation.

1. TIMA Insignia and Insulation Thickness: Ink-jet printed on fiberglass.

B. Back-Fill Insulation: Owens-Corning Fiberglas unfaced "Metal Building Insulation Plus".

C. Roof Insulation:

1. Certified R-Value: R-10 + R-19: Filled Cavity + thermal spacers

2. Thermal Spacer Blocks between purlins and metal roof panels shall have an R-Value of R-3 Minimum. If thermal spacers are not provided, minimum R-value of R-24.4 minimum shall be provided.

D. Wall Insulation:

1. Certified R-Value: R-9.8 Continuous.

E. Roof and Wall Insulation Facing: WMP-F (PSF) (White).

1. 0.0015-inch-thick, UV-stabilized, white polypropylene film laminated to 0.0003-inchthick aluminum foil, reinforced with glass-fiber scrim, in white.

2. Adhere facing to Owens-Corning Fiberglas "Certified R", NAIMA 202, fiberglass blanket.

3. Assembly of Insulation Blanket and Facing:
a. Flame Spread Rating: Less than 25.
b. UL Label: Submit as specified in Submittals article of this section. c. Perm Rating: 0.02.

2.8 INSULATION SUPPORT SYSTEM
A. Insulation Support System: "Sky-Web II" insulation support system.

B. Description:

1. Compatible with roof system.

2. Limit to "over-the-purlin" type insulation systems.

3. Knotted Mesh:
a. Grid: Nominal 2-3/4 inches by 2-3/4 inches.
b. Material: Twisted twine of DuPont nylon Type 6-6 fiber. c. Mesh Covering Interior Bays: 21-pound twine.
1) Five-Foot Strip Along Edge: #30 twine, with edge color coded for identification.

4. Double selvage along the 2 edges in machine direction.

5. Furnish up to 60 feet wide by building width.
a. Cover 1 or 2 bays of building length
b. Extend eave-to-eave across building.

C. Physical Properties:

1. Minimum Tensile Strength:
a. #21 Twine: 205 pounds.

Project Owner PREFABRICATED METAL BUILDING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 13 34 00 8
b. #30 Twine: 265 pounds.

2. Runnage:
a. #21 Twine: 960 feet per pound.
b. #30 Twine: 605 feet per pound.

3. Cord Used to Make Mesh-to-Mesh Edge Connections: #36 DuPont nylon Type 6-6 white braided twine.
a. Minimum Tensile Strength: 360 pounds.
b. Runnage: 533 feet per pound.

4. Mesh Weight: 0.012 pounds per sq ft.

D. Fasteners and Attachment Hardware:

1. Connections to Eave and Gable Members:
a. 1/8-inch-diameter wire clips looped through 20-gauge steel V-straps. b. Steel V-Straps: Fasten to framing with self-drilling screws.

2. Mesh-to-Mesh Edge Connections:
a. Lace #36 nylon cord through edges of pieces of mesh being connected. b. Edge Connections: Plastic cable ties.

E. Fire-Hazard Classification:

1. UL Fire-Hazard Classification Ratings, UL 723:
a. Flame Spread: 3 or less.
b. Smoke Developed: Less than 10.

2.9 MANUFACTURED ROOF INSULATION SYSTEM
A. Roof Insulation System: "ThermoDeck" roof insulation system.

B. Roof Insulation System shall provide a certified R-Value: R-10 + R-19: Filled Cavity + thermal spacers. Thermal Spacer Blocks between purlins and metal roof panels shall have an R-Value of R-3 Minimum. If thermal spacers are not provided, minimum R-value of R24.4 minimum shall be provided.

C. System Components:

1. Metal Roof System: "Panel Rib" metal roof system.

2. Sub-Structural System:
a. 3-inch nominal zee-shaped members (nominal 0.060-inch-thick, acrylic-coated, galvanized steel), factory punched for specific roof system being installed. b. Support Brackets:
1) 3-inch, 5-inch, or 8-inch height support zee and provide space for various thicknesses of insulation.
2) Install with self-drilling fasteners through interior liner panel and into building structure.
c. Attach zees to support brackets with self-drilling fasteners.

3. "DeckLiner" Interior Liner Panels:
a. Form from 0.0149 - inch minimum total coated thickness coated steel with minimum yield strength of 80,000 psi.
b. Nominal 36-inch-wide panel with corrugations 1/2 inch high, 3 inches on center. c. Factory cut to required length.
d. Painted Liner Panels:
1) Exposed Side: 0.15-mil min primer and 0.70-mil minimum interior white polyester paint.
2) Unexposed Side: 0.1-mil minimum primer and 0.40 minimum polyester backer

4. Vapor Retarder:
a. Facing material of vinyl film and metalized substrate laminated to glass fiber scrim reinforcement (VRP) rolled out over top of liner panels.

Project Owner PREFABRICATED METAL BUILDING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 13 34 00 9
1) Perm Rating: 0.02.

5. Insulation:
a. Unfaced Insulation: NAIMA 202.
b. Top Layer of Blanket Insulation: 3-inch-thick insulation installed between roof panels and 3-inch zee.
1) Furnish insulation in rolls of 3-foot, 4-foot, 5-foot, or 6-foot width. c. Bottom Layer of Blanket Insulation: Furnish in rolls of 3-foot, 4-foot, 5-foot, or 6- foot width or 5-foot by 5-foot batts.

D. Zee Member: Insulated using 1-inch-nominal-thick extruded polystyrene foam insulation block along each zee location to minimize "thermal short circuit" between zee and roof panels.

E. Fasteners:

1. Sub-structurals and Liner Panels: Install with self-drilling screws for attachment

2. Roof Attachment Fasteners: As specified under Roof System in this specification section.

F. Provision for Expansion and Contraction:

1. Provision for Thermal Expansion and Contraction Movement: Accomplish in roof system.

2. As specified under Roof System in this specification section.

G. Performance Testing: As specified under Roof System in this specification section.

H. Windows: See Section 08 51 13 and 08 81 00 for Interior Window.

I. Roll Up Doors – See Section 08 33 23.

J. Service Doors Pre-Assembled:

1. Size: Per Plans.

2. Description: Beige only primed, UL fire rated, wind rated, jamb extensions, multiple keying options, half glass, vertical glass, kick plates and crash chains.

3. Doors: 18 gauge galvanized (A60), polyurethane, R11, insulated core, interlocking seam. Doors meet commercial Steel Door Institute (SDI) standards.

4. Frames: Welded frame, 16 gauge galvanized (A60), 5-3/4 inch (146 mm) standard frame profile, interlocking corner connection (then welded). Frames meet (SDI) standards.

5. Locks: Shlage Grade 2, AL53PD-626-SAT. Meet ANSI A156.2 series 4000, grade 1 requirement. Three-year warranty. Thru bolted for added strength. Free-wheeling vandal resistant lever.

6. Subjambs: Proprietary offset subjamb/jamb anchor system - tested to 1,000,000 cycles. 16 gauge galv. (A40 min.) subjamb. Polyethylene block anchors stiffen jambs and allow for offset design. Self-trimming, no jamb trim required.

7. Paint Finish: All doors and frame have a baked-on beige primer coat meeting ANSI A250.1 standards. Paint test for salt spray, humidity, and adhesion.

8. Hinges: Ball bearing silver powder coat hinges with security non-removable pins.

K. Louvers: See Section 08 91 19.

L. Wall Openings: Cold-formed sheet metal framing concealed with manufacturer's standard colored trim.

2.10 ROOF ACCESSORlES
A. Eave Gutters: Roll-formed 26 gage steel sheet, with gutter straps, fasteners and joint sealant; manufacturer's standard color.

Project Owner PREFABRICATED METAL BUILDING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 13 34 00 10

1. Downspouts: 26 gage 4 inches by 5 inches in 10 foot lengths, with downspout elbows and downspout straps; same color as wall panels unless specified otherwise.

2.11 MATERIALS
A. Structural Steel Plate, Bar, Sheet, and Strip for Use in Bolted and Welded Constructions:

ASTM A 572/A 572M, A 529/A 529M, A 1011 or A 36/A 36M Modified 50, with minimum yield strength of 55,000 psi (380 MPa).

B. Galvanized Structural Steel Material for Use in Roll Formed or Press Broken Secondary Structural Members: ASTM A 563, with minimum yield strength of 60,000 psi (410 MPa).

C. Galvanized Steel Sheet for Roll Formed or Press Broken Roof and Wall Coverings, Trim and Flashing: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with minimum yield strength of 50,000 psi (345 MPa).

D. Galvalume Steel Sheet Used in Roll Formed or Press Broken Roof Covering: Aluminumzinc alloy-coated steel sheet, ASTM A 792/A 792M, with minimum yield strength of 50,000 psi (345 MPa); nominal coating weight of 0.5 oz per sq ft both sides, equivalent to an approximate coating thickness of 0.0018 inch both sides.

E. Hot Rolled Steel Shapes: W, M and S shapes, angles, rods, channels and other shapes; ASTM A 500, ASTM A 572/A 572M or ASTM A 36/A 36M as applicable; with minimum yield strengths required for the design.

F. Structural Bolts and Nuts Used with Primary Framing: High strength, ASTM A 325 bolts and ASTM A563 Grade C nuts.

G. Bolts and Nuts Used with Secondary Framing Members: High Strength ASTM A 325 Bolts and ASTM A 563 Grade C nuts.

H. Panel Fasteners:

1. Stainless Steel-capped carbon steel fasteners with integral sealing washer.

2. Concealed Fasteners: Self-drilling type, of size as required.

3. Provide fasteners in quantities and location as required by the manufacturer.

I. Flashing and Trim: Match material, finish, and color of adjacent components. Provide trim at rakes, including peak and corner assemblies, high and low eaves, corners, bases, framed openings and as required or specified to provide weather tightness and a finished appearance.

J. Sealants, Mastics and Closures: Manufacturer's standard type.

1. Provide at roof panel end laps, side laps, rake, eave, transitions and accessories as required to provide a weather resistant roof system; use tape mastic or gun grade sealant at side laps and end laps.

2. Provide at wall panel rakes, eaves, transitions and accessories.

3. Closures: Formed to match panel profiles; closed cell elastic material, manufacturer's standard color.

4. Tape mastic: Pre-formed butyl rubber-based, non-hardening, non-corrosive to metal; white or light gray.

5. Gun grade sealant: Non-skinning synthetic Elastomeric based material; gray or bronze.

2.12 FABRlCATlON
A. Fabrication: Fabricate according to manufacturer's standard practice.

1. Fabricate structural members made of welded plate sections by jointing the flanges and webs by continuous automatic submerged arc welding process.

2. Welding operators and processes: Qualified in accordance with AWS D1.1.

Project Owner PREFABRICATED METAL BUILDING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 13 34 00 11

3. Field connections: Prepare members for bolted field connection by making punched, drilled, or reamed holes in the shop.

B. Component Identification: Mark all fabricated parts, either individually or by lot or group, using an identification marking corresponding to the marking shown on the shop drawings, using a method that remains visible after shop painting.

2.13 FINISH
A. Schedule of Finishes:

1. Roof finish and color: As directed by Owner’s representative.

2. Wall finish and color: As directed by Owner’s representative .

B. Shop Coat: Manufacturer's standard rust inhibitive primer paint; manufacturer's standard color.

1. Finish all structural steel members using one coat of manufacturer's standard shop coat, after cleaning of oil, dirt, loose scale and foreign matter.

C. Pre-Painted Finish: 0.9 mil minimum dry film thickness 70 percent Kynar 500, Hylar 5000 coating on exterior surface.

1. Color: Interior Finish: Off White 0.5 mil minimum dry film thickness wash coat.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper and or timely completion.

1. Verify foundations are properly installed, to correct dimensions and within acceptable tolerances.

2. Verify location of covered or built-in work.

3. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Framing Erection: Erect framing in compliance with AIS Specification and the latest edition of the MBMA metal building systems manual.

B. Provide for erection and wind loads. Provide temporary bracing to maintain structure plumb and in alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing. Locate braced bays as required by manufacturer.

3.3 ERECTION OF FRAME
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

1. Do not erect frames without complete installation of tie beams and anchorages.

2. Set column base plates with non-shrink grout to full plate bearing.

3. Do not field cut or alter structural members without written approval.

4. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not primed with primer used in shop painting.

3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Install in compliance with manufacturer's instructions and approved submittals.

1. Exercise care when cutting prefinished material to ensure cuttings do not remain on finish surface.

2. Fasten cladding system to structural supports, aligned level and plumb.

3. Locate end laps over supports. End lap panels according to manufacturer's Project Owner PREFABRICATED METAL BUILDING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 13 34 00 12
recommendations. Place side laps over adjacent panel and mechanically seam or stitch fastener per erection guidelines.

4. Provide expansion joints where indicated.

5. Use concealed fasteners.

6. Install sealant and gaskets to prevent weather penetration.

7. Install system free of rattles, noise due to thermal movement, and wind whistles.

8. Install door frames, service doors, overhead doors, window and glass, and gutter system in compliance with manufacturer's instructions.

9. Seal wall and roof accessories watertight and weather tight with sealant in compliance with building manufacturer's standard procedures.

10. Rigidly support and secure gutters and downspouts. Joint lengths with formed seams sealed watertight. Flash and seal gutters to downspouts.

B. Tolerances:

1. Framing Members: 1/4 inch from level; 1/8 inch from plumb.

2. Racking: 1/8 inch from true position. Provide shoring to maintain position prior to cladding installation.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing by Contractor:

1. Roof installation inspection by roof manufacturer's representative; as required as part of warranty provision.

B. Testing by Owner:

1. High Strength Bolted Connections: Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts, with minimum testing of bolted connections per the arbitration inspection procedure.

2. Welded Connections: AWS. Visual inspection of 100 percent of welds. Ultrasonic inspection of 50 percent of full and partial penetration welds. A rejection rate greater than 5 percent will increase the inspection to 100 percent.

3. General Testing: For materials and installed tolerances.

END OF SECTION
Project Owner PLUMBING PIPING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 22 10 00 1
SECTION 22 10 00

PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Work Included
A. Materials, testing, and installation of plumbing including:

1. Drain, waste and vent systems.

B. Outdoor piping exposed to sunlight shall be painted with coat of water-based latex paint per Section 09 90 00. Use pastel shades or white to reduce thermal expansion.

1.2 Related Work
A. Section 01 22 00: Unit Prices
B. Section 01 33 00: Submittal Procedures
C. Section 01 40 00: Quality Requirements
D. Section 01 66 00: Product Storage and Handling Requirements E. Section 01 73 24: Seismic Restraint
F. Section 01 73 33: Mechanical Identification
G. Section 02 05 00: Basic Civil Engineering Requirements H. Section 09 90 00: Painting and Coating
I. Section 22 42 40: Cleanouts, Floor Drains, Roof Drains, and Traps J. Section 31 23 00: Excavation and Fill
K. Section 33 05 26: Utility Identification
L. Section 33 05 38: Hangers and Supports
M. Section 33 08 11: Pressure Testing and Flushing of Water Utilities N. Section 33 30 31: PVC Gravity Sewer Pipe

1.3 System Description
A. Furnish and install complete operating plumbing system, including appurtenant structural, mechanical, and/or electrical mountings, vents, valves, and connections required for compliance with Manufacturer’s installation requirements and compliance with applicable plumbing codes and standards.

1.4 Quality Assurance
A. National Sanitation Foundation marking shall appear on drainage service piping.

1.5 References
A. Reference publications below form part of this specification to extent referenced and are referred to within text by basic designation only.

1. ASME/ANSI A13.1 Scheme for Identification of Piping Systems

2. ASME/ANSI A112.18.1 Plumbing Supply Fittings

3. ASME/ANSI A112.18.2 Plumbing Waste Fittings

4. ASME/ANSI A112.18.6 Flexible Water Connectors

5. ASME/ANSI B1.20.1 NPT National Pipe Thread Taper

6. ASME/ANSI B16.22 Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings Project Owner PLUMBING PIPING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 22 10 00 2

7. ASTM B135 Seamless Brass Tube

8. ASTM D1785 Poly(Vinyl-Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80 and 120

9. ASTM D3311 Drain, Waste, and Vent (DWV) Plastic Fittings Patterns

10. California Energy Code (CEnC)

11. California Fire Code (CFC)

12. California Green Building Standards Code (CALGreen Code)

13. California Plumbing Code (CPC)

1.6 Submittals
A. Furnish the following submittals.

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION
Product Data Submit for each type of drainage piping or fitting per Product Data requirements
Installation Instructions Submit per Installation Instruction requirements.

O & M Instructions Submit per Operation and Maintenance Instruction requirements.

Certificate of Compliance Submit certified report of testing of factory-applied linings Warranty Furnish one-year warranty from date of final acceptance for plumbing fixtures.

B. Refer to Section 01 33 00 / 02 05 00 for definition of requirements for Product Data, Installation Instructions, and O&M instructions.

1.7 Delivery, Storage, and Handling
A. Refer to Sections 01 65 00 / 01 66 00 for delivery, storage, and handling requirements.

B. Strictly follow Manufacturer’s instructions and warranty requirements for delivery, storage, and handling of plumbing piping and appurtenances

1.8 Unit Prices
A. Payment for Work in this section shall be included as part of lump-sum or unit-price bid amount for which such Work is appurtenant.

B. Refer to Section 01 22 00 for measurement and payment clauses for plumbing piping.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Acceptable Manufacturers
A. Acceptable Manufacturers include:

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION
Flashing –
Pipes
Elmdor/Stoneman Stormtite City of Industry, CA (800) 591-9181 Semco, LLC / FlaktGroup Columbia MO (888) 473-6264
Accepted Equal
Project Owner PLUMBING PIPING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 22 10 00 3

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION
Flashing –
Vents
Elmdor/Stoneman Stormtite 1000
series
City of Industry, CA (800) 591-9181
Approved Equal
Polyethylene
Encasement
Northtown Company Huntington Beach, CA (714) 897-
0700
Trumbull Industries, Inc. Youngstown, OH (800) 677-1799 Orange, CA (714) 505-7079
Accepted Equal
Polyethylene
Pipe Wrap
Joint Tape
3 M Construction Markets Division
(Scotchwrap No 50)
St Paul, MN
Tyco Adhesives (Polyken 900) Westminster, MA (978) 731-2500 Accepted Equal
Tape Wrap –
Cold Applied
Northtown Company Huntington Beach, CA
Protecto-Wrap Company (200) Denver, CO (800) 759-9727
Tapecoat / Chase (CT) Westwood, MA (781) 332-0700
Accepted Equal
Tape Wrap –
Hot-Applied
Protecto-Wrap Company (110) Denver, CO (800) 759-9727
Tapecoat / Chase (20) Westwood, MA (781) 332-0700
Accepted Equal

2.2 Materials
A. Refer to Section 01 61 00 / 02 05 00 for basic requirements for products and materials.

B. Identify piping systems per ANSI A13.1.

C. Conform to requirements of Chapter 7 of California Plumbing Code, “Sanitary Drainage.” D. Conform to requirements of Chapter 9 of California Plumbing Code, “Vents.” E. Conform to requirements of Chapter 10 of California Plumbing Code, “Traps and Interceptors.” F. Conform to insulation requirements of Section 123 of California Energy Code “Requirements for Pipe Insulation.”
G. Plumbing supply fittings shall conform to ASME/ANSI A112.18.1.

H. Plumbing waste fittings shall conform to ASME/ANSI A112.18.2.

I. Materials for exterior and buried plumbing shall be:

Project Owner PLUMBING PIPING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 22 10 00 4

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
DWV Pipe
Outside
Building
Envelope or
Buried
PVC Pipe Pipe, Joints, and
Fittings
Refer to Section 33 30 31
Conform to ASTM D3034
Backfill Imported sand to 12” over top of pipe
CoExtruded
PVC Pipe
Pipe, Joints, and
Fittings
Refer to Section 33 30 31
Conform to ASTM D2680
Wall Thickness Schedule 80
Backfill Imported sand to 12” over top of pipe
Condensate
Drain Pipe
Copper
Tubing
Pipe, Joints, and
Fittings
Refer to Section 33 11 21
Conform to ASTM B88 and ANSI
B16.22
Coating Conform to AWWA C209 35 mil coldapplied coal-tar tape Backfill Imported sand to 12” over top of pipe
Insulation
Refrigerant
Piping
Outside
Building
Envelope
Insulation Cellular Foam
Insulation
Insulation
Thickness
Refer to California Energy Code Table
123-A
Protection Aluminum
Galvanized Sheet
Metal
Painted Canvas UV-Resistant
Refer to Section 09 90 00
Plastic Cover UV-Resistant
Water Retardant
Coating
UV-Resistant
Refer to Section 09 90 0000
Vapor
Retardant
Required outside insulation unless
insulation is inherently vapor-retardant
J. Materials for interior plumbing shall be:

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
DWV Pipe Inside
Building Envelope
PVC Pipe Pipe and Fittings Refer to Section 33 30 31
Conform to ASTM D2729
sewer
Conform to ASTM D2665 DWV
Wall Thickness Schedule 80
Project Owner PLUMBING PIPING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 22 10 00 5

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
Joints Solvent weld joints
CoExtruded
PVC Pipe
Pipe and Fittings Refer to Section 33 30 31
Conform to ASTM D2680
Wall Thickness Schedule 80
Joints Solvent weld joints
Escutcheons for
Pipes Passing
through Unfinished
Floors, Walls,
Partitions & Ceilings
Cast Brass One piece solid design to fit pipe on one end and cover sleeve projecting through floor or wall on
Painted other end.

Cast Iron
Escutcheons for
Pipes Passing
through Finished
Interior Walls,
Partitions & Ceilings
Cast Brass
Chromium
Plated
K. For small diameter pipe 4” and under, size shown shall be pipe inside diameter.

L. The following product design criteria, options and accessories are required on flashing:

ITEM DESCRIPTION
Flashing on
Pipe other
than Vents
Flashing Assembly Vandalproof
Counterflashing 4-lb sheet lead sealed with nonhardening mastic and secured to pipe with stainless steel draw-band
clamp
Flashing on
Vents
Flashing Assembly 4-lb seamless lead type
Extend up to vent for full height and turn down into
pipe to form waterproof seal.

Boot Steel reinforced conical boot with hooded cast-iron counterflashing
Hood Minimum 2 to 1 free area to vent pipe size
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Preparation
A. Make field measurements needed to install plumbing before submitting shop drawings or ordering. Make minor changes in dimensions and alignments as needed to avoid utilities or structural conflicts.

B. Verify adjacent construction is ready to receive rough-in work of this section.

C. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside piping before assembly. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.

Project Owner PLUMBING PIPING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 22 10 00 6
D. Coordinate cutting or forming of roof or floor construction to receive drains to required invert elevations.

E. Use wall flanges and seep rings as shown and as required to prevent moisture migration through wall slab and floor penetrations.

F. Inspect pipe before installation. Repair or patch damaged areas on interior or exterior coatings with material matching original lining and coating.

G. Pipe requiring taping shall have tape applied in 2”, 3”, or 4” tape wrap applied spirally with minimum overlap of 50% of tape width.

3.2 Installation
A. Refer to Sections 01 73 24, and 01 73 33 / 02 05 00 for execution and installation requirements.

B. Refer to Section 31 23 00 / 31 23 33 for open trench requirements.

C. Furnish and install plumbing work at locations shown on Plans and Submittals.

D. The following installation standards shall be followed:

1. Applicable OSHA and Cal OSHA regulations

2. California Plumbing Code Chapter 7 “Sanitary Drainage.”

3. California Plumbing Code Chapter 9 “Vents.”

4. California Plumbing Code Chapter 10 “Traps and Interceptors.”

5. Other applicable building, fire and plumbing code requirements

6. Manufacturer’s installation and warranty requirements E. Refer variances between above documents and Contract Documents to Owner’s Representative.

F. Use pipe hangers and supports as detailed on Plans, as specified, and as required by applicable plumbing codes.

G. Obtain and review dimensioned shop drawings from equipment and fixture suppliers before roughing in for any equipment.

H. Lay out plumbing system in careful coordination with Drawings, determining proper elevations for components of system. Coordinate locations and setting heights with related trades before floors and walls are constructed. Follow general layout shown in drawings except where other work may interfere. Lay out pipes to fall within partition, wall or roof cavities and to not require furring other than as shown on Drawings.

I. Stub rough-in piping 3” from finish building surfaces. Temporarily plug and cap piping until fixtures and equipment are ready to be installed.

J. Install piping to conserve building space and not to interfere with use of space. Use minimum number of bends to produce satisfactory functioning system.

K. Install pipe without springing, forcing or stressing pipe.

L. Bends in copper pipe and metallic tubing shall be made with suitable bending tool. Replace pipe flattened during bending process with new pipe.

M. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints or connected equipment.

N. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings.

O. Install escutcheons on exposed pipes wherever they penetrate floors, ceilings, walls or partitions. (Penetrations inside cabinets or closets shall be considered exposed.) Project Owner PLUMBING PIPING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 22 10 00 7
P. Install plumbing fixtures and equipment to tolerances recommended by Manufacturer. Unless otherwise shown or required for drainage, install plumbing and fixtures true and level using precision gauges and levels.

Q. Drainage piping shall be installed as follows:

1. Make changes in direction using 45 degree wyes, long or short sweep ¼ bends, 1/6 bends, 1/8 bends, 1/16 bends or by a combination of these or equivalent fittings. Use single or double sanitary tees and ¼ bends only where direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical.

Do not use straight tee branches as drainage fittings.

2. Maintain minimum separation of 3’ between drains and parallel bearing walls.

3. Slope horizontal piping and arrange to drain at low points. If no slope is shown, slope at rate of ¼” per foot.

4. Install drainage and sewer cleanouts where shown, at bends, angles, upper terminals, and not more than 50’ apart in any linear run of piping. Bring floor cleanouts to grade.

5. Close openings for connections with screw plugs until used. Close handholes at once.

Remove any earth or foreign matter that may get into sewer.

R. Vents shall be installed as follows:

1. Extend vents 12” above roof lines. Provide regular connections to receive flashing made for this purpose.

2. Where vents penetrate finished roof, install vents before roof is installed.

S. Painting and Coating shall comply with Division 9 and the following.

1. Coat exposed ferrous piping materials taking special care including taping to avoid accidentally coating CISP rubber sleeve or gasket joints.

3.3 Field Quality Control
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled plumbers trained and experienced in necessary trades and crafts and completely familiar with specified requirements and methods for proper performance of Work of this section.

B. Do not pressure test sections of concrete encased piping until concrete has cured at least 10 days.

C. Presoak nonmetallic pipe materials for 48 hours before pressure testing to allow materials to absorb water.

D. Allowable leakage if not otherwise shown shall be computed as Allowable Leakage (gallons per hour) = NDP1/2/7400
where:

N = number of gasketed joints being tested
D = pipe diameter in inches
P = test pressure in psi
E. Field testing shall include:

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER TEST

STANDARD) FREQUENCY
FIRST
TEST

PAID FOR
BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
Trench
Backfill
Backfill
Compaction
ASTM D1557 As directed Owner Contractor
Project Owner PLUMBING PIPING
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 22 10 00 8

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER TEST

STANDARD) FREQUENCY
FIRST
TEST

PAID FOR
BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
Drainage
Piping
Inside
Buildings
Leakage CPC §612 Add air or water
and maintain at 5 psi for at
least 15 minutes. (Do not
air-test plastic pipe) Joints
shall show no visible leaks.

Pressure shall remain
unchanged for 15 minutes
without adding air or water
All interior
drainage pipe
Contractor Contractor
Drainage
Piping
Outside
Buildings
Leakage CPC §23 Add air or water
and maintain at 5 psi for 15
minutes. (Do not air-test
plastic pipe) Joints shall
show no visible leaks.

Pressure shall remain
unchanged for 15 minutes
without adding air or water
All buried
drainage pipe
Contractor Contractor
Plumbing Installation &
Leakage
Air or water test and visual
inspection of finished
installation
1 inspection Contractor Contractor
Field
Performance
Demonstrate compliance of
fixtures and equipment to
Contract Documents and
Manufacturer’s printed
literature
1 test Contractor Contractor
11-month
Warranty
Inspection
Demonstrate Work conforms
to Contract Documents and
Manufacturer’s printed
literature
1 inspection Owner Contractor

END OF SECTION
Project Owner CLEANOUTS, FLOOR DRAINS, ROOF DRAINS, AND TRAPS New River Improvement Project – Calexico 22 42 40 - 1
SECTION 22 42 40

CLEANOUTS, FLOOR DRAINS AND ROOF DRAINS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Work Included
A. Materials, testing, and installation of cleanouts, floor drains, roof drains, vent caps, and traps.

1.3 System Description
A. Furnish and install complete operating drain fixture units including appurtenant structural, mechanical and/or electrical mountings, valves or connections required for compliance with Manufacturer’s installation requirements and compliance with applicable building codes and standards.

1.4 References
A. ASME/ANSI A112.6.3 Floor and Trench Drains
B. ASME/ANSI A112.6.4 Roof, Deck, and Balcony Drains
C. ASME/ANSI A112.18.1 Plumbing Fixture Fittings
D. ASME/A112 A112.36 Cleanouts
E. ASTM D3311 Drain, Waste and Vent (DWV) Plastic Fitting Patterns F. California Plumbing Code (CPC)
G. NEMA/ANSI 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment
H. NFPA 70 National Electric Code
I. UL 969 Marking and Labeling Systems

1.5 Submittals
A. Furnish the following submittals.

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION
Product Data Submit per Product Data requirements.

Installation Instructions Submit per Installation Instruction requirements.

O & M Instructions Submit per Operation and Maintenance Instruction requirements Warranty Furnish 1 -year warranty from date of final acceptance B. Refer to Section 01 33 00 / 02 05 00 for definition of requirements for Product Data, Installation Instructions, and O&M instructions.

Project Owner CLEANOUTS, FLOOR DRAINS, ROOF DRAINS, AND TRAPS New River Improvement Project – Calexico 22 42 40 - 2
C. For exposed drain fixtures, pre-submit two complete sets of Product Data packages for full coordinating line of fixtures proposed for installation to allow Owner to select Owner’s preferred option from at least two competing options. Unless otherwise accepted by Owner, options submitted shall have matching trim and finish.

1.6 Delivery, Storage, and Handling
A. Refer to Sections 01 65 00 / 01 66 00 for delivery, storage, and handling requirements.

B. Strictly follow Manufacturer’s instructions and warranty requirements for delivery, storage, and handling of cleanouts, floor drains, roof drains, and traps.

C. Protect equipment from damage until final acceptance. Wrap exposed pipes and fittings to prevent damage or scratching.

1.7 Unit Prices
A. Payment for Work in this section shall be included as part of lump-sum or unit-price bid amount for which such Work is appurtenant.

B. Refer to Section 01 22 00 for measurement and payment clauses for cleanouts, floor drains, roof drains, and traps.

1.8 Warranty
A. Provide 1-year warranty from date of final acceptance against defects including any cracking or crazing of finish. Replace defective fixtures with new fixture from same Manufacturer at no additional cost to owner for one year following Owner’s formal acceptance.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Acceptable Manufacturers
A. Acceptable Manufacturers for floor drain products include:

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION
Fixed Air Gaps Jay.R. Smith / Morris (3950 Series) Montgomery AL (334) 277-8520 Wade / McWane (W-2490 Series) Tyler TX (903) 882-5511
Accepted equal
Floor Cleanouts Jay.R. Smith / Morris (Figure 4100) Montgomery AL (334) 277-8520 Josam Co. (56070 Series) Michigan City, IN (301) 605-1400 Wade / McWane (W-6000 Series) Tyler TX (903) 882-5511
Zurn Industries (Z1400 “Leveltrol”) Erie, PA (855) 663-9876 Accepted Equal
Floor Drains 8”
Circular Cast Iron
with Trap and
Floor Cleanout
Jay.R. Smith / Morris (Figure 2510) Montgomery AL (334) 277-8520 Wade / McWane (W-1370 Series) Tyler TX (903) 882-5511
Zurn Industries Erie, PA (855) 663-9876
Accepted Equal
Project Owner CLEANOUTS, FLOOR DRAINS, ROOF DRAINS, AND TRAPS New River Improvement Project – Calexico 22 42 40 - 3

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION
Funnels – Drip
and Condensate
Jay.R. Smith / Morris (Series 3800
with integral p-trap)
Montgomery AL (334) 277-8520
Jay.R. Smith / Morris (Series 3900
no integral p-trap)
Montgomery AL (334) 277-8520
Accepted Equal
B. Acceptable Manufacturers for roof drain products include:

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION
Roof Drains 8”
Dome
Jay.R. Smith / Morris (Figure 1330) Montgomery AL (334) 277-8520 Josam Co. (21500 Series) Michigan City, IN (301) 605-1400 Wade / McWane (W-3000 Series) Tyler TX (903) 882-5511
Zurn Industries Erie, PA (855) 663-9876
Accepted Equal
Vent Caps Jay.R. Smith / Morris (Figure 1748) Montgomery AL (334) 277-8520 Accepted Equal
Downspout
Nozzle
Jay.R. Smith / Morris (Figure 1770) Montgomery AL (334) 277-8520 Accepted Equal

2.2 Materials
A. Refer to Section 01 61 00 / 02 05 00 for basic requirements for products and materials.

B. Conform to requirements of Chapter 4 of California Plumbing Code, “Plumbing Fixtures and Fixture Fittings.”
C. Materials for floor drains and cleanouts shall be:

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
Floor Drains Body Cast Iron
Floor Cleanouts Body Cast Iron
Top Scoriated nickel bronze
Downspout Nozzle Body Cast Bronze
Project Owner CLEANOUTS, FLOOR DRAINS, ROOF DRAINS, AND TRAPS New River Improvement Project – Calexico 22 42 40 - 4
D. Materials for roof drains and cleanouts shall be:

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
Roof Drain Body and Dome Cast Iron
E. The following product design criteria, options and accessories are required for floor drains and cleanouts:

ITEM DESCRIPTION
Floor Cleanouts Standard ASME/ANSI A112.36.2
Floor Drain (in
Concrete Slab
on Grade)
Applicable Code Conform to CPC §411
Standard Conform to ASME/ANSI A112.6.3
Grating Medium duty tractor grate per ANSI A112.21
Inlet 8” circular inlet
Outlet Inside caulk 4” outlet
Integral Backwater
Valve
Not required
P-Traps Location Deep seal P-trap required on all floor drains Running P-traps required with double hub
vent required on drain
F. The following product design criteria, options and accessories are required for roof drains:

ITEM DESCRIPTION
Roof
Drain
Applicable Code Conform to CPC §1105
Standard Conform to ASME/ANSI A112.6.4
Grating Cast iron dome
Inlet 8” domed inlet
Outlet No hub outlet
Accessories Provide sump receiver, under-deck clamp and extension G. The following electrical design criteria are required for equipment specified in this section:

ITEM DESCRIPTION
Electrical Work NEC Article 505
Classification
Class I Division 1 (wet well)
Project Owner CLEANOUTS, FLOOR DRAINS, ROOF DRAINS, AND TRAPS New River Improvement Project – Calexico 22 42 40 - 5

ITEM DESCRIPTION
Enclosures – Indoor
Damp Locations
NEMA 250 Enclosure Rating NEMA 12 – Industrial Use
Enclosures – Class I
Division 1 Wet Well
Locations
NEMA 250 Enclosure Rating NEMA 7 – Explosion Proof,
Rated for Class I Locations
All Enclosures Construction Lockable
With powdercoat epoxy finish
on steel surfaces
IEC 60529 Enclosure Rating
for Underground Equipment
IP68 Submergence rated for
72-hours at 20’ of head
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Preparation
A. Make field measurements needed to install plumbing fixtures before submitting shop drawings or ordering. Make minor changes in dimensions and alignments as needed to avoid utilities or structural conflicts.

B. Verify adjacent construction is ready to receive rough-in work of this section.

C. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside piping before D. Coordinate cutting or forming of roof or floor construction to receive drains to required invert elevations.

3.2 Installation
A. Refer to Section 02 05 00 for basic execution and installation requirements.

B. Furnish and install plumbing fixtures at locations shown on Plans and Submittals.

C. The following installation standards shall be followed:

1. Applicable OSHA and Cal OSHA regulations

2. California Plumbing Code Chapter 4 “Plumbing Fixtures and Fixture Fittings”

3. Other applicable building, fire, plumbing, and electrical code requirements

4. Manufacturer’s installation and warranty requirements D. Refer variances between above documents and Contract Documents to Owner’s Representative.

E. Lay out plumbing system in careful coordination with Drawings, determining proper elevations for all components of system. Follow general layout shown in drawings in all cases except where other work may interfere. Lay out pipes to fall within partition, wall or roof cavities and to not require furring other than as shown on Drawings.

F. Set fixtures level and true. Shim fixture to proper level if necessary to secure perfect fit at floor.

Caulk fixtures at floor, deck or roof.

G. Install drain fixtures complete with all waste and vent connections.

H. Install piping to conserve building space and not to interfere with use of space. Use minimum number of bends to produce satisfactory functioning system.

Project Owner CLEANOUTS, FLOOR DRAINS, ROOF DRAINS, AND TRAPS New River Improvement Project – Calexico 22 42 40 - 6
I. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints or connected equipment.

J. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to trap primer valves and fittings.

K. Slope water piping and arrange to drain at low points.

L. Provide loose key stop, finished to match fixture trim, on each supply location.

B. Field testing shall include:

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER TEST

STANDARD) FREQUENCY
FIRST

TEST PAID
FOR BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
Plumbing
Fixtures
Installation &
Leakage
Air test and visual
inspection of finished
installation
1 inspection Contractor Contractor
Field
Performance
Demonstrate compliance
of fixtures and equipment
to Contract Documents
and Manufacturer’s printed
literature
1 test Contractor Contractor
11-month
Warranty
Inspection
Demonstrate Work
conforms to Contract
Documents and
Manufacturer’s printed
literature
1 inspection Owner Contractor

3.4 Adjusting and Cleaning
A. Upon completion, remove trade labels and clean fixtures.

B. Clean fixtures a second time immediately before turning them over to Owner.

END OF SECTION
Project Owner VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 23 05 48 - 1
SECTION 23 05 48

VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Work Included
A. Materials, testing, and installation of HVAC equipment vibration isolators, isolating sleeves and sound barriers.

1.3 System Description
A. Furnish and install complete operating HVAC equipment vibration isolation system including appurtenant structural, mechanical and/or electrical mountings or connections required for compliance with Manufacturer’s installation requirements and compliance with applicable building codes and standards.

1.5 References
A. Reference publications below form part of this specification to extent referenced and are referred to within text by basic designation only.

1. NFPA 90A Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems

2. SMACNA Seismic Restraint Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Systems

1.6 Submittals
A. Furnish the following submittals.

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION
HVAC Unit Isolator
Schedule
Submit schedule prepared by HVAC equipment Manufacturer’s representative showing HVAC equipment and corresponding vibration isolation to be used.

Shop Drawings Submit per equipment Shop Drawing requirements.

Project Owner VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 23 05 48 - 2

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION
Product Data Submit for each type of isolator, isolating sleeve or sound barrier per Product Data requirements. Include spring diameters, deflections, compressed spring heights, solid spring heights and scale drawings.

Installation
Instructions
Submit per Installation Instruction requirements.

O & M Instructions Submit per Operation and Maintenance Instruction requirements Warranty Furnish one-year warranty from date of final acceptance B. Refer to Section 01 33 00 for definition of requirements for Shop Drawings, Product Data, Installation Instructions, and O&M instructions.

1.7 Delivery, Storage and Handling
A. Refer to Sections 01 65 00 and 01 66 00 for delivery, storage, and handling requirements.

B. Strictly follow Manufacturer’s instructions and warranty requirements for delivery, storage and handling of HVAC equipment vibration isolators.

1.8 Unit Prices
A. Payment for Work in this section shall be included as part of lump-sum or unit-price bid amount for which such Work is appurtenant.

B. Refer to Section 01 22 00 for measurement and payment clauses for vibration and seismic controls for HVAC.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Acceptable Manufacturers
A. All isolators shall be furnished by one Manufacturer.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers include:

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION
HVAC
Equipment
Vibration
Isolation
Systems
ConnFab Uncasville, CT (860) 848-9266
Kinetic Noise Control Norwalk, CA (877) 457-2695
Mason Industries, Inc. Anaheim, CA (714) 535-2727
Vibration Eliminator Company, Inc. Copiague, NY (631) 841-4000 Accepted Equal

2.2 Materials
A. Refer to Section 01 61 00 for basic requirements for products and materials.

Project Owner VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 23 05 48 - 3
B. The following product design criteria, options and accessories are required:

ITEM DESCRIPTION
Hanger
Isolators
Steel spring and neoprene element in series.

Spring diameters and hanger box lower hole sizes shall be large enough to permit hanger rod to swing through 30degree arc before touching hole and short circuiting spring.

Neoprene isolator deflection 0.3” minimum
Spring static deflecti8on 1” minimum.

Spring additional travel to solid height ½” minimum
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Preparation
A. Make field measurements needed to install HVAC equipment vibration isolation systems before submitting shop drawings or ordering. Make minor changes in dimensions and alignments as needed to avoid utilities or structural conflicts.

3.2 Installation
A. Refer to Sections 01 73 00 and 01 73 24 for basic execution and installation requirements.

B. Furnish and install HVAC equipment vibration isolation systems at locations shown on Plans and Submittals.

C. The following installation standards shall be followed:

1. Applicable OSHA and Cal OSHA regulations

2. Applicable building, fire, plumbing, mechanical and electrical code requirements

3. NFPA 90A Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems

4. Manufacturer’s installation and warranty requirements

5. SMACNA Seismic Restraint Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Systems D. Refer variances between above documents and Contract Documents to Owner’s Representative.

E. Install HVAC equipment vibration isolation systems to tolerances recommended by Manufacturer. Unless otherwise shown, install HVAC equipment vibration isolators true and level using precision gauges and levels.

Project Owner VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 23 05 48 - 4

3.3 Field Quality Control
A. Field testing shall include:

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER

TEST STANDARD) FREQUENCY
FIRST
TEST

PAID FOR
BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
Vibration
Isolators
Free Travel Verify isolators
have free travel
along full range of
compression.
1 each
isolator
Contractor Contractor
Installation Visual inspection of
finished installation
1 inspection Owner Owner
Field
Performance
Demonstrate
compliance to
Contract
Documents and
Manufacturer’s
printed literature
1 test Contractor Contractor
11-month
Warranty
Inspection
Demonstrate
compliance to
Contract
Documents and
Manufacturer’s
printed literature
1 test Owner Contractor
B. Provide services of factory authorized representative on-site to provide:

1. Installation assistance, inspection and startup of the complete HVAC equipment vibration isolation system.

2. Field testing and adjustment.

END OF SECTION
Project Owner TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC New River Improvement Project – Calexico 23 05 93 - 1
SECTION 23 05 93

TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Work Included
A. Testing, adjusting and balancing (TAB) of air conditioning and ventilating systems to produce design objectives specified.

1.3 System Description
A. Testing, adjusting and balancing shall consist of regulating fluid flow rate and air patterns at terminal equipment including adjustment of dampers or fan speeds in order to best achieve design objectives.

1.4 Quality Assurance
A. Engage a TAB firm certified by AABC.

B. Certify TAB field data reports. Review field data reports to verify accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB reports. Certify that the TAB team complied with the approved TAB plan and the procedures specified herein.

C. Prepare TAB reports on standard forms of AABC.

D. Instrumentation type, quantity and accuracy shall be as described in AABC’s “National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Systems.” E. Calibrate instruments at least every six months or more frequently if required by instrument manufacturer.

F. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen trained and experienced in necessary trades and crafts and completely familiar with specified requirements and methods for proper performance of Work of this section.

1.5 References
A. Reference publications below form part of this specification to extent referenced and are referred to within text by basic designation only.

1. AABC National Standards for Field Measurement and Instrumentation, Total System Balance

2. AABC National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Systems.

3. NEBB Testing, Balancing and Adjusting of Environmental Systems

1.6 Submittals
A. Furnish the following submittals.

Project Owner TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC New River Improvement Project – Calexico 23 05 93 - 2

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION
Qualification
Data
Within 45 days from Notice to Proceed, submit evidence Testing, Adjusting and Balancing contractor is AABC certified.

Instrument
Calibration
Data
On Owner’s request, submit current record of instrument calibration indicating date of calibration and name of party performing instrument calibration.

Certified TAB
Reports
Submit 2 copies of reports prepared as specified herein on AABC approved forms certified by TAB firm. This report is described below in more detail.

B. Final report shall be computer printed in letter quality font on standard bond paper. Furnish report in 3-ring binder, tabbed and divided into sections by tested and balanced systems.

Pages shall be numbered. Use standard AABC or NEBB test forms where applicable. Report shall include the following:

1. First sheet shall be Title Page, with signed and sealed certification by certified testing and balancing engineer. Title page shall also show name and address of TAB firm, project name and location, report date, and names and addresses of Owner and Contractor.

2. Include Table of Contents with page numbers for each report section.

3. Include list of instruments used during TAB along with proof of calibration.

4. Include summary of contents including indicated versus final performance, notable characteristics of systems and description of operation sequence.

5. Include nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment. Sheets shall include name of device, Manufacturer’s name, date of calibration and correction factors.

6. Include data for terminal units, including Manufacturer, type and size of fittings.

7. Include fan curves.

8. Include test settings for controllers.

9. Include motor data including:
a. Make and frame type and size.
b. Horsepower and rpm
c. Volts, phase and Hertz
d. Full load amperage and service factor
e. Sheave make, size in inches and bore
f. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in inches.

10. Include notes explaining why certain final data in body of reports varies from indicated values.

11. Include Manufacturers’ test data.

12. Include test conditions for fan and pump performance forms including fan drive settings, percentage of maximum pitch diameter and other system operating conditions affecting performance.

13. Include certified field test report data on approved AABC forms. Test data shall show indicated and actual values for the following:
a. Total airflow in cfm.

Project Owner TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC New River Improvement Project – Calexico 23 05 93 - 3
b. Total system pressure in inches wg.
c. Fan rpm.
d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg.

14. Other information relative to equipment performance but not including shop drawings or product data.

1.7 Project Conditions
A. Owner may occupy completed areas of construction before Substantial Completion.

Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize interference with Owner’s operations.

1.8 Unit Prices
A. Payment for Work in this section shall be included as part of lump-sum or unit-price bid amount for which such Work is appurtenant.

B. Refer to Section 01 22 00 for measurement and payment clauses for testing, adjusting, and balancing for HVAC.

1.9 Warranty
A. National Project Performance Guarantee: Provide guarantee on AABC’s “National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Systems” forms stating AABC will assist in completing requirements of the Contract Documents if TAB firm fails to comply with Contract Documents. Guarantee includes the following provisions:

1. Certified TAB firm has tested and balanced systems according to Contract Documents.

2. Systems are balanced to optimum performance capabilities within design and installation limits.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Acceptable Testing Adjusting and Balancing Firms
A. Acceptable Manufacturers include:

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION
TAB
Consultant
Air Balance Company, Inc. (ABCO) Covina, CA (626) 339-4700 American Air Balance Company, Inc. Anaheim, CA (714) 693-3700 Associated Air Balance Azusa, CA (626) 915-8117
Empire Air Balance Company, Inc. Huntington Beach, CA (714) 465- 2718
Equal Air Balance Company San Dimas, CA (714) 637-3050
Inland Air Balance, Inc. San Dimas, CA (909) 305-4881
Los Angeles Air Balance Company,
Inc.

Upland, CA (909) 931-1114
Precision Air Balance Company, Inc. Anaheim, CA (714) 630-3796 Project Owner TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC New River Improvement Project – Calexico 23 05 93 - 4

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION
San Diego Air Balance Company,
Inc. (SDABCO)
Escondido, CA (760) 741-5401
Accepted equal
B. TAB consultant shall be certified by AABC.

2.2 Materials
A. Test holes shall be manufacturer’s standard product constructed of cast aluminum with gasketed screw cap and base.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Preparation
A. Examine Contract Documents and Project Record Documents to become familiar with project requirements and to discover conditions in systems designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.

B. Prior to beginning testing and adjusting, contact equipment manufacturers and obtain and review any data required for TAB including adjusting, balancing or operating instructions.

C. Notify Owner’s Representative at least three working days prior to performing tests and final adjustments. At that time, clarify with Owner’s Representative any questions regarding expected system performance.

D. Comply with applicable OSHA and Cal OSHA Regulations.

E. Furnish required test instruments including:

1. Velometer with probes and pitot tube.

2. Rotating vane aneometer, 4-inch size.

3. ASHRAE standard pitot tubes, stainless steel, 5/16” outside diameter, 18 inches and 36 inches long.

4. Differential air pressure gages, 0-0.5 inch wg, 0-1 inch wg, and 0-5 inches wg, each arranged as portable unit for use with standard pitot tube.

5. Combination inclined-vertical portable manometer, range 0-5 inches wg.

6. Portable hook gage, range 0-12 inches wg.

7. Portable flexible u-tube manometer, magnetic mounting clips, range 0-18 inches wg.

F. Install test holes at inlet and outlet of air handling unit fans, exhaust fans, utility fans and elsewhere as required to facilitate traverses and to test air systems.

G. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from indicated values.

3.2 Adjusting and Cleaning
A. Perform TAB procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in the AABC’s “National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Systems” and this section.

B. Take and record testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound units.

C. Make pitot tube traverse of main supply, exhaust and return ducts.

Project Owner TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC New River Improvement Project – Calexico 23 05 93 - 5
D. Test and adjust supply, return, exhaust and relief fan rpm’s to design requirements within limits of mechanical equipment provided. Change v-belt drive assemblies as needed to balance system to design airflows.

E. Set fan airflow rates to within minus 5% to plus 10%.

F. Balance airflows in duct mains to design cfm.

G. Do not use register shutters or dampers for balancing. Leave them wide open while balancing system. Adjust flow patterns from terminal units as shown on drawings.

3.3 Field Quality Control
A. Field testing shall include:

ITEM
TEST
FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER TEST

STANDARD) FREQUENCY
FIRST

TEST PAID
FOR BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
Fans Operation AABC Standards and see
below
Each fan Contractor Contractor
Temperature
Controllers
Operation AABC Standards and see
below
Each
controller
Contractor Contractor
B. Prepare test reports for fans. Obtain manufacturer’s recommended testing procedures.

Measure, adjust and record airflow of each fan including fans in package HVAC units.

C. Verify temperature controllers are calibrated and commissioned. Check transmitter and controller locations and note conditions that would adversely affect control functions. Record controller settings and note variances between set points and actual measurements.

END OF SECTION
Project Owner TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC New River Improvement Project – Calexico 23 05 93 - 6

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Project Owner HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 23 31 00 - 1
SECTION 23 31 00

HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Work Included
A. Materials, testing, and installation of HVAC duct and casing systems.

1.2 Related Work
A. Section 01 22 00: Unit Prices
B. Section 01 33 00: Submittal Procedures
C. Section 01 40 00: Quality Requirements
D. Section 01 66 00: Product Storage and Handling Requirements E. Section 01 73 24: Seismic Restraint
F. Section 01 73 33: Mechanical Identification
G. Section 23 05 95: Testing, Adjusting and Balancing
H. Section 23 33 00: Air Duct Accessories
I. Section 23 34 00: HVAC Fans
J. Section 23 36 00: Air Inlets and Outlets
K. Section 23 81 16: Room Air Conditioning
L. Section 33 05 38: Hangers and Supports

1.3 System Description
A. Furnish and install complete operating air distribution system including appurtenant structural, mechanical and/or electrical mountings or connections required for compliance with Manufacturer’s installation requirements and compliance with applicable building codes and standards.

B. Seal joints to limit system leakage to less than 1% of specified equipment airflows.

1.5 References
A. Reference publications below form part of this specification to extent referenced and are referred to within text by basic designation only.

1. ANSI H35.2 Dimensional Tolerances for Aluminum Mill Products

2. ASTM A525 Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by Hot-Dip Process

3. ASTM A653 Sheet Steel

4. ASTM B209 Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate

5. ASTM B211 Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Bar, Rod and Wire

6. ASTM B308 Aluminum – Alloy 6061TS Standard Structural Shapes

7. ASTM C335 Steady-State Heat Transfer Properties of Pipe Insulation

8. ASTM C731 Extrudability, After Package Aging, of Latex Sealants Project Owner HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 23 31 00 - 2

9. ASTM C732 Aging Effects of Artificial Weathering on Latex Sealants

10. ASTM C1071 Fibrous Glass Duct Lining Insulation (Thermal and Sound Absorbing Material)

11. ASTM D1784 Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) PVC Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) CPVC) Compounds

12. ASTM D2202 Slump of Sealants

13. ASTM E84 Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

14. ASTM E96 Water Vapor Transmission of Materials

15. California Energy Code (CEnC)

16. California Mechanical Code (CMC)

17. California Title 24 Building Efficiency Standards

18. NFPA 90A Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems

19. NFPA 90B Warm Air Heating and Air-Conditioning Systems

20. NFPA 255 Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

21. SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards (Metal and Flexible)

22. SMACNA HVAC Duct Systems Inspection Guide

23. SMACNA Seismic Restraint Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Systems

24. SMACNA Thermoplastic Duct (PVC) Construction Manual

25. Uniform Mechanical Code Standard 6.2 “Standard for Metal Ducts” (CMC Appendix A)

26. Uniform Mechanical Code Standard 6.5 “Installation of Factory-Made Air Ducts” (CMC Appendix A)

27. UL 181 Factory-Made Air Ducts and Air Connectors

28. UL 181A Closure Systems for Use with Rigid Air Ducts

29. UL 181B Safety Closure Systems for Use with Flexible Air Ducts and Air Connectors

30. UL 723 Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

1.6 Submittals
A. Furnish the following submittals.

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION
Shop
Drawings
Fabrication/installation/layout drawings required per ductwork Shop Drawing requirements.

Submit for electrically powered equipment under electrically powered equipment shop drawing requirements.

Product
Data
Submit per Product Data requirements for flexible connection material, sealer, duct material, duct sleeves supports, hangers and factoryfabricated devices.

Installation
Instructions
Submit per Installation Instruction requirements.

Project Owner HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 23 31 00 - 3

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION
O & M
Instructions
Submit per Operation and Maintenance Instruction requirements.

Test Record
Transcripts
Submit for factory tests per Test Record Transcript requirements.

Include factory tests of flame-spread ratings and smoke development index of exterior duct insulation tested per NFPA 255
Warranty Furnish one-year warranty from date of final acceptance B. Refer to Section 01 33 00 for definition of requirements for Shop Drawings, Product Data, Installation Instructions, O&M Instructions, and Test Record Transcripts.

1.7 Delivery, Storage, and Handling
A. Refer to Sections 01 65 00 and 01 66 00 for delivery, storage, and handling requirements.

B. Deliver motorized equipment as factory-assembled unit to the extent allowable by shipping limitations, with protective crating and covering.

C. Disassemble and reassemble units as required for moving to final location according to Manufacturer’s written instructions.

D. Lift and support units with Manufacturer’s designated lifting or supporting points.

E. Strictly follow Manufacturer’s and SMACNA’s instructions and warranty requirements for delivery, storage, and handling of ducts and air distribution equipment.

1.8 Unit Prices
A. Payment for Work in this section shall be included as part of lump-sum or unit-price bid amount for which such Work is appurtenant.

B. Refer to Section 01 22 00 for measurement and payment clauses for HVAC ducts and casings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Acceptable Manufacturers
A. Acceptable Manufacturers include:

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION
Duct
Sealant
Childers Div. Specialty Construction
Brands, Inc.

Aurora, IL (800) 231-9541
Design Polymerics Santa Ana, CA (800) 641-0808
3M Company Type EC800 sealer and
type EC1184 filler
Saint Paul, MN (651) 737-6501
Accepted equal
Duct
Expansion
Joints
Flexicraft Industries Chicago, IL (800) 533-1024
Proco Products, Inc. Series 500 Stockton, CA (800) 344-3246 Accepted equal
Project Owner HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 23 31 00 - 4

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION
Flexible
Duct Clevaflex Div. Federal-Mogul Southfield, MI (248) 354-7700 Duct
Expansion
Joints
Duro Dyne Corporation Fontana, CA (800) 899-3963
Hart Cooley, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI (800) 433-
6341
Thermaflex Abbeville, SC (800) 459-4822
Flexible
Connectio
n Fabric
Manifold
Duct
FRP Duct
PVC Duct
(6”-24”)
Harrington Industrial Plastics, Inc. Chino, CA (909) 597-8641 Accepted equal
Semco, LLC / FlaktGroup “Custom-Air” Columbia MO (888) 473-6264 Accepted equal
FRP Duct
PVC Duct
(6”-24”)
PVC Duct
(6”-24”)
Spiral Duct
Clevaflex Div. Federal-Mogul Southfield, MI (248) 354-7700 Thermaflex Abbeville, SC (800) 459-4822
Accepted equal
Manifold
Duct
Spin-in
Fittings
Spin-in
Fittings
Semco, LLC / FlaktGroup “Custom-Air” Columbia MO (888) 473-6264 Accepted equal
PVC Duct
(6”-24”)
Spiral Duct
Spin-in
Fittings
B. Electrical components, devices and accessories shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by testing agency acceptable to local building code authorities.

Electrical components, devices and accessories shall be marked for the use intended.

C. Air movement and control products shall comply with performance requirements and shall be labeled with and licensed to use the AMCA Certified Ratings Seal.

Project Owner HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 23 31 00 - 5

2.2 Materials
A. Refer to Section 01 61 00 for basic requirements for products and materials.

B. Conform to California Energy Code Title 24 Building Efficiency Standards.

C. Materials for ductwork shall be:

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
Rectangular
Ductwork
Aluminum Conform to ASTM B209 and B211 alloy 3003-
H14 and ANSI H35.2
Minimum wall thicknesses for low pressure ducts

0.020” wall for longest side dimension 0-12”

0.025” wall for longest side dimension 13-30”

0.032” wall for longest side dimension 31-54”

0.040” wall for longest side dimension 55-84”

0.050” wall for longest side dimension 85-144”
Galvanized Carbon
Steel Sheet Metal
Conform to ASTM A653 of lock-forming quality
with G60 coating.

Fabricate and install in accordance with
applicable ASHRAE and SMACNA standards.

Minimum wall thicknesses for low pressure ducts
26ga wall for longest side dimension 0-12”
24ga wall for longest side dimension 13-30”
22ga wall for longest side dimension 31-54”
20ga wall for longest side dimension 55-84”
18ga wall for longest side dimension 85-144”
Round
Ductwork
Aluminum Conform to ASTM B209 and B211 alloy 3003-
H14 and ANSI H35.2
Galvanized Carbon
Steel Sheet Metal
Conform to ASTM A653 of lock-forming quality
with G60 coating.

Fabricate and install in accordance with
applicable ASHRAE and SMACNA standards.

Minimum wall thicknesses for low pressure ducts
26ga wall for diameter 0-13”
24ga wall for diameter 14-22”
22ga wall for diameter 23-36”
20ga wall for diameter 37-50”
18ga wall for diameter 51-60”
16ga wall for diameter 61-84”
Project Owner HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 23 31 00 - 6

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
Metal
Round
Ductwork
Duct Sealer Specifically formulated for sealing field joints for high-pressure systems.

Compatible with plastic-backed duct tape so two
cure and bond together.

Flanged joint seals Neoprene rubber gaskets
Ductwork
Tie Rods
Galvanized Steel Minimum diameter ⅜”
Manually
Operated
Dampers
Galvanized Sheet
Metal
2 gages heavier than ducts. Equip with locking
quadrants.

D. Materials for factory-fabricated ductwork shall be:

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
Factory-Fabricated Ductwork Including
Collars, Connections, and Splices
Rigid Fiberglass Labeled as complying
with UL 181
Pressure-Sensitive Tape, HeatActivated Tape and Mastic used with Factory-Fabricated Ductwork
Conform to UL 181
and UL 181A
Duct Sleeves Same material as
penetrating ductwork
Duct Expansion Joints EPDM
E. Materials for flexible ductwork shall be:

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
Flexible
Duct
Assembly specifications Required at connections to motor-driven air handling equipment.

Shall be standard factory-fabricated
manufactured product.

UL Listing Labeled as complying with UL 181 Class 1
Flame Spread Rating 25 maximum (including connecting tape) Smoke Rating 50 maximum(including connecting tape)
Inner Wall Noncombustible
Vinyl or coated fiberglass cloth permanently
bonded to spring helix
Project Owner HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 23 31 00 - 7

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
Zinc Coated Spring
Steel Helix
Gage per SMACNA requirements
Fiberglass Insulation 1” thick, sheathed in seamless vapor barrier jacket.

Outer wall Vinyl or fiberglass-reinforced metalized vapor barrier
Coating Fiber resistive interior coating to prevent fiber erosion
Not less than 24 ounces per square yard
PressureSensitive
Tape used
with
Flexible
Ductwork
Conform to UL 181 and UL 181B
Drawbands Stainless Steel Worm-drive hose clamps
Nylon Duct Ties UV-Resistant
F. The following product design criteria, options and accessories are required for ducts:

ITEM DESCRIPTION
Ducts Static Pressure Class Minimum -½ in wg
Maximum ½ in wg
Maximum Operating
Velocity
Low Velocity (LV) <2000 fpm
Pressure Drop Unless otherwise shown, size for maximum
pressure drop of 0.1” wg per 100 feet.

Tapers Uniformly tapering section
Not more than 1” change in direction over 5” of
duct run
Mitered Bends Provide double-wall turning vanes at 90°
mitered bends.

Radius Bends Inside radius equal to duct width or diameter or greater
Provide turning vanes if this is not possible
Project Owner HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 23 31 00 - 8

ITEM DESCRIPTION
Offsets Where space permits, provide full-radius turns
at offsets
Duct
Sleeves
Location Required at penetrations of concrete or masonry walls or ceilings
Sleeve Flanges Not less than 4” wide.

Install tight against each side of barrier
Sleeves shall be 2” larger than duct or external
duct insulation
Pack space between duct or insulation with
fiberglass or material of original wall
Fasten duct flanges not less than 4” wide to duct
sleeves. Install tight against wall on each side.

Duct
Expansion
Joints
Location Where shown or where required between fans
and ducts
Movement Capabilities ½” lateral offset, ¾” axial compression ¼” axial extension
Joints and
Reinforcing
(Metallic
Ductwork)
Construction After joints are crimped, further secure them by bottom punching or riveting.

Spacing As needed to maintain duct cross-section
integrity at pressure class specified and at
prevailing operating velocities
Longitudinal Joints on
Rectangular Metal
Ductwork
Punchlock or Pittsburgh Lock longitudinal joints
Longitudinal Joints on
Round Metal Ductwork
Interlocking joint
Intake or Exhaust Side
Rectangular Ducts
Cross broken inward
Discharge or Supply
Side Rectangular
Ducts
Cross broken outward
Joints on LowPressure Rectangular
Ductwork (2-in wg
maximum pressure
and <2000 fpm)
Slip joints
Use S slip joints on top and bottom of ducts
Use drive slip joints on sides of ducts.

Joints shall not interfere with air flow
Project Owner HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 23 31 00 - 9

ITEM DESCRIPTION
Joints on LowPressure Round
Ductwork (2 in wg
maximum pressure
and <2000 fpm)
Crimp end to reduce diameter and slide into
open end of adjoining duct.

Joints shall not interfere with air flow
Interior Ductwork Brace and stiffen at wall and roof penetrations as well as over unsupported length to maintain
duct integrity and limit vibration and noise in
accordance with recognized industry standards.

Ducts over 18” in any
dimension
Cross broken or beaded on all four sides
Spacing between rods or rods on side of duct
shall not exceed 48”
Branch
Connections
Round Branch to
Round Main
Construct collar and taper transition piece on
branch duct outlet
Rectangular Branch to
Rectangular Main
Construct adjustable extractor or damper at
branch connection.

Turning
Vanes
Ducts up to 18” 2” blades
Double-thickness vanes
Finished with air-dried phenolic corrosionresistant coating before installation Ducts over 18” in any
dimension
4½” blades
Double-thickness vanes
Finished with air-dried phenolic corrosionresistant coating before installation G. The following product design criteria, options and accessories are required for duct hangers and supports:

ITEM DESCRIPTION
Hangers
and
Supports
Spacing on Steel
Ductwork
In accordance with SMACNA standards for specified
pressure class and conditions
Space supports to prevent visible deflection greater
than (span between supports)/240
Spacing on
Aluminum Ductwork
Construct with strength and dimensional stability
comparable to conventional steel duct.

Aluminum sheet and reinforcing shall have moment of
inertia three times greater than that recommended for
steel ductwork.

Project Owner HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 23 31 00 - 10

ITEM DESCRIPTION
Seismic Restraints Conform to SMACNA Guidelines for Seismic Restraints of Mechanical Systems
Supports for
Rectangular
Ductwork
Use shelf trapeze hanger or Unistrut with welded or
bolted rods or angles
Provide sway bracing, minimum of one at right angle
to each duct run.

Supports for Round
Ductwork
Support with 2 half round bands with rods bolted to
bands.

Provide sway bracing, minimum of one at right angle
to each duct run.

H. The following product design criteria, options and accessories are required for flexible connections:

ITEM DESCRIPTION
Flexible
Connections
Flame Spread Rating 25 maximum per ASTM E84
Smoke Development Rating 50 maximum per ASTM E84
Working Temperature Range Shall not be affected by temperatures between extremes of -10°F and 200°F
I. The following product design criteria, options and accessories are required for flexible ducts:

ITEM DESCRIPTION
Flexible
Duct
Thermal Transmission at 75°F
differential

0.25BTUH/sf maximum per ASTM C335
Vapor Transmission through vapor
barrier

0.10 perm maximum per ASTM E96
Pressure Rating 4.0 in wg positive pressure

1.0 in wg negative pressure
Working Air Velocity 2000 fpm minimum
Flame Spread Rating 25 maximum per ASTM E84
Smoke Development Rating 50 maximum per ASTM E84
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Preparation
A. Duct layout shown on plans is diagrammatic in nature. Coordinate ductwork routing and layout and adjust routing and layout as needed to eliminate physical interferences. Where deviation is required from ductwork routing shown on plans, such alterations shall not compromise airflow, pressure drop and sound characteristics of duct fitting or run shown except where this Project Owner HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 23 31 00 - 11
is brought to the attention of the Owner’s Representative in advance of construction and accepted in writing by Owner’s Representative based on field conditions and consultation with engineer of record.

B. Make field measurements needed to install ductwork and air distribution accessories and equipment before submitting shop drawings or ordering. Make minor changes in dimensions and alignments as needed to avoid utilities or structural conflicts.

C. Coordinate size and location of structural steel support members.

D. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

E. Provide flashing including base flashing and counter flashing where items of this section penetrate the roof, outer walls or waterproofing of any kind.

3.2 Installation
A. Refer to Section 01 73 00 for basic execution and installation requirements.

B. Install ductwork and air distribution accessories and equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are shown.

C. Install equipment to facilitate service, maintenance and repair or replacement of components.

Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations.

D. The following installation standards shall be followed:

1. Applicable OSHA and Cal OSHA regulations

2. California Mechanical Code (CMC) Chapter 5 “Exhaust Systems”

3. California Mechanical Code (CMC) Chapter 6 “Duct Systems”

4. Other applicable building, fire, mechanical and electrical code requirements

5. Manufacturer’s installation and warranty requirements

6. SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards (Metal and Flexible)

7. SMACNA Seismic Restraint Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Systems

8. SMACNA Thermoplastic Duct (PVC) Construction Manual

9. Uniform Mechanical Code Standard 6.2 “Standard for Metal Ducts” (CMC Appendix A)

10. Uniform Mechanical Code Standard 6.5 “Installation of Factory-Made Air Ducts” (CMC Appendix A)
E. Refer variances between the above documents and Contract Documents to Owner’s Representative.

F. Install ductwork and air distribution accessories and equipment to tolerances recommended by Manufacturer. Unless otherwise shown, install ductwork and air distribution equipment true and level using precision gauges and levels.

G. Fabricate and install ductwork in accordance with applicable ASHRAE and SMACNA requirements. Follow SMACNA’s “HVAC Duct Construction Standards – Metal and Flexible” meeting requirements for metal thickness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie rod applications and joint types and intervals.

H. Do not use snap-lock seams
I. Seal duct and joints according to SMACNA’s “HVAC Duct Construction Standards – Metal and Flexible” Table 1-2 for duct pressure class indicated.

Project Owner HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 23 31 00 - 12

1. For pressure classes lower than or equal to 2 in wg., seal transverse joints (SMACNA Seal Class C).

J. Do not seal joints and seams of duct systems and their components with cloth-backed rubberadhesive duct tapes unless such tape is used in combination with mastic and drawbands.

K. Tighten drawbands as recommended by Manufacturer with adjustable tensioning tool.

L. Install aerosol sealants closures according to Manufacturer specifications to meet requirements of UL 723.

M. Cut fit and place miscellaneous mechanical supports accurately in location, alignment and elevation to support and anchor ductwork and equipment.

N. Provide seismic restraint on ductwork as required by CBC.

O. Finished ductwork shall be free from buckling, warping, breathing and vibration. Ductwork installation shall permit installation of other required services without penetrating, crimping or reducing duct sizes.

P. Finished ductwork shall be airtight. Seal flanged joints with closed-cell neoprene gaskets compressed between mating flanges. Seal other seams with liquid or mastic-type sealants.

Taped joints shall not be permitted. Joints shall comply with SMACNA Seal Class A Q. Paint inside of ducts visible through grilles and registers flat black.

3.3 Field Quality Control
A. Field testing shall include:

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER TEST

STANDARD) FREQUENCY
FIRST
TEST

PAID FOR
BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
Ductwork Proper
Installation
SMACNA HVAC Duct
Systems Inspection Guide
and Checklists
All installed
ductwork
Contractor Contractor
Duct Deflection
(except flexible
ducts)
No visible deflection
greater than (span
between supports)/240
All installed
ductwork
Contractor Contractor
Leakage (Duct
Sealing)
Maximum leakage of 1
percent of specified
equipment airflows
All installed
ductwork
Contractor Contractor
Adjustment and
Balancing
Assure proper balance and
operation per Section 23
05 95.

Adjust damper linkages for
proper operation
All installed
ductwork
Contractor Contractor
Project Owner HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 23 31 00 - 13

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER TEST

STANDARD) FREQUENCY
FIRST
TEST

PAID FOR
BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
Installation &
Leakage
Visual inspection of
finished installation.
1 inspection Owner Owner
Demonstrate compliance
to Contract Documents
and Manufacturer’s printed
literature

Field
Performance
Demonstrate compliance
to Contract Documents
and Manufacturer’s printed
literature
1 test Contractor Contractor
11-month
Warranty
Inspection
1 test Owner Contractor

END OF SECTION

Project Owner HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 23 31 00 - 14

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Project Owner AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 23 33 00 - 1
SECTION 23 33 00

AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Work Included
A. Materials, testing, and installation of ductwork accessories including volume dampers, fire dampers, adjustable deflectors, duct access doors, and backdraft dampers.

1.2 Related Work
A. Section 01 22 00: Unit Prices
B. Section 01 33 00: Submittal Procedures
C. Section 01 40 00: Quality Requirements
D. Section 01 66 00: Product Storage and Handling Requirements E. Section 23 05 95: Testing, Adjusting and Balancing
F. Section 23 31 00: HVAC Ducts and Casings
G. Section 23 34 00: HVAC Fans
H. Section 33 05 38: Hangers and Supports

1.3 System Description
A. Furnish and install complete operating ductwork accessory including appurtenant structural, mechanical and/or electrical mountings or connections required for compliance with Manufacturer’s installation requirements and compliance with applicable building codes and standards.

1.5 References
A. Reference publications below form part of this specification to extent referenced and are referred to within text by basic designation only.

1. ASTM C335 Steady-State Heat Transfer Properties of Pipe Insulation

2. ASTM E84 Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

3. California Energy Code (CEnC)

4. California Green Building Standards Code (CALGreen Code)

5. California Mechanical Code (CMC)

6. SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards (Metal and Flexible)

7. UL 181 Factory-Made Air Ducts and Air Connectors

8. UL 181A Closure Systems for Use with Rigid Air Ducts

9. UL 181B Safety Closure Systems for Use with Flexible Air Ducts and Air Connectors

1.6 Submittals
A. Furnish the following submittals.

Project Owner AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 23 33 00 - 2

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION
Shop Drawings Submit per ductwork Shop Drawing requirements.

Product Data Submit per Product Data requirements.

Installation
Instructions
Submit per Installation Instruction requirements.

O & M Instructions Submit per Operation and Maintenance Instruction requirements
Warranty Furnish one-year warranty from date of final acceptance B. Refer to Section 01 33 00 for definition of requirements for Shop Drawings, Product Data, Installation Instructions, and O&M Instructions.

1.7 Delivery, Storage and Handling
A. Refer to Sections 01 65 00 and 01 66 00 for delivery, storage, and handling requirements.

B. Strictly follow Manufacturer’s instructions and warranty requirements for delivery, storage and handling of ductwork accessories.

1.8 Unit Prices
A. Payment for Work in this section shall be included as part of lump-sum or unit-price bid amount for which such Work is appurtenant.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Acceptable Manufacturers
A. Acceptable Manufacturers include:

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION
Access
Doors
Refer to plans
Adjustable
Deflectors
Barber Colman / Eurotherm / Schneider
Electric
Andover, MA (888) 778-2733
Titus Plano, TX (972) 212-4800
Accepted equal
Backdraft
Dampers
Air Balance, Inc. Wyalusing, PA (570) 746-1888
Louvers and Dampers / Mestek Wyalusing, PA (570) 746-1888 Ruskin Manufacturing Company Grandview, MO (816) 761-7476 Accepted equal
Project Owner AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 23 33 00 - 3

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION
Balancing
Dampers
Greenheck Fan Corporation Schofield, WI (715) 359-6171
Pacific Duct, Inc. Montclair, CA (909) 635-1335
Ruskin Manufacturing Company Grandview, MO (816) 761-7476 Accepted equal
Duct
Insulation
CertainTeed / Saint Gobain Tough Gard Malvern, PA (800) 233-8990 GAF Building Materials Corporation Wayne, NJ (973) 628-3000 Johns-Manville Denver, CO (303) 978-2000
Accepted equal
FRP
Dampers
Belco Manufacturing Co., Inc. Belton, TX (254) 933-9000 Accepted equal
Fire
Dampers
Dayton Electric Manufacturing Co. Niles, IL (847) 647-0124 Greenheck Fan Corporation Schofield, WI (715) 359-6171
Ruskin Manufacturing Company Grandview, MO (816) 761-7476 Accepted equal listed and accepted by
California State Fire Marshall
Register
Damper
Barber Colman / Eurotherm / Schneider
Electric
Andover, MA (888) 778-2733
Titus Plano, TX (972) 212-4800
Accepted equal
Smoke
Dampers
Dayton Electric Manufacturing Co. Niles, IL (847) 647-0124 Greenheck Fan Corporation Schofield, WI (715) 359-6171
Ruskin Manufacturing Company Grandview, MO (816) 761-7476 Accepted equal listed and accepted by
California State Fire Marshall
Volume
Damper
Adjusting
Quadrants
Parker and Young
Ventfabrics Chicago, IL (773) 775-4477
Young Regulator Company Walton Hills, OH (440) 232-9700 Accepted equal
Project Owner AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 23 33 00 - 4

2.2 Materials
A. Refer to Section 01 61 00 for basic requirements for products and materials.

B. Materials for air duct accessories shall be:

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
Access Doors for
Ducts
Door. Same material as ductwork in which installed.

Gasket Seal Foam or vinyl
Insulation 1” thick 1½-lb fiberglass insulation with maximum K<0.30 at 75F
Backdraft Dampers Dampers Same material as ductwork in which installed Seals Polyurethane
Register Dampers Dampers Same material as ductwork in which installed Volume Dampers Dampers Same material as ductwork in which installed C. The following product design criteria, options and accessories are required for access doors for ducts:

ITEM DESCRIPTION
Access
Doors for
Ducts
Construction 24-gauge minimum
Continuous piano-hinged type
With airtight gasket
Shall not vibrate or cause noise under service
Size Duct size minus 1”
Operation Fully accessible from outside ducts and capable of being locked in position with vent lock hatch
Insulation Flame
Spread Rating
25 Maximum per ASTM E84
Insulation Smoke
Development Rating
50 Maximum per ASTM E84
D. The following product design criteria, options and accessories are required for adjustable deflectors:

ITEM DESCRIPTION
Adjustable
Deflectors and
Adjustable
Turning Vane
Devices
Blades Multi-blade assembly hinged at one end and constructed to narrow air passage between blades until no air
passage remains when assembly is fully closed
Operation Fully accessible from outside ducts and capable of being locked in position
Project Owner AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 23 33 00 - 5
E. The following product design criteria, options and accessories are required for backdraft dampers:

ITEM DESCRIPTION
Register
Dampers
Blades All-welded 14-gauge construction
Blades pivoting off center
Double-crimped front and rear
Fitted with seals
Link blades to work in unison, pivoting in ball bearings.

Counterweights Provide adjustable counterweights attached to blades F. The following product design criteria, options and accessories are required for register dampers:

ITEM DESCRIPTION
Register
Dampers
Type Opposed blade type
Factory assembled
Operation Side-operated worm drive accessible from outside ducts.

End of shaft shall be slotted to receive screwdriver.

G. The following product design criteria, options and accessories are required for volume dampers:

ITEM DESCRIPTION
Volume
Dampers
Location In each branch take-off leaving main duct in low-pressure (<2 in wg) systems
Maximum blade size 12” x 72”
Type Opposed blade type
Operation Slide-rod operated control, fully accessible from outside ducts and held in position by graduated quadrants which can be locked in any position.

H. The following product design criteria, options and accessories are required for duct insulation:

ITEM DESCRIPTION
Duct
Insulation
VentilationOnly Ducts
Minimum Duct
Insulation R-Value
(per CMC Table 6-6
or Title 24 Section
124)
No insulation required
Project Owner AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 23 33 00 - 6

ITEM DESCRIPTION
Duct
Insulation
Cooling-Only
Ducts
Minimum Duct
Insulation R-Value
(per CMC Table 6-6
or Title 24 §124)
R-8
Duct insulation shall include labels at 3-foot
maximum intervals showing thermal performance
R-value for duct insulation itself excluding air
films, vapor barriers or other duct components.

Duct
Insulation
Return-Air
Ducts
Minimum Duct
Insulation R-Value
(per CMC Table 6-6
or Title 24 §124)
R-8
Duct insulation shall include labels at 3-foot
maximum intervals showing thermal performance
R-value for duct insulation itself excluding air
films, vapor barriers or other duct components.

I. Duct insulation product R-values shall be based on insulation only, excluding air films, vapor barriers or other duct components, and tested C-values at 75°F mean temperature at installed thickness.

J. Installed thickness used to determine R-value shall be as follows:

1. For duct board, duct liner and factory-made rigid ducts not subjected to compression use nominal insulation thickness.

2. For factory-made flexible air ducts use difference between outside and inside diameters divided by 2.

K. Insulation exposed to weather shall be protected by aluminum, sheet metal, painted canvas or plastic cover.

L. Cellular foam insulation shall be protected by aluminum, sheet metal, painted canvas, plastic cover, or painted with a water retardant coating providing shielding from solar radiation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Preparation
A. Make field measurements needed to install ductwork accessories before submitting shop drawings or ordering. Make minor changes in dimensions and alignments as needed to avoid utilities or structural conflicts.

3.2 Installation
A. Refer to Section 01 73 00 for basic execution and installation requirements.

B. Furnish and install ductwork accessories at locations shown on Plans and Submittals.

C. The following installation standards shall be followed:

1. Applicable OSHA and Cal OSHA regulations

2. California Mechanical Code Chapter 6 “Duct Systems”

3. Applicable building, fire, mechanical and electrical code requirements

4. Manufacturer’s installation and warranty requirements

5. SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards (Metal and Flexible) D. Refer variances between above documents and Contract Documents to Owner’s Representative.

E. Install ductwork accessories to tolerances recommended by Manufacturer. Unless otherwise shown, install ductwork accessories true, plumb, and level using precision gauges and levels.

Project Owner AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 23 33 00 - 7
F. Access doors shall be installed as follows:

1. Install duct access doors where shown or where required by SMACNA.

2. Where access doors are for service of fire or smoke dampers, stencil the words “FIRE DAMPER” or “SMOKE DAMPER” in ½” high capital letters on door exterior.

3.3 Field Quality Control
A. Field testing shall include:

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER

TEST STANDARD) FREQUENCY
FIRST
TEST

PAID FOR
BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
Dampers Installation &
Leakage
Visual inspection
and operation
check of finished
installation
1 inspection Owner Owner
Field
Performance
Demonstrate
compliance to
Contract
Documents and
Manufacturers’
printed Literature
1 test Contractor Contractor
Operating
Range
Demonstrate
dampers operate
along their full
operating range
1 inspection Owner Owner
Backdraft
Dampers
Verify backdraft
dampers open
easily and close
tightly.
1 inspection Owner Owner
Ductwork
Insulation
California Energy
Code §124
1 inspection Contractor Contractor
11-month
Warranty
Inspection
Demonstrate
compliance to
Contract
Documents and
Manufacturer’s
printed literature
1 test Owner Contractor
B. Provide services of factory authorized representative on-site for minimum of one man-day (travel time excluded) to provide:

1. Installation assistance, inspection and startup of complete ductwork accessory system.

2. Field testing and adjustment.

END OF SECTION

Project Owner AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 23 33 00 - 8

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Project Owner HVAC FANS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 23 34 00 - 1
SECTION 23 34 00

HVAC FANS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Work Included
A. Materials, testing, and installation of fans, including motors, drives, guards, vibration isolation and coatings.

1.2 Related Work
A. Section 01 22 00: Unit Prices
B. Section 01 33 00: Submittal Procedures
C. Section 01 40 00: Quality Requirements
D. Section 01 65 00: Product Delivery Requirements
E. Section 01 66 00: Product Storage and Handling Requirements F. Section 01 73 24: Seismic Restraint
G. Section 09 90 00: Painting and Coating
H. Section 09 96 56: Epoxy Linings and Coatings
I. Section 23 05 48: Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC J. Section 23 05 95: Testing, Adjusting and Balancing
K. Section 23 31 00: HVAC Ducts and Casings

1.3 System Description
A. Furnish and install complete operating fans as shown on Plans including appurtenant structural, mechanical and/or electrical mountings or connections required for compliance with Manufacturer’s installation requirements and compliance with applicable building codes and standards.

B. Fan control system input control variables shall include:

ITEM VARIABLE DESCRIPTION
Input
signals
(Discrete)
High Temperature (ON) Switch Thermostat to turn fan ON
Light Switch Relay to turn fan ON with lights on.

Door or Hatch Position Limit Switch on door or hatch to turn fan ON
Low Temperature (OFF) Switch Thermostat to turn fan OFF Input
(Manual)
Operation mode (Selectors) Manual start
Emergency stop switch
Settings Temperature
(set in field)
Time delay 60 seconds
Project Owner HVAC FANS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 23 34 00 - 2
C. Fan control system output variables shall include:

ITEM VARIABLE DESCRIPTION
Output signals
(Discrete)
Run condition (Lamp or LED)
D. Ventilation normal start sequence shall trigger circuit to turn equipment on when any of the following conditions occur

1. Thermostat temperature exceeds preset maximum.

2. Access hatches or doors to ventilated spaces are open.

3. Provide manual override feature.

E. Ventilation normal shut down sequence shall shut down equipment when all of the following conditions occur:

1. Thermostat temperature drops below a preset minimum.

2. Access hatches or doors to ventilated spaces are closed.

3. Provide manual override feature.

B. Fans shall bear AMCA certified ratings seal for both air and sound performance.

C. Dynamically and statically balance fan wheels and propellers at factory per AMCA 204.

D. Factory testing shall include:

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER TEST

STANDARD) FREQUENCY
FIRST

TEST PAID
FOR BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
Fans Factory Test
Procedures
AMCA 300 Certified rating
for each fan
type
Contractor Contractor
Balance ASTM D4167 §8 1 test each fan Contractor Contractor Aerodynamic
Performance
Ratings (Flow
rate,
pressure,
power, air
density,
rotation
speed,
efficiency
AMCA 210 / ASHRAE 51 1 test each unit Contractor Contractor Sound Power
Level
AMCA 301 and AMCA
302
Certified rating
for each type of
fan
Contractor Contractor
Project Owner HVAC FANS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 23 34 00 - 3

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER TEST

STANDARD) FREQUENCY
FIRST

TEST PAID
FOR BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
Vibration Fan and shaft assembly
shall not pass through
critical speed as unit
comes up to rated rpm.
1 each fan Contractor Contractor
Fan
Motors
Amperage
Draw
Damper fan from freeflow to no-flow operation
and record amperage
draw at 6 points.
1 test each fan Contractor Contractor
Fan Operation Demonstrate compliance
to Contract Documents
and Manufacturer’s
printed literature
1 test each unit Contractor Contractor

1.5 References
A. Reference publications below form part of this specification to extent referenced and are referred to within text by basic designation only.

1. AMCA 99 Standard Handbook

2. AMCA 204 Balance Quality and Vibration Levels for Fans

3. AMCA 210 / ASHRAE 51 Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Certified Aerodynamic Performance Rating

4. AMCA 300 Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans

5. AMCA 301 Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data

6. AMCA 302 Application of Sone Ratings for Non-Ducted Air Moving Devices

7. ANSI ABMA 9 Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings

8. ASHRAE Guide to Average Noise Criteria Curves

9. California Electrical Code (CEC)

10. California Mechanical Code (CMC)

11. California Title 24 Building Efficiency Standards

12. NEMA/ANSI 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment

13. NFPA 70 National Electric Code

14. NFPA 90A Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems

15. SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards (Metal and Flexible)

16. SMACNA HVAC Duct Systems Inspection Guide

17. SMACNA Seismic Restraint Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Systems Project Owner HVAC FANS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 23 34 00 - 4

1.6 Submittals
A. Furnish the following submittals.

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION
Shop Drawings Submit for new ductwork under ductwork Shop Drawing requirements
Submit for fans under electrically powered equipment Shop Drawing requirements
Submit for mounting and vibration elimination for fans >2hp Product Data Submit per Product Data requirements.

Submit AMCA-approved fan curves, noise data, and test reports for each type and size of fan showing compliance
Installation
Instructions
Submit per Installation Instruction requirements, including spare parts list
O & M Instructions Submit per Operation and Maintenance Instruction requirements.

Certificate of
Compliance
Fans shall bear AMCA rating seal. Certify unit has been tested and rated in accordance with applicable AMCA test code and certified rating program
Test Record
Transcripts
Submit for factory tests per Test Record Transcript requirements.

Fans shall bear AMCA label
Motor Data Submit per motor data requirements of Section 26 05 10.

Warranty Furnish one-year warranty from date of final acceptance B. Refer to Section 01 33 00 for definition of requirements for Shop Drawings, Product Data, Installation Instructions, O&M instructions, Certificates of Compliance, and Test Record Transcripts.

1.7 Delivery, Storage, and Handling
A. Refer to Sections 01 65 00 and 01 66 00 for delivery, storage, and handling requirements.

B. Strictly follow Manufacturer’s instructions and warranty requirements for delivery, storage, and handling of ventilation equipment.

C. Deliver motorized equipment as factory assembled unit to extent allowable by shipping limitations, with protective crating and covering.

D. Disassemble and reassemble units as required for moving to final location according to Manufacturer’s written instructions.

E. Lift and support units with Manufacturer’s designated lifting or supporting points.

1.8 Unit Prices
A. Payment for Work in this section shall be included as part of lump-sum or unit-price bid amount for which such Work is appurtenant.

Project Owner HVAC FANS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 23 34 00 - 5
B. Refer to Section 01 22 00 for measurement and payment clauses for HVAC fans.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Acceptable Manufacturers
A. Acceptable Manufacturers include:

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION
Sidewall
Direct/BeltDriven Fans
Acme Engineering & Manufacturing
Corp. Model FW
Muskogee, OK (918) 682-7791
American Coolair Corp. / ILG Jacksonville, FL (904) 387-3449 Chicago Blower Corp. Glendale Heights, IL (630) 858-2600 Cincinnati Fan & Ventilator Co. Mason, OH (513) 573-0600 Cook, Loren Company Springfield, MO (417) 869-6474
Dayton Electric Manufacturing Co. Niles, IL (847) 647-0124 Greenheck Fan Corporation SDE Schofield, WI (715) 359-6171 B. Fans shall conform to AMCA 99
C. Fans furnished shall operate throughout their full submitted curve range driven by motors of horsepowers and full load amperages specified below and shown on Plans. Fans requiring larger motor than specified or shown are unacceptable in absence of written statement from Owner electrical infrastructure, drives and switchgear can support increased amperage.

D. Electrical components, devices and accessories shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70 §100, by testing agency acceptable to local building code authorities. Electrical components, devices and accessories shall be marked for use intended.

E. Air movement and control products shall conform to performance requirements and shall be labeled with and licensed to use AMCA Certified Ratings Seal.

2.2 Materials
A. Refer to Section 01 61 00 for basic requirements for products and materials.

B. Conform to California Energy Code Title 24 Building Efficiency Standards.

C. Environmental factors are as follows”

ITEM DESCRIPTION
Fans Installed Indoors Ambient Air Temperature 40°F to 110°F Relative Humidity 20%-80%
D. Materials for sidewall fans shall be:

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
Propeller
Fan
Aluminum Flanged edges
Integral orifice ring
Project Owner HVAC FANS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 23 34 00 - 6

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
Housing
and
Mounting
Collar
Galvanized Steel
Sheet
Flanged edges
Integral orifice ring
Apply baked enamel or epoxy finish coat after assembly.

Stainless Steel
Propeller
Fan Hub
Aluminum
Cast Iron
Stainless Steel
Propeller
Fan
Blades
Aluminum Formed blades riveted to heavy gage spider.

Steel Formed blades riveted to heavy gage spider
Apply baked enamel or epoxy finish coat after assembly.

Fasteners Stainless Steel SAE Type 304
Wire
Blade
Guard
Aluminum
Steel Apply baked enamel or epoxy finish coat after assembly.

E. The following product design criteria, options and accessories are required for sidewall fans:

ITEM DESCRIPTION
Fan
Assembly
Fan Type Exhaust
Drive Belt drive
Speed See Fan Schedule
Performance See Fan Schedule
Service factor 1.4 based on fan motor
Fan shaft Turned, ground & polished steel keyed to wheel hub Shaft bearings Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, selfaligning ball bearings Bearing Life ANSI/ABMA 9 L10 of 100,000 hours
Fan
Motors ½
HP and
larger
Motor Type Squirrel-cage induction, solid-shaft
Windings Copper
Efficiency Energy Efficient (RUE
Project Owner HVAC FANS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 23 34 00 - 7

ITEM DESCRIPTION
Duty S1 Continuous Duty
Temperature Rise NEMA MG1 Design B Rated for Operation at 40°C (104°F)
Safe Stall (Locked
Rotor) Time
Shall exceed maximum accelerating time under
worst-case voltage conditions.

Operating Elevation 3’
Insulation Class A (105°C) Size motor to limit temperature rise to Class B rise at unity service factor.

Overtemperature
Protection Motor
Windings (motors
<200hp)
Provide automatic reset normally closed thermal
overloads in each phase of motor windings per NEMA
MG-1
Motor Enclosure ODP Open Drip-Proof
Sizing Size for 110% of driven horsepower
Fan
Motors
smaller
than ½
HP
Motor Type Squirrel-cage induction, solid-shaft
Efficiency Standard Efficiency (RU or HU)
Duty S1 Continuous Duty
Temperature Rise NEMA MG1 Design B Rated for Operation at 40°C (104°F)
Safe Stall (Locked
Rotor) Time
Shall exceed maximum accelerating time under
worst-case voltage conditions.

Operating Elevation 3’
Insulation Class A (105°C) Size motor to limit temperature rise to Class B rise at unity service factor.

Motor Enclosure ODP Open Drip-Proof
Sizing Size for 110% of driven horsepower
F. The following electrical design criteria are required for equipment specified in this section:

ITEM DESCRIPTION
Electrical Work NEC Article 505
Classification
Nonhazardous
Project Owner HVAC FANS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 23 34 00 - 8

ITEM DESCRIPTION
Enclosures – Indoor
Dry Locations
NEMA 250 Enclosure
Rating
NEMA 12 – Industrial Use
Enclosures – Outdoor
or Wet Locations
NEMA 250 Enclosure
Rating
NEMA 4X – Watertight, CorrosionResistant, Stainless steel Power Supply Motor Circuits ½ HP and
larger
See Plans
Power Supply Motor Circuits smaller than
½ HP
See Plans
G. Provide each fan with local disconnect switch within 10’ of fan.

H. Sound power level ratings shall comply with AMCA 301. Factory test fans according to AMCA 300.

I. Fan housings, mounting angle and roof curb design shall minimize air leakage through joints and seals.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Preparation
A. Make field measurements needed to install ventilation equipment before submitting shop drawings or ordering. Make minor changes in dimensions and alignments as needed to avoid utilities or structural conflicts.

B. Coordinate size and location of structural steel support members.

C. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

D. Provide flashing including base flashing and counter flashing where items of this section penetrate roof, outer walls or waterproofing of any kind.

3.2 Installation
A. Refer to Sections 01 73 00 and 01 73 24 for basic execution and installation requirements.

B. Cover wall openings and penetrations prior to fan installation to prevent rain intrustion.

C. Install ventilation equipment and ductwork to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are shown.

D. Install equipment to facilitate service, maintenance and repair or replacement of components.

Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations.

E. The following installation standards shall be followed:

1. Applicable OSHA and Cal OSHA regulations

2. California Mechanical Code Chapter 5 “Exhaust Systems”

3. Other applicable fire, mechanical and electrical code requirements

4. Manufacturer’s installation and warranty requirements

5. NFPA 90A Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems F. Refer variances between Manufacturer’s installation instructions and Contract Documents to Owner’s Representative.

Project Owner HVAC FANS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 23 34 00 - 9
G. Install ventilation equipment to tolerances recommended by Manufacturer. Unless otherwise shown, install ventilation equipment true and level using precision gauges and levels.

H. Cut fit and place miscellaneous mechanical supports accurately in location, alignment and elevation to support and anchor HVAC materials and equipment.

I. Install fans and ventilators level and plumb with clearances for service and maintenance.

J. Provide seismic restraint as required by CBC.

K. Lubricate and balance fans per Manufacturer’s requirements.

L. Align motors, bases, shafts, pulleys and belts of motor driven equipment. Tension belts according to Manufacturer’s installation instructions.

M. After completing installation, internally clean fans according to Manufacturer’s instructions.

Remove foreign material and construction debris. Vacuum fan wheels and cabinets. Inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt and construction debris and repair damaged finishes.

N. Provide thermostats with fans where shown. Set thermostat to 80°F.

3.3 Field Quality Control
A. Field testing shall include:

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER TEST

STANDARD) FREQUENCY
FIRST
TEST

PAID FOR
BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
Fans Startup
Checks
Verify shipping blocking &
bracing are removed.

Verify proper balance of
registers and dampers.

Verify unit is securely mounted
and connections to ducts and
accessories are complete.

Verify thermal overload
protection is installed on
motors.

Verify thermostat set point and
fan operation at set point
Verify operation of fans when
activated by wall switch and
alarms.

Verify cleaning & adjusting are
complete
With fan drive disconnected,
verify proper motor rotation and
fan free wheel rotation and
bearing operation.

Reconnect fan drive system.

Align & adjust belts. Install belt
guards.

All fans Contractor Contractor
Project Owner HVAC FANS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 23 34 00 - 10

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER TEST

STANDARD) FREQUENCY
FIRST
TEST

PAID FOR
BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
Starting
Procedures
Energize motor & adjust fan to
indicated rpm.

Measure & record motor
voltage & amperage.

After energizing electrical
circuitry, start units to confirm
proper motor rotation and unit
operation.

Test and adjust controls and
safeties.

Shut unit down and reconnect
automatic temperature control
operators.

Adjust belt tension. Lubricate
bearings.

All fans Contractor Contractor
Installation Visual inspection of finished
installation
1 inspection Owner Owner
2-hour
Operational
Test
Provide 2-hour preliminary
operational test of fans
All fans Contractor Contractor
Balancing Comply with applicable
sections of Section 23 05 95.

Field
Performance
Demonstrate compliance to
Contract Documents and
Manufacturer’s printed
literature
1 test Contractor Contractor
Air volume at standard
temperature and pressure shall
be met or exceeded up to safe
limit of operating equipment
All fans Contractor Contractor
11-month
Warranty
Inspection
Demonstrate compliance to
Contract Documents and
Manufacturer’s printed
literature
1 test Owner Contractor
B. Provide services of factory-authorized representative on-site to provide:

1. Installation assistance, inspection and startup of complete ventilation system.

2. Field testing and adjustment.

3. Instruction of Owner’s personnel in operation and maintenance including starting and stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and equipment maintenance schedules.

Project Owner HVAC FANS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 23 34 00 - 11

3.4 Spare Parts
A. Furnish the following spare parts for belt-driven side wall fans:

QUANTITY PART
1 Set fan bearings
1 Set v-belts
1 Set shaft seals

END OF SECTION
Project Owner HVAC FANS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 23 34 00 - 12

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Project Owner AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 23 36 00 - 1
SECTION 23 36 00

AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Work Included
A. Materials, testing, and installation of HVAC air outlets and inlets.

1.3 System Description
A. Furnish and install complete operating air outlets and inlets including appurtenant structural, and/or mechanical mountings or connections required for compliance with Manufacturer’s installation requirements and compliance with applicable building codes and standards.

1.5 References
A. Reference publications below form part of this specification to extent referenced and are referred to within text by basic designation only.

1. AABC National Standards for Field Measurement and Instrumentation, Total System Balance

2. ADC 1062 Certification, Rating, and Test Manual

3. Air Diffusion Council Standards

4. ASHRAE 70 Rating Air Flow Performance of Outlets and Inlets

5. NEBB Testing, Balancing and Adjusting of Environmental Systems

6. NFPA 90A Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems Project Owner AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 23 36 00 - 2

1.6 Submittals
A. Furnish the following submittals.

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION
Shop Drawings Submit per ductwork Shop Drawing requirements.

Product Data Submit per Product Data requirements.

Installation
Instructions
Submit per Installation Instruction requirements.

O & M Instructions Submit per Operation and Maintenance Instruction requirements
Warranty Furnish one-year warranty from date of final acceptance B. Refer to Section 01 33 00 for definition of requirements for Shop Drawings, Product Data, Installation Instructions, and O&M instructions.

1.7 Delivery, Storage, and Handling
A. Refer to Sections 01 65 00 and 01 66 00 for delivery, storage, and handling requirements.

B. Strictly follow Manufacturer’s instructions and warranty requirements for delivery, storage, and handling of air outlets and inlets.

1.8 Unit Prices
A. Payment for the Work in this section shall be included as part of the lump-sum or unit-price bid amount for which such Work is appurtenant thereto.

B. Refer to Section 01 22 00 for measurement and payment clauses for air outlets and inlets.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Acceptable Manufacturers
A. Acceptable Manufacturers include:

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION
Return
Air Grilles
Lima Division Hart & Cooley, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI (800) 423-4270 Titus-HVAC 4-FL Plano, TX (972) 212-4800
Tuttle & Bailey Air System Components,
Inc.

Plano, TX (972) 212-4888
Accepted equal
Supply
Air
Registers
Lima Division Hart & Cooley, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI (800) 423-4270 Titus-HVAC 272-FL1 Plano, TX (972) 212-4800
Tuttle & Bailey Air System Components,
Inc.

Plano, TX (972) 212-4888
Accepted equal
Project Owner AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 23 36 00 - 3
B. Air outlets and inlets shall be tested, rated and certified by Air Diffusion Council and shall bear its seal.

2.2 Materials
A. Refer to Section 01 61 00 for basic requirements for products and materials.

B. Materials for air outlets and inlets shall be:

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
Supply Air Grilles Aluminum
Supply Air Registers Aluminum
Return Air Grilles Aluminum
A. The following product design criteria, options and accessories are required:

ITEM DESCRIPTION
Supply Air
Registers
Design Square or rectangular neck
Size See plans
Damper Opposed blade dampers.

Pattern
Controllers
Built-in
Provide 2-way deflection when installed , more than 3’ from any corner of 2 perpendicular walls
Provide 1-way deflection when installed within 3’ of corner of 2 perpendicular walls
Louvers Front blades parallel to long dimension
Rear blades at right angle to front blades
Face Louvered
¾” blade spacing
Frame Surface-mounted
Finish Off-white enamel
Return Air
Grilles
Design Square or rectangular neck
Size See plans
Louvers 30° louver deflection
One set of louvers parallel to long direction
Filter Required
Project Owner AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 23 36 00 - 4

ITEM DESCRIPTION
Face Louvered
½” blade spacing
Frame Surface-mounted
Finish Off-white enamel
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Preparation
A. Make field measurements needed to install air outlets and inlets before submitting shop drawings or ordering. Make minor changes in dimensions and alignments as needed to avoid utilities or structural conflicts.

3.2 Installation
A. Refer to Section 01 73 00 for basic execution and installation requirements.

B. Furnish and install air outlets and inlets at locations shown on Plans and Submittals.

C. The following installation standards shall be followed:

1. Applicable OSHA and Cal OSHA regulations

2. Applicable building, fire and mechanical code requirements

3. Manufacturer’s installation and warranty requirements

4. NFPA 90A Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems D. Refer variances between above documents and Contract Documents to Owner’s Representative.

E. Install air outlets and inlets to tolerances recommended by Manufacturer. Unless otherwise shown, install air outlets and inlets true, plumb, and level using precision gauges and levels.

F. Set frames to fully cover rough openings behind air outlets and inlets.

G. Provide screws or bolts for each mounting hole in frame and securely anchor frame to substrate behind frame.

3.3 Field Quality Control
A. Field testing shall include:

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER TEST

STANDARD) FREQUENCY
FIRST
TEST

PAID FOR
BY

RETESTS
PAID
FOR BY
Air
Outlets
and Inlets
Installation Visual inspection of finished
installation
1 inspection Owner Owner
Air inlet or outlet frame or
flange shall completely cover
openings in walls or ceilings.
1 inspection
each inlet or
outlet register
Owner Owner
Project Owner AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 23 36 00 - 5

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER TEST

STANDARD) FREQUENCY
FIRST
TEST

PAID FOR
BY

RETESTS
PAID
FOR BY
Mounting holes shall contain
bolt or screw secured to
substrate
1 inspection
each inlet or
outlet register
Owner Owner
Operation Verify dampers on registers
operate over full range
1 test each
register
Contractor Contractor
Field
Performance
Demonstrate compliance to
Contract Documents and
Manufacturers’ printed
Literature
1 test Contractor Contractor
Test and rate performance of
air outlets and inlets in
accordance with ADC 1062
and ASHRAE 70
1 test Contractor Contractor
11-month
Warranty
Inspection
Demonstrate compliance to
Contract Documents and
Manufacturer’s printed
literature
1 test Owner Contractor
B. Provide services of Manufacturer’s factory-authorized representative on-site to provide the following:

1. Installation assistance, inspection and startup of the complete air outlets and inlet system.

END OF SECTION
Project Owner AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 23 36 00 - 6

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Project Owner SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 23 81 26 - 1
SECTION 23 81 26

SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Work Included
A. Materials, testing, and installation of split-system heating, ventilation and air conditioning equipment.

B. The following HVAC units are specified herein:

ITEM TYPE LOCATION
AC1 Wall-Unit Air Conditioner Electrical Room
C. Air conditioning equipment specified herein shall be ENERGY STAR Rated, D. California Green Building Standards (CALGreen) Code §5.508 prohibits use of chlorofluorocarbons (CFD’s) and Halons as refrigerants.

1.3 System Description
A. Furnish and install complete operating ventilation and air conditioning including appurtenant structural, mechanical and/or electrical mountings or connections required for compliance with Manufacturer’s installation requirements and compliance with applicable building and mechanical codes and standards.

B. HVAC control system input control variables shall include:

ITEM VARIABLE DESCRIPTION
Input
signals
(Discrete)
High Temperature (ON) Switch Thermostat
Low Temperature (OFF) Switch Thermostat
Input
(Manual)
Operation mode (Selectors) Manual start
Emergency stop switch
Settings Temperature
(set in field)
Time delay 60
seconds
Project Owner SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 23 81 26 - 2
C. HVAC control system output variables shall include:

ITEM VARIABLE DESCRIPTION
Output
signals
(Discrete)
Run condition (Lamp or LED)
High temperature alarm
D. Air conditioning normal start sequence shall trigger timed circuit to turn equipment on when either of the following occur

1. Thermostat temperature exceeds preset maximum.

2. Manual override feature shall be provided.

E. Heating normal start sequence shall trigger timed circuit to turn equipment on when either of the following occur

1. Thermostat temperature drops below preset maximum.

2. Manual override feature shall be provided.

F. Air conditioning normal shut down sequence shall shut down equipment when all the following occur:

1. Thermostat temperature drops below preset minimum.

B. Installers shall have at least 5 years documented experience in installing HVAC equipment.

C. Factory testing shall include:

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER

TEST STANDARD) FREQUENCY
FIRST
TEST

PAID FOR
BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
Fans Factory Test
Procedures
AMCA 300 Certified rating for
each type of fan
Contractor Contractor
Sound
Power Level
AMCA 301 and
AMCA 302
Certified rating for
each type of fan
Contractor Contractor
Vibration Fan and shaft
assembly shall not
pass through critical
speed as unit comes
up to rated rpm.
1 each fan Contractor Contractor
Project Owner SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 23 81 26 - 3

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER

TEST STANDARD) FREQUENCY
FIRST
TEST

PAID FOR
BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
Aerodynamic
Performance
Ratings
(Flow rate,
pressure,
power, air
density,
rotation
speed,
efficiency
AMCA Bulletin 210 1 test each unit Contractor Contractor Fan
Motors
Amperage
Draw
Damper fan from
free-flow to no-flow
operation and record
amperage draw at 6
points.
1 test each fan Contractor Contractor
AirCooled
SplitSystem
HVAC
Systems
Operation 1 test each unit Contractor Contractor
ASHRAE 90
Certification
ASHRAE 90a Certify units have
been tested and rated
to exceed minimum
operating efficiencies
defined as Coefficient
of Performance (COP)
and Energy Efficiency
Ratio (EER) specified
herein and in
ASHRAE 90a Chapter
6 Contractor Contractor
D. Factory testing shall demonstrate and certify compliance with California Energy Code §112, including the following performance requirements:

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER TEST

STANDARD) FREQUENCY
FIRST

TEST PAID
FOR BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
Air-Cooled
SplitSystem
HVAC
Systems
Energy
Efficiency
Ratio
ARI 340/360 and California
Energy Code Section 112

12.5 minimum EER for
equipment <65,000 BTH
(5.4 tons)
All units Contractor Contractor
Field
Performance
Demonstrate compliance
to Contract Documents
and Manufacturer’s printed
literature
1 test Contractor Contractor
Project Owner SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 23 81 26 - 4
E. Where equipment is required to be ENERGY STAR rated, the stricter premium efficiencies required for ENERGY STAR rating shall govern over requirements above.

1.5 References
A. Reference publications below form part of this specification to extent referenced and are referred to within text by basic designation only.

1. AMCA 210 Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating

2. AMCA 300 Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans

3. AMCA 301 Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data

4. AMCA 302 Application of Sone Ratings for Non-Ducted Air Moving Devices

5. ARI Capacity Ratings for Air Handling Units, Coils, Chillers and Condensing Units

6. ARI 340/360 Commercial and Industrial Unitary Air-Conditioning and Heat Pump Equipment

7. ARI/ANSI 410 Forced-Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils

8. ARI/ANSI 430 Central Station Air Handling Units

9. ASHRAE 90a Energy Standards for Buildings except Low Rise Residential Buildings

10. ASTM A653 Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process

11. ASTM B88 Seamless Copper Water Tube

12. California Energy Code (CEnC)

13. California Green Building Standards Code (CALGreen Code)

14. California Mechanical Code (CMC)

15. NEMA/ANSI 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment

16. NFPA 70 National Electric Code (NEC)

17. NFPA 90A Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems

18. SMACNA Seismic Restraint Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Systems

1.6 Submittals
A. Furnish the following submittals.

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION
Shop Drawings Submit for electrically powered equipment under electrically powered equipment Shop Drawing requirements.

Include outline dimensions, bill of material, parts list, control schematics, and wiring diagrams.

Product Data Submit per Product Data requirements.

Include performance data
Installation
Instructions
Submit per Installation Instruction requirements.

O & M Instructions Submit per Operation and Maintenance Instruction requirements.

Project Owner SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 23 81 26 - 5

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION
Test Record
Transcripts
Submit for factory tests per Test Record Transcript
requirements.

Motor Data Submit per motor data requirements of Section 26 05 10.

Warranty Furnish one-year warranty from date of final acceptance.

Warranty shall identify factory-authorized repair technicians available to respond and arrive at job site within 4 hours.

B. Refer to Section 01 33 00 for definition of requirements for Shop Drawings, Product Data, Installation Instructions, O&M instructions, and Test Record Transcripts.

1.7 Delivery, Storage and Handling
A. Refer to Sections 01 65 00 and 01 66 00 for delivery, storage, and handling requirements.

B. Deliver motorized equipment as a factory assembled unit to extent allowable by shipping limitations, with protective crating and covering.

C. Disassemble and reassemble units as required for moving to final location according to Manufacturer’s written instructions.

D. Lift and support units with Manufacturer’s designated lifting or supporting points.

E. Strictly follow Manufacturer’s instructions and warranty requirements for delivery, storage and handling of heating, ventilation and air conditioning equipment.

1.8 Unit Prices
A. Payment for Work in this section shall be included as part of lump-sum or unit-price bid amount for which such Work is appurtenant.

B. Refer to Section 01 22 00 for measurement and payment clauses for split-system air conditioners.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Acceptable Manufacturers
A. Acceptable Manufacturers include:

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION
Air Filters American Air Filter Farr 30/30 Class 2 Plymouth, MN (877) 228-7007 Camfill Farr 30/30® Class 2 Riverdale, NJ (973) 616-7300 Tri-Dim Filter Corporation “Tridek” Louisa, VA (800) 458-9835 Accepted equal listed and accepted by
California State Fire Marshall as Class
2 or better
Refrigeration
(Compressor)
Unit
(Outdoor)
Amana Refrigeration, Inc. Amana, IA (319) 622-5511
Carrier Corp Farmington, CT (860) 674-3000
Goodman Manufacturing Co Houston, TX (713) 861-2500
Project Owner SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 23 81 26 - 6

ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER LOCATION
McQuay International Plymouth, MN (763) 553-5330
Mitsubishi Electric “Mr. Slim” PUYA30NHA4 Suwanee, GA (678) 376-2900 Sanyo Fisher Co Chatsworth, CA (818) 998-7322
Trane Company LaCrosse, WI (608) 787-2000
York International Corporation York, PA (717) 771-7890
Accepted equal
B. Manufacturers shall have at least 5 years documented experience in USA.

C. Equipment furnished shall operate through its full operating range powered by amperages specified or shown on Plans. Equipment requiring larger amperage than specified or shown is unacceptable absent written statement from Owner electrical infrastructure and switchgear can support the increased amperage.

D. Electrical components, devices and accessories shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by testing agency acceptable to local building code authorities.

Electrical components, devices and accessories shall be marked for use intended.

E. Air movement and control products shall comply with performance requirements and shall be labeled with and licensed to use AMCA Certified Ratings Seal.

2.2 Materials
A. Refer to Section 01 61 00 for basic requirements for products and materials.

B. Comply with California Energy Code Standards.

C. For air conditioning equipment list see Air Conditioner Schedule on plans.

D. For air conditioning design data, see Air Conditioning Design Data schedule on plans.

E. Enclosures and curbs shall be weatherproof.

F. Materials for enclosures and curbs shall be:

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
Frames and
Cabinets
Welded Steel 14 gauge minimum reinforced with steel angles and channels to form rigid assembly
Panels and Doors Galvanized Steel 14-gauge or 16-gauge
Air Filter Holding
Frame
Galvanized Steel With gaskets and spring sealing fasteners Roof Curb Galvanized Steel 14 gauge minimum
Full-length steel mounting rails
Project Owner SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 23 81 26 - 7

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
Insulation in
Cooling Section
and Compressor
Section
Coated Glass
Fiber
1”- thick 1-lb density
Nameplate Stainless Steel 16 gauge
Finish Phosphatized
and Finish
Painted
Refer to Section 09 90 00.

G. The following product design criteria, options and accessories are required for enclosures and curbs:

ITEM DESCRIPTION
Enclosures Access Doors Insulated hinged quick-opening access door in fan section.

Hinged access doors on units with internal motors shall be at least 16” wide for proper motor service.

Provide removable panel in unit casing to allow filter
replacement.

Drain Pan N/A
Insulation 1” 1½ -lb coated glass fiber insulation
Secure in place with high-adherence flame-resistant
adhesive.

Insulate fan section and coil section
Protective
Guards
Provide on condenser fan discharge and each
condenser coil inlet.

Ductwork
Connections
Provide for connections to supply and return ductwork
Equipment
Identification
Plates
Secure to each equipment component in visible location.

Plate shall bear ⅜”-high engraved black-enamel-filled
block lequipment identification number and letters shown herein.

Lifting Lugs Furnished suitably attached lifting lugs for assemblies and components weighing over 1oo lbs.

Painting and
Coating
Field paint finished casing and field welds except on
stainless steel
Project Owner SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 23 81 26 - 8
H. The following product design criteria, options and accessories are required for air filters:

ITEM DESCRIPTION
Air Filters Minimum Efficiency
Reporting Value (MERV)
8 UL Listing Class 2
Thickness 1”
Construction Disposable
Strainer type
With pleated nonwoven fabric filters
Rated Efficiency 30%
Average Arrestance 90% in accordance with ASHRAE 52-2
Holding Frames With gaskets and spring sealing fasteners I. The following product design criteria, options and accessories are required for unitary air conditioning units:

ITEM DESCRIPTION
Unitary Air
Conditioning
Units
Basic
Requirements
UL Listing and Label
Evaporator Fan and Coil
Compressor
Condenser Fan and Coil
Refrigerant Specialties
Controls
Control Category Constant Volume (CV) Single Zone
Coils 1-coil (cooling only)
Refrigeration
Section
Compressor Spring-mounted
High-efficiency-type
Provide Crankcase Heater
Provide double-mesh intake screen
Condenser Coil With seamless copper tubes bonded to aluminum fins Project Owner SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 23 81 26 - 9

ITEM DESCRIPTION
Condenser Fans Upflow propeller type
Direct drive motor with integral thermal overload
protection
Evaporator Coil With seamless copper tubes bonded to aluminum fins J. The following product design criteria, options and accessories are required for package HVAC units:

ITEM DESCRIPTION
Forced Air
Furnaces
Self-contained, packaged, factory assembled prewired unit including cabinet, supply fan, heat exchanger, burner or heater, controls and air filter.

K. The following integral controls and devices are required:

ITEM DESCRIPTION
Control
Section
Starters Required for compressor
Required for all fans
Overload Protection Required in each leg
Refrigerant Controls High Pressure
Low Pressure
Condenser Fan Controls Provide on refrigerant side
Other Integral Controls
and Devices
Compressor winding and overhead protection
Anti short cycle device
Control voltage transformer
Hot gas bypass valve and compressor unloaders
to provide capacity modulation of first-stage
cooling coil
Compressor Start
Sequence
Units with multiple compressors shall have
independent refrigeration circuits and controls
Lead compressor shall serve first stage of ASU
cooling coil
Lag compressor shall energize on further
demand for cooling
Terminal Strip Provide for connection of remote controls Project Owner SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 23 81 26 - 10
L. The following electrical design criteria are required for equipment specified in this section:

ITEM DESCRIPTION
Electrical Work NEC Article 505 Classification Nonhazardous Class Enclosures – Indoor
Dry Locations
NEMA 250 Enclosure Rating NEMA 12 – Industrial Use
As shown on plans
All Enclosures Construction Lockable
With powdercoat epoxy finish on
steel surfaces
Power Supply Motor Circuit As shown on plans
Heating Circuit As shown on plans
Control Panel As shown on plans
Instruments 24 VDC at control panel
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Preparation
A. Make field measurements needed to install room air conditioners before submitting Shop Drawings or ordering.

B. Verify field conditions are acceptable and ready to receive Work.

1. Make minor changes in dimensions and alignments as needed to avoid utilities or structural conflicts.

2. Coordinate size and location of structural steel support members.

3. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

4. Verify required utilities, conduits, wiring, ducts, piping and condensate drains are available, in proper location, and ready to use.

5. Provide flashing including base flashing and counter flashing where items of this section penetrate the roof, outer walls or waterproofing of any kind.

6. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions.

3.2 Installation
A. Refer to Sections 01 73 00 and 01 73 24 for basic execution and installation requirements.

B. Install heating, ventilation and air conditioning equipment and ductwork to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are shown.

C. Install equipment to facilitate service, maintenance and repair or replacement of components.

Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations.

D. The following installation standards shall be followed:

1. Applicable OSHA and Cal OSHA regulations

2. California Mechanical Code Chapter 11 “Refrigeration” Project Owner SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 23 81 26 - 11

3. California Electrical Code Article 440 “Air Conditioning and Refrigerating Equipment.”

4. Other applicable building, fire, plumbing, mechanical and electrical code requirements

5. Manufacturer’s installation and warranty requirements

6. NFPA 90A Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems

7. SMACNA Seismic Restraint Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Systems E. Refer variances between above documents and Contract Documents to Owner’s Representative.

F. Install HVAC equipment to tolerances recommended by Manufacturer. Unless otherwise shown, install air HVAC equipment true and level using precision gauges and levels.

1. Cut fit and place mechanical supports accurately in location, alignment and elevation to support and anchor HVAC materials and equipment at location shown on Plans, according to Manufacturer’s installation instructions and diagrams.

2. Install HVAC equipment with clearances from adjacent construction, piping, conduits, cables, ductwork, and obstruction to allow access for service and maintenance.

3. Provide seismic restraint as required by CBC and Section 01 73 24.

4. Align motors, bases, shafts, pulleys and belts of motor driven equipment.

5. Tension belts according to Manufacturer’s installation instructions.

G. Install fans and ventilators level and plumb with clearances for service and maintenance.

H. Provide seismic restraint as required by CBC and Section 01 73 24.

I. Align motors, bases, shafts, pulleys and belts of motor driven equipment. Tension belts according to Manufacturer’s installation instructions.

J. After completing installation, internally clean fans according to Manufacturer’s instructions.

Remove foreign material and construction debris. Vacuum fan wheels and cabinets. Inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt and construction debris and repair damaged finishes.

K. Upon project completion, HVAC equipment shall receive full operating charges of refrigerant and oil.

3.3 Field Quality Control
A. Field testing shall include:

Project Owner SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 23 81 26 - 12

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER TEST

STANDARD) FREQUENCY
FIRST
TEST

PAID FOR
BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
AirCooled
SplitSystem
HVAC
Systems
Startup
Checks
Verify shipping blocking &
bracing are removed.

Verify unit is securely mounted
and connections to ducts and
accessories are complete.

Verify thermal overload
protection is installed on
motors.

Verify cleaning & adjusting are
complete
With fan drive disconnected,
verify proper motor rotation
and fan free wheel rotation
and bearing operation.

Reconnect fan drive system.

Align & adjust belts. Install belt
guards.

All HVAC
equipment
Contractor Contractor
Starting
Procedures
Energize motor & adjust fan to
indicated rpm.

Measure & record motor
voltage & amperage
simultaneously for 10 minutes’
continuous operation.

After energizing electrical
circuitry, start units to confirm
proper motor rotation and unit
operation.

Test and adjust controls and
safeties.

Shut unit down and reconnect
automatic temperature control
operators.

Adjust belt tension. Lubricate
bearings.

Adjust and verify thermostat
settings.

All HVAC
equipment
Contractor Contractor
Installation &
Leakage
Visual inspection of finished
installation
1 inspection Owner Owner
Project Owner SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 23 81 26 - 13

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER TEST

STANDARD) FREQUENCY
FIRST
TEST

PAID FOR
BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
Field
Performance
Demonstrate compliance to
Contract Documents and
Manufacturer’s printed
literature
1 test Contractor Contractor
11-month
Warranty
Inspection
Demonstrate compliance to
Contract Documents and
Manufacturer’s printed
literature
1 test Owner Contractor
B. Provide services of factory authorized representative on-site to provide:

1. Installation assistance, inspection and startup of complete heating, ventilation and air conditioning system.

2. Field testing and adjustment.

3. Instruction of Owner’s personnel in operation and maintenance including starting and stopping, locations of circuit-breakers and switches servicing air conditioning branch circuits, location and setting procedures for thermostats and other cooling controls, troubleshooting, servicing, and equipment maintenance schedules.

3.4 Spare Parts
A. Furnish the following spare parts:

QUANTITY PART
1 Set filters to be installed by Contractor after testing and balancing 6 Sets each type of integral fuse
3 Sets replacement filters

END OF SECTION

Project Owner SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 23 81 26 - 14

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Project Owner BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 05 02 - 1

SECTION 26 05 02

BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Requirements specified within this Section apply to Division 26, Electrical. Work specified herein shall be performed as if specified in the individual sections.

1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Action Submittals:

1. Provide manufacturers' data for the following:
a. Electrical service components.
b. Nameplates, signs, and labels.

1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Corrosive Area: Containment area or area exposed to delivery, storage, transfer, or use of chemicals.

B. Exterior Area: Location not protected from the weather by a building or other enclosed structure.

C. Interior Dry Area: Location inside building or structure where floor is not subject to liquid spills or wash down, nor where wall or roof slab is common to a water-holding or earthretaining structure.

D. Interior Wet Area: Location inside building or structure where floor is sloped to floor drains or gutters and is subject to liquid spills or wash down, or where wall, floor, or roof slab is common to a water-holding or earth-retaining structure.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide the Work in accordance with the latest version of NFPA 70, NFPA 820. Where required by Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ), material and equipment shall be labeled or listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory or other organization acceptable to the AHJ, in order to provide a basis for approval under the NEC.

B. Materials and equipment manufactured within the scope of standards published by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. shall conform to those standards and shall have an applied UL listing mark or label.

Project Owner BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 05 02 - 2

C. Provide materials and equipment acceptable to AHJ for Class, Division, and Group of hazardous area indicated.

D. The company or individual providing electrical installations shall have a licensed journeyman electrician supervising the work.

E. Perform work following NFPA 70E requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL
A. Where two or more units of the same class of material or equipment are required, provide products of a single manufacturer. Component parts of materials or equipment need not be products of the same manufacturer.

B. Material and equipment installed shall be capable of continuous operation at their specified ratings within an ambient temperature range of 32 degrees F to 122 degrees F.

C. Equip panels installed outdoors in direct sun with sun shields.

2.02 EQUIPMENT FINISH
A. Manufacturer's standard finish color, except where specific color is indicated. If manufacturer has no standard color, finish equipment with light gray color finish as approved by District.

2.03 NAMEPLATES
A. Material: Laminated plastic.

B. Attachment Screws: Stainless steel.

C. Color: Black, engraved to a white core.

D. Letter Height:

1. Pushbuttons/Selector Switches: 3/16 inch, block type.

2. Other electrical equipment: 3/8 inch.

2.04 SIGNS AND LABELS
A. Sign size, lettering, and color shall be in accordance with NEMA Z535.4.

Project Owner BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 05 02 - 3

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL
A. Electrical Drawings show general locations of equipment, devices, and raceway, unless specifically dimensioned. Contractor shall be responsible for actual location of equipment and devices and for proper routing and support of raceways, subject to approval of Engineer.

B. Check approximate locations of light fixtures, switches, electrical outlets, equipment, and other electrical system components shown on Drawings for conflicts with openings, structural members, and components of other systems and equipment having fixed locations. In the event of conflicts, notify Engineer in writing.

C. Install work in accordance with NECA Standard of Installation, unless otherwise specified.

D. Keep openings in boxes and equipment closed during construction. Protect all equipment from debris, dust, metal, shavings, etc.

E. Layout work carefully in advance. Do not cut or notch any structural member or building surface without specific approval of Engineer. Carefully perform cutting, channeling, chasing, or drilling of floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, paving, or other surfaces required for the installation, support, or anchorage of conduit, raceways, or other electrical materials and equipment. Following such work, restore surfaces to original condition

3.02 COMBINING CIRCUITS INTO COMMON RACEWAY
A. Homerun circuits shown on Drawings indicate functional wiring requirements for power and control circuits. Circuits may be combined into common raceways in accordance with the following requirements:

1. Analog control circuits from devices in same general area to same destination. a. No power or AC discrete control circuits shall be combined in same conduit with analog circuits.
b. No Class 2 or Class 3 circuits including, but not limited to, HVAC control circuits, fire alarm circuits, paging system circuits shall be combined with power or Class 1 circuits.
c. Analog circuits shall be continuous from source to destination. Do not add TJB, splice, or combine into a multi-pair cable without authorization of Engineer.
d. Raceways shall be sized in accordance with the NEC and shall not exceed 40 percent fill.
e. Changes shall be documented on record drawings.

2. Discrete control circuits from devices in the same general area to the same destination.

Project Owner BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 05 02 - 4

a. No power or analog control circuits shall be combined in same conduit with discrete circuits.
b. No Class 2 or Class 3 circuits including, but not limited to, HVAC control circuits, fire alarm circuits, and paging system circuits shall be combined with power or Class 1 circuits.
c. Raceways shall be sized in accordance with the NEC and shall not exceed 40 percent fill.
d. Changes shall be documented on record drawings.

3. Power circuits from loads in same general area to same source location (such as: panelboard, switchboard, low voltage motor control center). a. Lighting Circuits: Combine no more than three circuits to a single raceway. Contractor shall be responsible for increasing conduit and conductor size if derating is required by NEC.
b. Receptacle Circuits, 120-Volt Only: Combine no more than three circuits to a single raceway. Provide a separate neutral conductor for each circuit.

Contractor shall be responsible for increasing conduit and conductor size if derating is required by NEC.
c. All Other Power Circuits: Do not combine power circuits without authorization of Engineer.

3.03 NAMEPLATES, SIGNS, AND LABELS
A. Arc Flash Protection Warning Signs:

1. Field mark switchboards, motor control centers, panelboards, and other electrical equipment, to warn qualified persons of potential arc-flash hazards. Locate marking so to be clearly visible to persons before working on energized equipment.

B. Equipment Nameplates:

1. Provide a nameplate to label electrical equipment including switchgear, switchboards, motor control centers, panelboards, motor starters, transformers, terminal junction boxes, disconnect switches, switches and control stations, outlets and lighting switches.

2. Switchgear, motor control center, transformer, and terminal junction box nameplates shall include equipment designation.

3. Disconnect switch, starter, and control station nameplates shall include name and number of equipment powered or controlled by that device.

4. Switchboard and panelboard nameplates shall include equipment designation, service voltage, and phases.

C. Entry Way Warning Signs:

1. Caution : Hearing protection shall be worn in the area.

2. Warning : High Voltage – Keep out
Project Owner BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 05 02 - 5

3. Provide warning signs : Caution – This equipment starts automatically by remote control.

4. Do not enter if light is flashing.

3.04 LOAD BALANCE
A. Drawings and Specifications indicate circuiting to electrical loads and distribution equipment.

B. Balance electrical load between phases as nearly as possible on switchboards, panelboards, motor control centers, and other equipment where balancing is required.

C. When loads must be reconnected to different circuits to balance phase loads, maintain accurate record of changes made, and provide circuit directory that lists final circuit arrangement.

3.05 CLEANING AND TOUCHUP PAINTING
A. Cleaning: Throughout the Work, clean interior and exterior of devices and equipment by removing debris and vacuuming.

B. Touchup Paint:

1. Touchup scratches, scrapes and chips on exterior and interior surfaces of devices and equipment with finish matching type, color, and consistency and type of surface of original finish.

2. If extensive damage is done to equipment paint surfaces, refinish entire equipment in a manner that provides a finish equal to or better than factory finish, that meets requirements of Specification, and is acceptable to Engineer.

3. Provide one gallon or equivalent spray cans of touch-up paint for each color of the provided equipment.

3.06 PROTECTION FOLLOWING INSTALLATION
A. Protect materials and equipment from corrosion, physical damage, and effects of moisture on insulation and contact surfaces.

B. When equipment intended for indoor installation is stored at Contractor's convenience in areas where subject to dampness, moisture, dirt or other adverse atmosphere until completion of construction, ensure adequate protection from these atmospheres is provided and acceptable to Engineer.

END OF SECTION
Project Owner BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 05 04 - 1
SECTION 26 05 04

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUBMITTALS
A. Action Submittals:

1. Provide manufacturers’ data for the following:
a. Control devices.
b. Control relays.
c. Circuit breakers.
d. Nonfused switches.
e. Timers.
f. Intrinsic safety barriers.
g. Enclosures: Include enclosure data for products having enclosures.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 NONFUSED SWITCH, INDIVIDUAL, LOW VOLTAGE
A. NEMA KS 1.

B. Quick-make, quick-break, motor rated, load-break, heavy-duty (HD) type with external markings clearly indicating ON/OFF positions.

C. Lugs: Suitable for use with 75 degrees C wire at NEC 75 degrees C ampacity.

D. Auxiliary Contact:

1. Operation: Make before power contacts make and break before power contacts break.

2. Contact Rating: 7,200VA make, 720VA break, at 600V, NEMA ICS 5 Designation A600.

E. Enclosures: See Article Enclosures.

F. Interlock: Enclosure and switch to prevent opening cover with switch in ON position. Provide bypass feature for use by qualified personnel.

Project Owner BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 05 04 - 2

2.02 PUSHBUTTON, INDICATING LIGHT, AND SELECTOR SWITCH
A. Contact Rating: 7,200VA make, 720VA break, at 600V, NEMA ICS 5 Designation A600.

B. Device configuration: 30.5mm, Round.

C. Selector Switch Operating Lever: Standard or Key Operator, as indicated.

D. Indicating Light: Push-to-test, 120 Vac LED lamps.

1. Indicating Light Color:
a. White or Clear; Call or Power ON.
b. Amber; Pre-Alarm or High Pressure.
c. Green; Running.
d. Red; Alarm or Shutdown.
e. Blue; Seal Fail.

E. Pushbutton Color:

1. ON or START: Black.

2. OFF or STOP: Red.

F. Pushbutton and selector switch lockable in OFF position where indicated.

G. Legend Plate:

1. Material: Aluminum.

2. Engraving: Enamel filled in high contrasting color.

3. Text Arrangement: 11-character/spaces on one line, 14-character/spaces on each of two lines, as required, indicating specific function.

4. Letter Height: 7/64-inch.

H. Manufacturers and Products:

1. Heavy-Duty, Oil-Tight Type:
a. Eaton/Cutler-Hammer; Type 10250T.
b. General Electric Co.; Type CR 104P.
c. Square D Co.; Type T.

2. Heavy-Duty, Watertight, and Corrosion-Resistant Type:
a. Eaton/Cutler-Hammer; Type E34.
b. General Electric Co.; Type CR 104P.
c. Square D Co.; Type SK.

Project Owner BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 05 04 - 3

2.03 TERMINAL BLOCK, 600 VOLTS
A. UL 486E and UL 1059.

B. Size components to allow insertion of necessary wire sizes.

C. Fuse module terminal block for all I/Os. (Combination Terminal block and fuse) D. Capable of termination of control circuits entering or leaving equipment, panels, or boxes.

E. Screw clamp compression, dead front barrier type, with current bar providing direct contact with wire between compression screw and yoke.

F. Yoke, current bar, and clamping screw of high strength and high conductivity metal.

G. F. Yoke shall guide all strands of wire into terminal.

H. G. Current bar shall ensure vibration-proof connection.

I. Terminals:

1. Capable of wire connections without special preparation other than stripping.

2. Capable of jumper installation with no loss of terminal or rail space.

3. Individual, rail mounted.

I. Marking system, allowing use of preprinted or field-marked tags.

J. Manufacturers:

1. Weidmuller, Inc.

2. Ideal.

3. Electrovert USA Corp.

4. Pheonix Contact

2.04 MAGNETIC CONTROL RELAY
A. Industrial control with field convertible contacts rated 10 amps continuous, 7,200VA make, 720VA break.

B. Minimum number of contacts as shown. Provide a minimum of one spare contact on each relay.

C. Paralleling relays from the same control function for additional contact points is not allowed. Provide all necessary contacts on the same relay.

D. NEMA ICS 2, Designation: A600 (600 volts).

Project Owner BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 05 04 - 4
E. Latching Attachment: Mechanical latch, having unlatching coil and coil clearing contacts.

F. Manufacturers and Products:

1. Eaton/Cutler-Hammer; AR Series.

2. Allen Bradley; 700-P200.

3. Pheonix Contact

2.05 GENERAL PURPOSE PLUG-IN CONTROL RELAY (ICE CUBE)
A. 8- or 11- pin type ice cube relays may be used where appropriate to conserve space. Blade or spade connections are not allowed.

B. Indicator lamp.

C. Silver-Cadmium contacts rated 10A at 125V ac.

D. Minimum number of contacts as shown. Provide a minimum of one spare contact on each relay.

E. Paralleling relays from the same control function for additional contact points is not allowed. Provide all necessary contacts on the same relay.

F. Manufacturer; Pheonix Contact, Eaton; D3PR/D3PF, or equal.

2.06 TIME DELAY RELAY
A. Industrial relay with contacts rated 5 amps continuous, 3,600VA make, 360VA break.

B. NEMA ICS 2 Designation: B150 (150 volts).

C. Solid-state electronic, 8- or 11-pin type. Blade type relays are not acceptable.

D. Delay function and voltage as indicated on drawings.

E. Repeat accuracy plus or minus 2 percent.

F. Timer adjustment from 1 second to 60 seconds, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.

G. Manufacturers and Products: ATC Diversified Electronics; TMT-100-AAP-300, or approved equal.

2.07 RESET TIMER
Project Owner BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 05 04 - 5
A. Drive: Synchronous motor, solenoid-operated clutch.

B. Mounting: Semiflush panel.

C. Contacts: 10 amps, 120 volts.

D. Manufacturers and Products:

1. Eagle Signal Controls; Bulletin 125.

2. Automatic Timing and Controls; Bulletin 305.

2.08 ELAPSED TIME METER
A. Drive: Synchronous motor.

B. Range: 0 hour to 99,999.9 hours, nonreset type.

C. Mounting: Semiflush panel.

D. Manufacturers and Products:

1. General Electric Co.; Type 240, 2-1/2-inch Big Look.

2. Eagle Signal Controls; Bulletin 705.

2.09 TEMPERATURE SENSOR (SWITCH)
A. Provide temperature sensor (switch) and thermistor motor protection by motor manufacture’s recommendations.

2.10 SUPPORT AND FRAMING CHANNELS
A. Carbon Steel Framing Channel:

1. Material: Rolled, mild strip steel, 12-gauge minimum, ASTM A1011/A1011M, Grade 33.

2. Finish: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.

B. PVC Coated Framing Channel: Carbon steel framing channel with 40-mil polyvinyl chloride coating.

C. Stainless Steel Framing Channel: Rolled, ASTM A167, Type 316 stainless steel, 12-gauge minimum.

D. Manufacturers:

Project Owner BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 05 04 - 6

1. B-Line Systems, Inc.

2. Unistrut Corp.

3. Aickinstrut.

2.11 SWITCHBOARD MATTING
A. Provide matting having a breakdown of 20 kV minimum.

B. Manufacturer: U.S. Mat and Rubber Company.

2.12 ENCLOSURES
A. Finish: Sheet metal structural and enclosure parts shall be completely painted using an electrode position process so interior and exterior surfaces as well as bolted structural joints have a complete finish coat on and between them.

B. Color: Manufacturer’s standard color (gray) baked-on enamel, unless otherwise shown.

C. Barriers: Provide metal barriers within enclosures to separate wiring of different systems and voltage.

D. Enclosure Selections: Except as shown otherwise, provide electrical enclosures according to the following table:

ENCLOSURES
Location Finish Environment NEMA 250 Type
Indoor Finished Dry 1
Indoor Unfinished Dry 1
Indoor Unfinished Industrial Use 12
Indoor and Outdoor Any Wet 4
Indoor and Outdoor Any Denoted “WP” 3R
Indoor and Outdoor Any Wet and
Corrosive
4X; 316 Stainless
Steel
Indoor and Outdoor Any Wet, Dust or Oil 13
Indoor and Outdoor Any Hazardous Gas 7
Indoor and Outdoor Any Hazardous Dust 9
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Project Owner BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 05 04 - 7

3.01 GENERAL
A. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

B. Install enclosures with a 1/4 inch air gap from walls, unless otherwise noted.

3.02 PUSHBUTTON, INDICATING LIGHT, AND SELECTOR SWITCH
A. Unless otherwise shown, install heavy-duty, oil-tight type in nonhazardous, indoor, dry locations, including motor control centers, control panels, and individual stations.

B. Unless otherwise shown, install heavy-duty, watertight and corrosion-resistant type in nonhazardous, outdoor, or normally wet areas.

3.03 SUPPORT AND FRAMING CHANNEL
A. Install where required for mounting and supporting electrical equipment, raceway, and cable tray systems.

B. Channel Type:

1. Interior, Wet or Dry (Noncorrosive) Locations:
a. PVC-Coated Conduit: PVC coated.
b. Steel Raceway and Other Systems Not Covered: Carbon steel.

2. Interior, Corrosive (Wet or Dry) Locations:
a. PVC-Coated Steel Conduit and Other Systems Not Covered:

Type 316 stainless steel, PVC-coated steel.

3. Outdoor, Noncorrosive Locations:
a. Steel Raceway: Carbon steel framing channel.

4. Outdoor Corrosive Locations:
a. PVC-Coated Steel Conduit and Other Systems Not Covered:

Type 316 stainless steel, or PVC coated steel.

C. Paint cut ends prior to installation with the following:

1. Carbon Steel Channel: Zinc-rich primer.

2. PVC-Coated Channel: PVC patch. PVC paint is not acceptable.

3.04 SWITCHBOARD MATTING
A. Install 36-inch width at switchgear, switchboard, motor control centers, and panelboards.

B. Matting shall run full length of all sides of equipment that have operator Project Owner BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 05 04 - 8
controls or afford access to devices.

END OF SECTION
Project Owner CONDUCTORS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 05 05 - 1
SECTION 26 05 05

CONDUCTORS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUBMITTALS
A. Action Submittals:

1. Product Data:
a. Wire and cable.
b. Wire and cable accessories.
c. Cable fault detection system.

B. Informational Submittals:

1. Journeyman lineman or electrician splicing credentials.

2. Factory Test Report for conductors 600 volts and below.

3. Factory Test Report in accordance with AEIC CS 8, including AEIC qualification report for conductors above 600 volts.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ):

1. Provide the Work in accordance with NFPA 820 and NFPA 70. Where required by the AHJ, material and equipment shall be labeled or listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory or other organization acceptable to the AHJ in order to provide a basis for approval under NEC.

2. Materials and equipment manufactured within the scope of standards published by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. shall conform to those standards and shall have an applied UL listing mark.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 CONDUCTORS 600 VOLTS AND BELOW
A. Conform to applicable requirements of NEMA WC 70.

B. Conductor Type: Soft drawn stranded copper, 98 percent minimum conductivity.

C. Insulation: Type THHN/THWN-2.

D. Flexible Cords and Cables:

1. Type SOW-A/50 with ethylene propylene rubber insulation in accordance with UL

62. Project Owner CONDUCTORS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 05 05 - 2

2. Conform to physical and minimum thickness requirements of NEMA WC 70.

E. Manufacturers:

1. Anaconda.

2. Brand-Rex.

3. General Electric.

4. Okonite.

5. Rome.

6. Or equal.

2.02 600-VOLT RATED CABLE
A. General:

1. Type TC, meeting requirements of UL 1277, including Vertical Tray Flame Test at 70,000 Btu per hour, and NFPA 70, Article 340, or UL 13 meeting requirements of NFPA 70, Article 725.

2. Permanently and legibly marked with manufacturer's name, maximum working voltage for which cable was tested, type of cable, and UL listing mark.

3. Suitable for installation in open air, in cable trays, or conduit.

4. Minimum Temperature Rating: 90 degrees C dry locations, 75 degrees C wet locations.

5. Overall Outer Jacket: PVC, flame-retardant, sunlight- and oil-resistant.

B. Type 1, Multi-conductor Control Cable:

1. Conductors:
a. 14 AWG, seven-strand copper.
b. Insulation: 15-mil PVC with 4-mil nylon.
c. UL 1581 listed as Type THHN/THWN-2 rated VW-1.
d. Conductor group bound with spiral wrap of barrier tape. e. Color Code: In accordance with ICEA S-58-679, Method 1, Table 2.

2. Cable: Passes the ICEA T-29-520, 210,000 Btu per hour Vertical Tray Flame Test.

3. Cable Sizes:

No. of Conductors
Max. Outside Diameter
(Inches)
Jacket Thickness
(Mils)
3 0.41 45
5 0.48 45
7 0.52 45
12 0.72 60
19 0.83 60
25 1.00 60
37 1.15 80
Project Owner CONDUCTORS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 05 05 - 3

4. Manufacturers:
a. Okonite Co.
b. Southwire.

C. Type 3, 16 AWG, Twisted, Shielded Pair, Instrumentation Cable: Single pair, designed for noise rejection for process control, computer, or data log applications meeting NEMA WC 57 requirements.

1. Outer Jacket: 45-mil nominal thickness.

2. Individual Pair Shield: 1.35-mil, double-faced aluminum/synthetic polymer overlapped to provide 100 percent coverage.

3. Dimension: 0.31-inch nominal OD.

4. Conductors:
a. Bare soft annealed copper, Class B, seven-strand concentric, meeting requirements of ASTM B8.
b. 18 AWG, seven-strand tinned copper drain wire.
c. Insulation: 15-mil nominal PVC.
d. Jacket: 4-mil nominal nylon.
e. Color Code: Pair conductors, black and clear.

5. Manufacturers:
a. Okonite Co.
b. Alpha Wire Corp.
c. Belden.

D. Type 4, 16 AWG, Twisted, Shielded Triad Instrumentation Cable: Single triad, designed for noise rejection for process control, computer, or data log applications meeting NEMA WC 57 requirements.

1. Outer Jacket: 45-mil nominal.

2. Individual Pair Shield: 1.35-mil, double-faced aluminum/synthetic polymer, overlapped to provide 100 percent coverage.

3. Dimension: 0.32-inch nominal OD.

4. Conductors:
a. Bare soft annealed copper, Class B, seven-strand concentric, meeting requirements of ASTM B8.
b. 18 AWG, seven-strand, tinned copper drain wire.
c. Insulation: 15-mil nominal PVC.
d. Jacket: 4-mil nylon.
e. Color Code: Triad conductors black, red, and clear.

5. Manufacturers:
a. Okonite Co.

Project Owner CONDUCTORS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 05 05 - 4
b. Alpha Wire Corp.
c. Belden.

E. Type 8, Multiconductor Adjustable Frequency Drive Power Cable:

1. Conductors:
a. Class B, stranded coated copper.
b. Insulation: 600-volt cross-linked polyethylene, UL Type XHHW-2.
c. Grounding Conductors: Insulated stranded copper.

2. Sheath:
a. UL 1277 Type TC, 90 degrees C.
b. Continuous shield, A1/polyester foil, drain wires, overall copper bra

3. Outer Jacket: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) in accordance with UL 1569.

4. Cable Sizes:

Conductor
Size
Minimum
Ground
Wire Size
(AWG)
No. of
Insulated
Conductors
Max.

Outside
Diameter
(Inches)
Minimum
Jacket
Thickness
(Mils)
12 AWG 12 4 0.655 50
10 AWG 10 4 0.769 50
8 AWG 8 4 0.940 50
6 AWG 6 4 1.038 50
4 AWG 4 4 1.180 50
2 AWG 2 4 1.351 50

6. Manufacturers and Products:
a. Alpha Wire; Series V.
b. Belden; Series 29500.
c. LAPP USA; OLFLEX VFD Slim.

2.03 300-VOLT RATED CABLE
A. General:

1. Type PLTC, meeting requirements of UL 13 and NFPA 70, Article 725.

2. Permanently and legibly marked with manufacturer's name, maximum working voltage for which cable was tested, type of cable, and UL listing mark.

Project Owner CONDUCTORS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 05 05 - 5

3. Suitable for installation in open air, in cable trays, or conduit.

4. Minimum Temperature Rating: 105 degrees C.

5. Passes Vertical Tray Flame Test.

6. Outer Jacket: PVC, flame-retardant, sunlight- and oil-resistant.

B. Type 24, Twisted Pair Fire Alarm Cable Nonshielded: Power limited fire protective signaling circuit cable meeting requirements of NFPA 70, Article 760.

1. Cable: Pass NFPA 262, 70,000 Btu flame test and listed by California State Fire Marshall.

2. Outer Jacket: Red in color, identified along its entire length as fire protective signaling circuit cable.

3. Conductors:
a. Solid, tinned, or bare copper.
b. Insulation: 15-mil PVC.

4. Cable Sizes:

Wire Size
Maximum Outside
Diameter
(Inches)
Nominal Jacket
Thickness
(Inches)
12 0.36 0.042
14 0.32 0.042
16 0.26 0.037
18 0.23 0.037

5. Manufacturers: West Penn Wire.

2.04 SPECIAL CABLES
A. Type 30, Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) Telephone and Data Cable, 300V:

1. Category 6 UTP, UL listed, and third party verified to comply with TIA/EIA 568-C Category 6 requirements.

2. Suitable for high speed network applications including gigabit Ethernet and video.

Cable shall be interoperable with other standards compliant products and shall be backward compatible with Category 5 and Category 5e.

3. Provide four each individually twisted pair, 23 AWG conductors, with FEP insulation and blue PVC jacket.

4. NFPA 70 Plenum (CMP) rated; comply with flammability plenum requirements of NFPA 70 and NFPA 262.

5. Cable shall withstand a bend radius of 1-inch minimum at a temperature of minus 20 degrees C maximum without jacket or insulation cracking.

6. Manufacturer and Product: Belden; 7852A.

Project Owner CONDUCTORS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 05 05 - 6

2.05 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
A. Underground grounding conductors: Bare stranded Copper.

B. Branch circuit and feeder equipment grounding conductors: Insulated Copper.

2.06 ACCESSORIES FOR CONDUCTORS 600 VOLTS AND BELOW
A. Tape:

1. General Purpose, Flame Retardant: 7-mil, vinyl plastic, Scotch Brand 33+, rated for 90 degrees C minimum, meeting requirements of UL 510.

2. Flame Retardant, Cold and Weather Resistant: 8.5-mil, vinyl plastic, Scotch Brand 88.

3. Arc and Fireproofing:
a. 30-mil elastomer.
b. Manufacturers and Products:
(1) 3M; Scotch Brand 77, with Scotch brand 69 glass cloth tape binder.
(2) Plymouth; 53 Plyarc, with 77 Plyglas glass tape binder.

B. Wire Markers:

1. Wire markers shall be provided to identify all conductors and cables at equipment terminals, and in pull boxes, handholes, and manholes. The wire markers shall be one uniform standardized marking system. Heat shrinking of the wire markers and clear tubing shall be in accordance with manufacturer's specifications. The field installed conductor wire number shall be labeled with the same number as the terminal number it is connected to.

2. The marking system shall consist of heat shrinkable flame retarded identification sleeves that fit tightly over the wire to be insulated. Wire tags shall be made of a seamless cross-linked polyolefin with a 3 to 1 shrink ratio.

3. Wire marker system shall be UL recognized to Standard 224, MIL-M-81531. Wire markers shall be smear resistant prior to shrinking and achieve mark permanent when shrunk, without the need for permatizing equipment. Markers shall be seamless. Markers shall be resistant to common industrial fluids including Freon TF, Osopropyl Alcohol and Ethylene Glycol. Markers shall have a temperature range of minus 30 degrees C to 105 degrees C and a dielectric strength of 500V/mil minute. Marks shall be legible after 20 eraser rubs and 30 solvent brush strokes. The markers shall be suitable for indoor or outdoor use. A Kroy Tube Marker Model No. K4100 or Tyco #LM2020Plus thermal labeler complete with a case, serial cable and an AC power adapter shall be purchased for tagging wires/cables and shall be supplied as part of the MCC. The system describe as manufactured by Raychem/Kroy Cable Marking, or Brady-Permasleeve White Polyolefin (B-342), or equal. Heat shrinkable thermoplastic tags are not acceptable.

C. Clear Tubing:

Project Owner CONDUCTORS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 05 05 - 7

1. Adhesive type wire markers are not acceptable by themselves. Due to higher ambient temperatures as witnessed in the desert, a translucent (clear) shrink tube must be placed over each adhesive wire marker (extending past both edges of adhesive wire marker) and heat shrunk. The clear tube shall be suitable for high temperature performance that meets or exceeds military industrial standards: MIL1-23053, Test C, with UL VW-1 ratings. Operating temperature range shall be minus 55 degrees C to 175 degrees C. Product shall be Kynar as manufactured by Raychem or approved equal.

D. Wire Connectors:

1. Connectors shall be provided for splices and terminal connections of all copper conductors and cables. The connector shall fit the conductor to which it shall be connected, and the assembly shall have pressure contact surfaces of not less than 50 percent. Cutting strands of the conductor or cables to fit within a wire or cable terminal shall not be permitted.
a. Compression connectors for No. 8 AWG and larger shall be copper lugs for terminal connections and cables, and two-way copper sleeves and taps for splice connections. A crimping tool shall be provided to make a tight and neat compression connection. The connectors and crimping tool shall be Burndy "Hylug", Thomas and Betts "Shure Sta-kon", or approved equal.
b. Tapered spring connectors shall have a live spring attached to the inner steel housing and enclosed with winged nylon or plastic insulators. Vinyl insulated spring type wire nuts are not approved. Connectors shall be provided for No. 10 AWG conductors and smaller, and shall be Buchanan type B-cap, Ideal type Twister or wing nut, 3M type Hyflex and Ranger, Gardner-Bender type wing nut or approved equal.
c. Ground clamps shall be provided for cable connections to ground rods and metal pipes as shown on the Drawings. Clamp shall be copper alloy, heavy duty, corrosion resistant and consist of U-bolts, acorns and saddles with bolted cable connections. The ground clamps shall be O-Z/Gedney, Thomas and Betts, Burndy or approved equal. All connectors shall be UL approved for the purpose and shall be accessible.
d. Terminal block termination shall be the practice when any conductors and spare conductors are installed inside a motor control center, or unit control panel, or local control panel, or free standing panel. Provide future and 25 percent spare terminals for future use.

E. Cable Ties:

1. Nylon, adjustable, self-locking, and reusable.

2. Manufacturer and Product: Thomas & Betts; TY-RAP.

F. Heat Shrinkable Insulation:

1. Thermally stabilized cross-linked polyolefin.

2. Single wall for insulation and strain relief.

3. Dual wall, adhesive sealant lined, for sealing and corrosion resistance.

4. Manufacturers and Products:

Project Owner CONDUCTORS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 05 05 - 8
a. Thomas & Betts; SHRINK-KON.
b. Raychem; RNF-100 and ES-2000.

2.07 PULLING COMPOUND
A. Nontoxic, noncorrosive, noncombustible, nonflammable, water-based lubricant; UL listed.

B. Suitable for rubber, neoprene, PVC, polyethylene, hypalon, CPE, and leadcovered wire and cable.

C. Approved for intended use by cable manufacturer.

D. Suitable for zinc-coated steel, aluminum, PVC, bituminized fiber, and fiberglass raceways.

E. Manufacturers:

1. Ideal Co.

2. Polywater, Inc., Lubricant J

3. Cable Grip Co.

4. Gardner-Bender; Poly Gel

2.08 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Conductors 600 Volts and Below: Test in accordance with UL 44 and UL 854.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL
A. Conductor installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Conductor and cable sizing shown is based on copper conductors, unless noted otherwise.

C. Do not exceed cable manufacturer's recommendations for maximum pulling tensions and minimum bending radii.

D. Terminate conductors and cables, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Tighten screws and terminal bolts in accordance with UL 486A-486B for copper conductors.

F. Cable Lugs: Provide with correct number of holes, bolt size, and center-to-center spacing as required by equipment terminals.

G. Bundling: Where single conductors and cables in manholes, handholes, vaults, cable trays, and other indicated locations are not wrapped together by some other means, Project Owner CONDUCTORS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 05 05 - 9
bundle conductors from each conduit throughout their exposed length with cable ties placed at intervals not exceeding 12 inches on center.

H. Ream, remove burrs, and clear interior of installed conduit before pulling wires or cables.

Clean installed ducts by pulling a flexible steel mandrel, followed by a wire brush and swab, through each duct. Mandrel shall be 1/4-inch less in diameter than the duct diameter. Spare ducts shall have a 200 pound strength nylon cord installed with at least 36 inches of slack at each end.

3.02 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS
A. Feeders: Copper; stranded for No. 12 AWG and larger.

B. Branch Circuits: Copper. stranded for No. 12 AWG and larger.

C. Grounding conductors; solid for No. 12 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 10 AWG and larger.

D. Variable Frequency Drive Output Circuits Cable: Extra-flexible stranded for all sizes.

3.03 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND

WIRING METHODS
A. Exposed Feeders: Type XHHW-2, single conductors in raceway.

B. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type XHHW-2, single conductors in raceway.

C. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground:

Type XHHW-2, single conductors in raceway.

D. Feeders in Cable Tray: Type XHHW-2, single conductors in raceway.

E. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

F. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

G. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground:

Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

H. Branch Circuits in Cable Tray: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

I. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord with stainless-steel, wire-mesh, strain relief device at terminations to suit application.

J. Variable Frequency Drive Circuits: Type XHHW-2 in metal conduit.

K. Calculaions for Determining Tension:

Project Owner CONDUCTORS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 05 05 - 10
When conductors are installed with pulling eyes attached, maximum tension should not exceed

0.008 cmil. Therefore :

T = 0.008 x N x cmil
Where T (tension) is determined in pounds, N is the number of conductors being pulled in, and cmil is the circular-mil.

L. The cable pulling lubricant shall be compatible with all cable jackets. The lubricant shall be clear, contain no greases, silicones, or polyalkylene glycol oils or waxes. Complete cleanup possible with water. The lubricant shall be UL or CSA listed or equal.

3.04 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.

B. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points according to Section 26 05 33 "Raceways and Boxes" prior to pulling conductors and cables.

C. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway.

E. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible.

3.05 CONNECTIONS
A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B.

B. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.

C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches of slack.

Extending pass the outer edge of the box and/or ring adapter.

3.06 POWER CONDUCTOR COLOR CODING
A. Conductors 600 Volts and Below:

1. 6 AWG and Larger: Apply general purpose, flame retardant tape at each end, and at accessible locations wrapped at least six full overlapping turns, covering area 1-1/2 inches to 2 inches wide.

2. 8 AWG and Smaller: Provide colored conductors.

3. Colors:

Project Owner CONDUCTORS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 05 05 - 11
System Conductor Color
All Systems Equipment
Grounding
Green
240/120 Volts, SinglePhase, Three-Wire Grounded Neutral One Hot Leg
Other Hot Leg
White
Black
Red
208Y/120 Volts, ThreePhase, Four-Wire Grounded Neutral Phase A Phase B
Phase C
White Black Red Blue
240/120 Volts, ThreePhase, Four-Wire,
Delta, Center Tap,
Ground on SinglePhase
Grounded Neutral
Phase A
High (wild) Leg
Phase C
White Black Orange
Blue
480Y/277 Volts, ThreePhase, Four-Wire Grounded Neutral Phase A Phase B
Phase C
White Brown Orange
Yellow
Note: Phase A, B, C implies direction of positive phase rotation.

4. T
racer: Outer covering of white with identifiable colored strip, other than green, in accordance with NFPA 70.

B. Conductors Above 600 Volts:

1. Apply three rings/bands of general purpose, flame retardant tape at each end, and at accessible locations.

2. Colors:
a. Grounded Neutral: White.
b. Phase A: Brown.
c. Phase B: Orange.
d. Phase C: Yellow.

Color Service
Black L1 of 120V
Brown Main coil (usually to start P.B.)
Red 480 volt wiring in MCC for phase fail relay
Orange Trip coil
Yellow Pump start after time delay (part wound) and interlock control circuit from external source
Bare Equipment Grounding conductor
Violet Telemetry Call to start pump
Gray Common return
White L2 of 120V (current carrying ground)
Pink Hot lead (usually to stop P.B.) and Reset Control
Project Owner CONDUCTORS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 05 05 - 12

3.07 CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify power, instrumentation, and control conductor circuits at each termination, and in accessible locations such as manholes, handholes, panels, switchboards, motor control centers, pull boxes, and terminal boxes.

B. Identify conductors in accordance with the Circuit and Raceway Schedule.

C. Method:

1. Heat shrink wire markers with heat shrink tubing.

2. Taped-on markers or tags relying on adhesives not permitted.

3.08 CONDUCTORS 600 VOLTS AND BELOW
A. Install 10 AWG or 12 AWG conductors for branch circuit power wiring in lighting and receptacle circuits.

B. Do not splice incoming service conductors and branch power distribution conductors 6 AWG and larger, unless specifically indicated or approved by Engineer.

C. Connections and Terminations:

1. Install nylon self-insulated crimp connectors and terminators for instrumentation and control, circuit conductors.

2. Install self-insulated, set screw wire connectors for two-way connection of power circuit conductors 12 AWG and smaller.

3. Install uninsulated crimp connectors and terminators for instrumentation, control, and power circuit conductors 4 AWG through 2/0 AWG.

4. Install uninsulated, bolted, two-way connectors and terminators for power circuit conductors 3/0 AWG and larger.

5. Install uninsulated terminators bolted together on motor circuit conductors 10 AWG and larger.

6. Place no more than one conductor in any single-barrel pressure connection.

7. Install crimp connectors with tools approved by connector manufacturer.

8. Install terminals and connectors acceptable for type of material used.

9. Compression Lugs:
a. Attach with a tool specifically designed for purpose. Tool shall provide complete, controlled crimp and shall not release until crimp is complete. b. Do not use plier type crimpers.

D. Do not use soldered mechanical joints.

E. Splices and Terminations:

1. Insulate uninsulated connections.

2. Indoor and Outdoor Dry Locations: Use flame retardant, cold- and weatherresistant tape or single wall heat shrink.

Project Owner CONDUCTORS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 05 05 - 13

3. Below Grade and Wet or Damp Locations: Use dual wall heat shrink.

F. Cap spare conductors with UL listed end caps.

G. Cabinets, Panels, and Motor Control Centers:

1. Remove surplus wire, bridle and secure.

2. Where conductors pass through openings or over edges in sheet metal, remove burrs, chamfer edges, and install bushings and protective strips of insulating material to protect the conductors.

H. Control and Instrumentation Wiring:

1. Where terminals provided will accept such lugs, terminate control and instrumentation wiring, except solid thermocouple leads, with insulated, lockingfork compression lugs.

2. Terminate with methods consistent with terminals provided, and in accordance with terminal manufacturer's instructions.

3. Locate splices in readily accessible cabinets or junction boxes using terminal strips.

4. Where connections of cables installed under this Section are to be made under sections of these specification, leave pigtails of adequate length for bundled connections.

5. Cable Protection:
a. Under Infinite Access Floors: May install without bundling. b. All Other Areas: Install individual wires, pairs, or triads in flex conduit under floor or grouped into bundles at least 1/2 inch in diameter. c. Maintain integrity of shielding of instrumentation cables. d. Ensure grounds do not occur because of damage to jacket over shield.

I. Extra Conductor Length: For conductors to be connected by others, install minimum 6 feet of extra conductor in freestanding panels and minimum 2 feet in other assemblies.

END OF SECTION
Project Owner GROUNDING & BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 05 26 - 1
SECTION 26 05 26

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUBMITTALS
A. Action Submittals:

1. Shop Drawings: Product data for the following:
a. Exothermic weld connectors.
b. Mechanical connectors.
c. Compression connectors.
d. Ground Rods.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ):

1. Provide the Work in accordance with NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (NEC).

Where required by the AHJ, material and equipment shall be labeled or listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory or other organization acceptable to the AHJ in order to provide a basis for approval under NEC.

2. Materials and equipment manufactured within the scope of standards published by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. shall conform to those standards and shall have an applied UL listing mark.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GROUND ROD
A. Material: Copper-clad. Steel.

B. Diameter: Minimum 5/8 inch.

C. Length: 10 feet.

2.02 GROUND CONDUCTORS
A. As specified in Section 26 05 05, Conductors.

2.03 CONNECTORS
A. Exothermic Weld Type:

Project Owner GROUNDING & BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 05 26 - 2

1. Outdoor Weld: Suitable for exposure to elements or direct burial.

2. Indoor Weld: Utilize low-smoke, low-emission process.

3. Manufacturers:
a. Erico Products, Inc.; Cadweld and Cadweld Exolon.
b. Thermoweld.

B. Compression Type:

1. Compress-deforming type; wrought copper extrusion material.

2. Single indentation for conductors 6 AWG and smaller.

3. Double indentation with extended barrel for conductors 4 AWG and larger.

4. Barrels prefilled with oxide-inhibiting and antiseizing compound and sealed.

5. Manufacturers:
a. Burndy Corp.
b. Thomas and Betts Co.
c. ILSCO.

C. Mechanical Type: Split-bolt, saddle, or cone screw type; copper alloy material.

1. Manufacturers:
a. Burndy Corp.
b. Thomas and Betts Co.

2.04 GROUNDING WELLS
A. Ground rod box complete with cast iron riser ring and traffic cover marked GROUND ROD.

B. Manufacturers and Products:

1. Christy Co.; No. G5.

2. Lightning and Grounding Systems, Inc.; I-R Series.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL
A. Grounding shall be in compliance with NFPA 70 and IEEE C2.

B. Ground electrical service neutral at service entrance equipment to supplementary grounding electrodes.

C. Ground each separately derived system neutral to nearest effectively grounded building structural steel member or separate grounding electrode.

Project Owner GROUNDING & BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 05 26 - 3
D. Bond together system neutrals, service equipment enclosures, exposed noncurrentcarrying metal parts of electrical equipment, metal raceways, ground conductor in raceways and cables, receptacle ground connections, and metal piping systems.

E. Shielded Power Cables: Ground shields at each splice or termination in accordance with recommendations of splice or termination manufacturer.

F. Shielded Instrumentation Cables:

1. Ground shield to ground bus at power supply for analog signal.

2. Expose shield minimum 1 inch at termination to field instrument and apply heat shrink tube.

3. Do not ground instrumentation cable shield at more than one point.

3.02 WIRE CONNECTIONS
A. Ground Conductors: Install in conduit containing power conductors and control circuits above 50 volts.

B. Nonmetallic Raceways and Flexible Tubing: Install equipment grounding conductor connected at both ends to noncurrent-carrying grounding bus.

C. Connect ground conductors to raceway grounding bushings.

D. Extend and connect ground conductors to ground bus in all equipment containing a ground bus.

E. Connect enclosure of equipment containing ground bus to that bus.

F. Bolt connections to equipment ground bus.

G. Bond grounding conductors to metallic enclosures at each end, and to intermediate metallic enclosures.

H. Junction Boxes: Furnish materials and connect to equipment grounding system with grounding clips mounted directly on box, or with 3/8-inch machine screws.

I. Bond grounding conductors to metal enclosure hinged doors

3.03 MOTOR GROUNDING
A. Extend equipment ground bus via grounding conductor installed in motor feeder raceway; connect to motor frame.

B. Nonmetallic Raceways and Flexible Tubing: Install an equipment grounding conductor connected at both ends to noncurrent-carrying grounding bus.

C. Motors Less Than 10 hp: Furnish compression, spade-type terminal connected to conduit box mounting screw.

Project Owner GROUNDING & BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 05 26 - 4
D. Motors 10 hp and Above: Tap motor frame or equipment housing; furnish compression, one-hole, lug type terminal connected with minimum 5/16-inch brass threaded stud with bolt and washer.

E. Circuits 20 Amps or Above: Tap motor frame or equipment housing; install solderless terminal with minimum 5/16-inch diameter bolt.

3.04 GROUND RODS
A. Install full length with conductor connection at upper end.

B. Install with connection point below finished grade, unless otherwise shown.

C. Space multiple ground rods by one rod length.

3.05 GROUNDING WELLS
A. Install inside buildings, asphalt, and paved areas.

B. Install riser ring and cover flush with surface.

C. Place 6 inches of crushed rock in bottom of each well.

3.06 CONNECTIONS
A. General:

1. Abovegrade Connections: Install exothermic weld, mechanical, or compressiontype connectors; or brazing.

2. Belowgrade Connections: Install exothermic weld or compression type connectors.

3. Remove paint, dirt, or other surface coverings at connection points to allow good metal-to-metal contact.

4. Notify Engineer prior to backfilling ground connections.

B. Exothermic Weld Type:

1. Wire brush or file contact point to bare metal surface.

2. Use welding cartridges and molds in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

3. Avoid using badly worn molds.

4. Mold to be completely filled with metal when making welds.

5. After completed welds have cooled, brush slag from weld area and thoroughly clean joint.

C. Compression Type:

1. Install in accordance with connector manufacturer's recommendations.

Project Owner GROUNDING & BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 05 26 - 5

2. Install connectors of proper size for grounding conductors and ground rods specified.

3. Install using connector manufacturer's compression tool having proper sized dies.

D. Mechanical Type:

1. Apply homogeneous blend of colloidal copper and rust and corrosion inhibitor before making connection.

2. Install in accordance with connector manufacturer's recommendations.

3. Do not conceal mechanical connections.

3.07 METAL STRUCTURE GROUNDING
A. Ground metal sheathing and exposed metal vertical structural elements to grounding system.

B. Bond electrical equipment supported by metal platforms to the platforms.

C. Provide electrical contact between metal frames and railings supporting pushbutton stations, receptacles, and instrument cabinets, enclosure doors, and raceways carrying circuits to these devices.

3.08 MANHOLE AND HANDHOLE GROUNDING
A. Install one ground rod inside each.

B. Ground Rod Floor Protrusion: 4 to 6 inches above floor.

C. Make connections of grounding conductors fully visible and accessible.

D. Connect all noncurrent-carrying metal parts, and any metallic raceway grounding bushings to ground rod with No. 6 AWG copper conductor.

3.09 TRANSFORMER GROUNDING
A. Bond neutrals of transformers within buildings to system ground network, and to any additional indicated grounding electrodes.

B. Bond transformer enclosures to ground.

3.10 SURGE PROTECTION EQUIPMENT GROUNDING
A. Connect surge arrestor ground terminals to equipment ground bus.

END OF SECTION
Project Owner RACEWAY AND BOXES
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 05 33 - 1
SECTION 26 05 33

RACEWAY AND BOXES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUBMITTALS
A. Action Submittals:

1. Manufacturer's Literature:
a. Rigid galvanized steel conduit.
b. Intermediate metal conduit.
c. PVC Schedule 40 conduit.
d. PVC Schedule 80 conduit
e. PVC-coated rigid galvanized steel conduit.
f. Flexible metal, liquid-tight conduit.
g. Conduit fittings.
h. Device boxes for use in hazardous areas.
i. Junction and pull boxes used at or below grade.
j. Large junction and pull boxes.
k. Terminal junction boxes.

2. Precast Manholes and Handholes:
a. Dimensional drawings and descriptive literature.
b. Traffic loading calculations.
c. Accessory information.

3. Equipment and machinery proposed for bending metal conduit.

4. Method for bending PVC conduit less than 30 degrees.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ):

1. Provide the Work in accordance with NFPA 820 and NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). Where required by the AHJ, material and equipment shall be labeled or listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory or other organization acceptable to the AHJ in order to provide a basis for approval under NEC.

2. Materials and equipment manufactured within the scope of standards published by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. shall conform to those standards and shall have an applied UL listing mark.

Project Owner RACEWAY AND BOXES
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 05 33 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 CONDUIT AND TUBING
A. Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit (RGS):

1. Meet requirements of NEMA C80.1 and UL 6.

2. Material: Hot-dip galvanized, with chromated protective layer.

B. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC):

1. Meet requirements of NEMA C80.6 and UL 1242.

2. Material: Hot-dip galvanized, with chromated and lacquered protective layer.

C. PVC Schedule 40 Conduit:

1. Meet requirements of NEMA TC 2 and UL 651.

2. UL listed for concrete encasement, underground direct burial, concealed or, and 90 degrees C insulated conductors.

D. PVC Schedule 80

1. Meet requirements of NEMA TC 2 and UL 651.

2. UL listed for utility conduit pole raiser and 90 degrees C insulated conductors.

E. PVC-Coated Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit:

1. Meet requirements of NEMA RN 1.

2. Material:
a. Meet requirements of NEMA C80.1 and UL 6.
b. Exterior Finish: PVC coating, 40 mils nominal thickness, bond to metal shall have tensile strength greater than PVC.
c. Interior finish: Urethane coating, 2 mils nominal thickness.

3. Threads: Hot-dipped galvanized and factory coated with urethane.

4. Bendable without damage to either interior or exterior coating.

F. Flexible Metal, Liquid-Tight Conduit:

1. UL 360 listed for 105 degrees C insulated conductors.

2. Material: Galvanized steel, with an extruded PVC jacket.

3. Conduits less than 1-1/4” shall have an internal copper bonding conductors wound spirally in the space between each convolution.

G. Innerduct:

1. Resistant to spread of fire, per requirements of UL 2024.

2. Smooth or corrugated HDPE.

Project Owner RACEWAY AND BOXES
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 05 33 - 3

2.02 FITTINGS
A. Rigid Galvanized Steel and Intermediate Metal Conduit:

1. General:
a. Meet requirements of UL 514B.
b. Type: Threaded, galvanized. Set screw and threadless compression fittings not permitted.

2. Bushing:
a. Material: Malleable iron with integral insulated throat, rated for 150 degrees C.
b. Manufacturers and Products:
(1) Appleton; Series BU-I.
(2) O-Z/Gedney; Type HB.

3. Grounding Bushing:
a. Material: Malleable iron with integral insulated throat rated for 150 degrees C, with solderless lugs.
b. Manufacturers and Products:
(1) Appleton; Series GIB.
(2) O-Z/Gedney; Type HBLG.

4. Conduit Hub:
a. Material: Malleable iron with insulated throat with bonding screw. b. UL listed for use in wet locations.
c. Manufacturers and Products:
(1) Appleton, Series HUB-B.
(2) O-Z/Gedney; Series CH.
(3) Meyers; ST Series.

5. Conduit Bodies:
a. Sized as required by NFPA 70.
b. Manufacturers and Products (For Normal Conditions):
(1) Appleton; Form 35 threaded unilets.
(2) Crouse-Hinds; Form 8 threaded condulets.
(3) Killark; Series O electrolets.
(4) Thomas & Betts; Form 8.
c. Manufacturers (For Hazardous Locations):
(1) Appleton.
(2) Crouse-Hinds.
(3) Killark.

6. Couplings: As supplied by conduit manufacturer.

Project Owner RACEWAY AND BOXES
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 05 33 - 4

7. Unions:
a. Concrete tight, hot-dip galvanized malleable iron.
b. Manufacturers and Products:
(1) Appleton; Series EC Three-Piece Union.
(2) O-Z/Gedney; Type UNF, three-piece coupling.

8. Conduit Sealing Fitting Manufacturers and Products:
a. Appleton; Type EYF, EYM, or ESU.
b. Crouse-Hinds; Type EYS or EZS.
c. Killark; Type EY or EYS.

9. Drain Seal Manufacturers and Products:
a. Appleton; Type EYD.
b. Crouse-Hinds; Type EYD or EZD.

10. Drain/Breather Fitting Manufacturers and Products:
a. Appleton; Type ECDB.
b. Crouse-Hinds; ECD.

11. Expansion Fitting Manufacturers and Products:
a. Deflection/Expansion Movement:
(1) Appleton; Type DF.
(2) Crouse-Hinds; Type XD.
b. Expansion Movement Only:
(1) Appleton; Type XJ.
(2) Crouse-Hinds; Type XJ.
(3) Thomas & Betts; XJG-TP.

12. Cable Sealing Fittings:
a. To form watertight nonslip cord or cable connection to conduit. b. For Conductors with OD of 1/2 inch or Less: Neoprene bushing at connector entry.
c. Manufacturers and Products:
(1) Appleton; CG-S.
(2) Crouse-Hinds; CGBS.

B. PVC Conduit and Tubing:

1. Meet requirements of NEMA TC-3.

2. Type: PVC, slip-on.

C. PVC-Coated Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit:

1. Meet requirements of UL 514B.

Project Owner RACEWAY AND BOXES
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 05 33 - 5

2. Fittings: Rigid galvanized steel type, PVC coated by conduit manufacturer.

3. Conduit Bodies: Cast metal hot-dipped galvanized or urethane finish.

Cover shall be of same material as conduit body. PVC coated by conduit manufacturer.

4. Finish: 40-mil PVC exterior, 2-mil urethane interior.

5. Overlapping pressure-sealing sleeves.

6. Conduit Hangers, Attachments, and Accessories: PVC-coated.

7. Manufacturers:
a. Robroy Industries.
b. Ocal.

8. Expansion Fitting Manufacturer and Product: Ocal; OCAL-BLUE XJG.

D. Flexible Metal, Liquid-Tight Conduit:

1. Metal insulated throat connectors with integral nylon or plastic bushing rated for 105 degrees C.

2. Insulated throat and sealing O-rings.

3. Manufacturers and Products:
a. Thomas & Betts; Series 5331.
b. O-Z/Gedney; Series 4Q.

E. Flexible Coupling, Hazardous Locations:

1. Approved for use in the atmosphere involved.

2. Rating: Watertight and UL listed for use in Class I, Division 1 and 2 areas.

3. Outer bronze braid and an insulating liner.

4. Conductivity equal to a similar length of rigid metal conduit.

5. Manufacturers and Products:
a. Crouse-Hinds; Type ECGJH or ECLK.
b. Appleton; EXGJH or EXLK.

F. Watertight Entrance Seal Device:

1. New Construction:
a. Material: Oversized sleeve, malleable iron body with sealing ring, pressure ring, grommet seal, and pressure clamp.
b. Manufacturer and Product: O-Z/Gedney; Type FSK or WSK, as required.

2. Cored-Hole Application:
a. Material: Assembled dual pressure disks, neoprene sealing ring, and membrane clamp.
b. Manufacturer and Product: O-Z/Gedney; Series CSM.

Project Owner RACEWAY AND BOXES
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 05 33 - 6

2.03 OUTLET AND DEVICE BOXES
A. Sheet Steel: One-piece drawn type, zinc- or cadmium-plated.

B. Cast Metal:

1. Box: Malleable iron.

2. Cover: Gasketed, weatherproof, malleable iron, with stainless steel screws.

3. Hubs: Threaded.

4. Lugs: Cast Mounting.

5. Manufacturers and Products, Nonhazardous Locations:
a. Crouse-Hinds; Type FD.
b. Appleton; Type FD.
c. Killark.

6. Manufacturers and Products, Hazardous Locations:
a. Crouse-Hinds; Type GUA or EAJ.
b. Appleton; Type GR.

C. PVC-Coated Cast Metal:

1. Type: One-piece.

2. Material: Malleable iron, cast ferrous metal, or cast aluminum.

3. Coating:
a. Exterior Surfaces: 40-mil PVC.
b. Interior Surfaces: 2-mil urethane.

4. Manufacturers:
a. Robroy Industries.
b. Ocal.

2.04 JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES
A. Outlet Box Used as Junction or Pull Box: As specified under Article Outlet and Device Boxes.

B. Conduit Bodies Used as Junction Boxes: As specified under Article Fittings.

C. Junction box covers larger than 36 inches by 48 inches shall be split. Access to covers shall not require special tools.

D. Large Cast Metal Box, Hazardous Locations:

1. NEMA 250 Type 7 or Type 9 as required for Class, Division, and Group involved.

2. Box: Cast ferrous metal, electro-galvanize finished or copper-free aluminum with drilled and tapped conduit entrances.

Project Owner RACEWAY AND BOXES
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 05 33 - 7

3. Cover: Hinged with screws.

4. Hardware and Machine Screws: ASTM A167, Type 316 stainless steel.

5. Manufacturers and Products:
a. Crouse-Hinds; Type EJB.
b. Appleton; Type AJBEW.

E. Large Stainless Steel Box:

1. NEMA 250 Type 4X.

2. Box: 14-gauge, ASTM A240/A240M, Type 304 stainless steel, with white enamel painted interior mounting panel.

3. Cover: Hinged with clamps.

4. Hardware and Machine Screws: ASTM A167, Type 316 stainless steel.

5. Manufacturers:
a. Hoffman Engineering Co.
b. Robroy Industries.
c. Wiegman.

F. Large Steel Box:

1. NEMA 250 Type 3R and 12.

2. Box: 12-gauge steel, with white enamel painted interior and gray primed exterior, over phosphated surfaces. Provide gray finish as approved by District.

3. Cover: Hinged, gasketed, with clamps and lock kit.

4. Hardware and Machine Screws: ASTM A167, Type 316 stainless steel.

5. Manufacturers:
a. Hoffman Engineering Co.
b. Robroy Industries.
c. Wiegman.

G. Concrete Box, Nontraffic Areas:

1. Box: Reinforced, cast concrete with extension.

2. Cover: Steel diamond plate, gasketed, with locking bolts.

3. Cover Marking: ELECTRICAL, TELEPHONE, or as shown.

4. Size: 10 inches by 17 inches, minimum.

5. Manufacturers and Products:
a. Utility Vault Co.; Series 36-1017.
b. Christy, Concrete Products, Inc.; N9.
c. Quazite; "PG" Style.

Project Owner RACEWAY AND BOXES
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 05 33 - 8
H. Concrete Box, Traffic Areas:

1. Box: Reinforced, cast concrete with extension and bottom slab.

2. Cover: Steel checker plate, gasketed; H/20 loading with screw down.

3. Cover Marking: ELECTRICAL, TELEPHONE, or as shown.

4. Manufacturers and Products:
a. Christy, Concrete Products, Inc.; B1017BOX.
b. Utility Vault Co.; 3030 SB.

2.05 TELEPHONE AND DATA OUTLET
A. Provide outlet boxes and cover plates meeting requirements of EIA/TIA 569.

2.06 TERMINAL JUNCTION BOX
A. Cover: Hinged, unless otherwise shown.

B. Interior Finish: Paint with white enamel or lacquer.

C. Terminal Blocks:

1. Separate connection point for each conductor entering or leaving box.

2. Spare Terminal Points: 20 percent, minimum.

2.07 TERMINAL BLOCKS
A. Provide terminal blocks as needed per the amount required for all the connections with 20 percent additional spare terminals for future connections. The terminal blocks shall be din rail mounted, 600V ac, 30 amp minimum, capable of accommodating multiple wire terminations of two No. 2 AWG minimum. Terminal blocks used in pull out starter buckets shall be latched pull apart type without disconnecting the wire from the terminal blocks. Wire termination shall accommodate at least one No. 18 to one No. 10 AWG conductors. Provide spacers and end stops where necessary. Terminal numbers shall not be duplicated anywhere within the motor control center (MCC) unless the terminal point is the same potential and function throughout the MCC, i.e. L1 or L2 or N.

B. Blown fuse indicators and fuse pullers shall be a part of terminal blocks used for holding fuses within the circuitry. Minimum current rating of the fuse holder shall be 30-amperes.

The terminal blocks shall be UL recognized as a minimum.

2.08 PRECAST HANDHOLES
A. Concrete Strength: Minimum, 3,000 psi compressive, in 28 days.

B. Loading: AASHTO, H-20 in accordance with ASTM C857.

C. Access: Provide cast concrete 6- or 12-inch risers between top of box and finished grade at required elevations.

Project Owner RACEWAY AND BOXES
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 05 33 - 9
D. Drainage:

1. Slope floors toward drain points, leaving no pockets or other nondraining areas.

2. Provide drainage outlet or sump at low point of floor constructed with a heavy, cast iron, slotted or perforated hinged cover, and a minimum 4-inch outlet and outlet pipe.

E. Raceway Entrances:

1. Provide on all four sides.

2. For raceways to be installed under this Contract, provide knockout panels or precast individual raceway openings.

3. At entrances where raceways are to be installed by others, provide minimum 12- inch high by 24-inch wide knockout panels for future raceway installation.

F. Embedded Pulling Iron:

1. Material: 3/4-inch diameter stock, fastened to overall steel reinforcement before concrete is placed.

2. Location:
a. Wall: Opposite each raceway entrance and knockout panel for future raceway entrance.
b. Floor: Centered below manhole or handhole cover.

G. Cable Racks:

1. Arms and Insulators: Adjustable, of sufficient number to accommodate cables for each raceway entering or leaving, including spares.

2. Wall Attachment:
a. Adjustable inserts in concrete walls. Bolts or embedded studs not permitted.
b. Insert Spacing: Maximum 3 feet on center for entire inside perimeter. c. Arrange so that spare raceway ends are clear for future cable installation.

H. Handhole Frames and Covers:

1. Frame Material: Steel, hot-dipped galvanized.

2. Cover Type: Solid aluminum, bolt-on, hinged, torsion spring, of nonskid design.

3. Cover Loading: AASHTO H-20.

4. Cover Designation: Burn by welder, on upper side in integral letters, minimum 2 inches in height, appropriate titles:
a. 600 Volts and Below: ELECTRIC LV.
b. TELEPHONE.
c. CONTROL.

Project Owner RACEWAY AND BOXES
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 05 33 -
10 I. Hardware: Steel, hot-dip galvanized.

J. Furnish knockout for ground rod in each handhole.

K. Manufacturers:

1. Utility Vault Co.

2. Penn-Cast Products, Inc.

3. Concrete Conduit Co.

4. Associated Concrete Products, Inc.

5. Pipe, Inc.

2.09 ACCESSORIES
A. Duct Bank Spacers:

1. Type: Nonmetallic, interlocking, for multiple conduit sizes.

2. Suitable for all types of conduit.

3. Manufacturers:
a. Underground Device, Inc.
b. Carlon.

B. Identification Devices:

1. Raceway Tags:
a. Material: Brass.
b. Shape: Round, 1-inch diameter, or larger oval, if necessary to fit designation.
c. Raceway Designation: Pressure stamped, embossed, or engraved. d. Tags relying on adhesives or taped-on markers not permitted. e. Attached to conduits with stainless steel 0.02 dia or 14 gauge bailing wire.

2. Warning Tape:
a. Material: Polyethylene, 4-mil gauge with detectable strip. b. Color: Red.
c. Width: Minimum 3 inches.
d. Designation: "CAUTION, BURIED ELECTRICAL LINE BELOW". e. Identifying Letters: Minimum 1-inch high permanent black lettering imprinted continuously over entire length.
f. Manufacturers and Products:
(1) Panduit; Type HTDU.
(2) Reef Industries; Terra Tape.

Project Owner RACEWAY AND BOXES
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 05 33 -
11 C. Heat Shrinkable Tubing:

1. Material: Heat-shrinkable, cross-linked polyolefin.

2. Semi-flexible with meltable adhesive inner liner.

3. Color: Black.

4. Manufacturers:
a. Raychem.
b. 3M.

D. Wraparound Duct Band:

1. Material: Heat-shrinkable, cross-linked polyolefin, precoated with hot-melt adhesive.

2. Width: 50 mm minimum.

3. Manufacturer and Product: Raychem; Type TWDB.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL
A. Conduit and Tubing sizes shown are based on the use of copper conductors. Aluminum conductors are not acceptable.

B. All installed Work shall comply with NECA Installation Standards.

C. Crushed or deformed raceways not permitted.

D. Maintain raceway entirely free of obstructions and moisture.

E. Immediately after installation, plug or cap raceway ends with watertight and dust-tight seals until time for pulling in conductors.

F. Sealing Fittings: Provide drain seal in vertical raceways where condensate may collect above sealing fitting.

G. Avoid moisture traps where possible. When unavoidable in exposed conduit runs, provide junction box and drain fitting at conduit low point.

H. Group raceways installed in same area.

I. Proximity to Heated Piping: Install raceways minimum 12 inches from parallel runs.

J. Follow structural surface contours when installing exposed raceways. Avoid obstruction of passageways.

K. Run exposed raceways parallel or perpendicular to walls, structural members, or intersections of vertical planes.

Project Owner RACEWAY AND BOXES
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 05 33 -
12 L. Block Walls: Do not install raceways in same horizontal course or vertical cell with reinforcing steel.

M. Install watertight fittings in outdoor, underground, or wet locations.

N. Paint threads and cut ends, before assembly of fittings, galvanized conduit, PVC-coated galvanized conduit, or IMC installed in exposed or damp locations with zinc-rich paint or liquid galvanizing compound.

O. Metal conduit shall be reamed, burrs removed, and cleaned before installation of conductors, wires, or cables.

P. Do not install raceways in concrete equipment pads, foundations, or beams.

Q. Horizontal raceways installed under floor slabs shall lie completely under slab, with no part embedded within slab.

R. Install concealed, embedded, and buried raceways so that they emerge at right angles to surface and have no curved portion exposed.

S. Install conduits for fiber optic cables, telephone cables, and Category 6 data cables in strict conformance with the requirements of EIA/TIA 569-A.

T. Innerducts, where installed, shall be used for fiber optic installation, and inside PVC or metal conduit only.

3.02 REUSE OF EXISTING CONDUITS

Not allowed

3.03 INSTALLATION IN CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
A. Minimum Cover: 2 inches, including all fittings.

B. Conduit placement shall not require changes in reinforcing steel location or configuration.

C. Notify District and Engineer prior to covering conduit.

D. Provide nonmetallic support during placement of concrete to ensure raceways remain in position.

E. Conduit larger than 1 inch shall not be embedded in concrete slabs, walls, foundations, columns, or beams unless approved by Engineer.

F. Slabs and Walls:

1. Trade size of conduit not to exceed one-fourth of the slab or wall thickness.

2. Install within middle two-fourths of slab or wall.

Project Owner RACEWAY AND BOXES
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 05 33 -
13 3. Separate conduit less than 2-inch trade size by a minimum ten times conduit trade size, center-to-center, unless otherwise shown.

4. Separate conduit 2-inch and greater trade size by a minimum eight times conduit trade size, center-to-center, unless otherwise shown.

5. Cross conduit at an angle greater than 45 degrees, with minimum separation of 1 inch.

6. Separate conduit by a minimum six times the outside dimension of expansion/deflection fittings at expansion joints.

7. Conduit shall not be installed below the maximum water surface elevation in walls of water holding structures.

G. Columns and Beams:

1. Trade size of conduit not to exceed one-fourth of beam thickness.

2. Conduit cross-sectional area not to exceed 4 percent of beam or column cross section.

3.04 CONDUIT APPLICATION
A. Diameter: Minimum 3/4 inch.

B. Exterior, Exposed

1. Rigid galvanized steel for dry locations

2. PVC-coated rigid galvanized steel for dam and wet locations C. Interior, Exposed:

1. Rigid galvanized steel for dry locations

2. PVC-coated rigid galvanized steel. For dam and wet locations D. Interior, Concealed (Not Embedded in Concrete):

1. Rigid galvanized steel for dry locations

2. PVC-coated rigid galvanized steel for dam and wet locations E. Aboveground, Embedded in Concrete Walls, Ceilings, or Floors:

1. Rigid galvanized steel.

F. Direct Earth Burial:

1. PVC Schedule 40
G. Concrete-Encased Raceways:

1. PVC Schedule 40
H. Containing VFD output power circuits:

Project Owner RACEWAY AND BOXES
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 05 33 -
14 1. Rigid galvanized steel.

I. Under Slabs-On-Grade: PVC-coated rigid steel conduit.

J. Transition from Underground or Concrete Embedded to Exposed: PVC-coated rigid galvanized steel conduit shall extend a minimum of 6” above finish grade and 3” inside the cabinets.

K. Under Equipment Mounting Pads: PVC-coated rigid steel conduit.

L. Exterior Light Pole Foundations: PVC-coated rigid steel conduit.

M. Corrosive/Chemical Areas: PVC-coated rigid galvanized steel.

N. Hazardous Gas Areas: PVC-coated rigid galvanized steel.

3.05 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS
A. For motors, wall or ceiling mounted fans and unit heaters, dry type transformers, electrically operated valves, instrumentation, and other locations approved by Engineer where flexible connection is required to minimize vibration:

1. Conduit Size 4 Inches or Less: Flexible, metal, liquid-tight conduit.

2. Conduit Size Over 4 Inches: Nonflexible; unless approved by AHJ.

3. Hazardous Areas: Flexible coupling suitable for Class I, Division 1 and 2 areas.

4. Length: 18 inch minimum, 60 inch maximum, sufficient to allow movement or adjustment of equipment.

3.06 PENETRATIONS
A. Make at right angles, unless otherwise shown.

B. Notching or penetration of structural members, including footings and beams, not permitted.

C. Fire-Rated Walls, Floors, or Ceilings: Firestop openings around penetrations to maintain fire-resistance rating.

D. Concrete Walls, Floors, or Ceilings (Aboveground): Provide nonshrink grout dry-pack, or use watertight seal device.

E. Entering Structures:

1. General: Seal raceway at the first box or outlet with oakum or expandable plastic compound to prevent the entrance of gases or liquids from one area to another.

2. Concrete Roof or Membrane Waterproofed Wall or Floor:
a. Provide a watertight seal.

Project Owner RACEWAY AND BOXES
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 05 33 -
15 b. Without Concrete Encasement: Install watertight entrance seal device on each side.
c. With Concrete Encasement: Install watertight entrance seal device on the accessible side.
d. Securely anchor malleable iron body of watertight entrance seal device into construction with one or more integral flanges.
e. Secure membrane waterproofing to watertight entrance seal device in a permanent, watertight manner.

3. Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Equipment:
a. Penetrate equipment in area established by manufacturer. b. Terminate conduit with flexible metal, liquid-tight conduit at junction box or condulet attached to exterior surface of equipment prior to penetrating equipment.
c. Seal penetration with Type 5 sealant.

4. Corrosive-Sensitive Areas:
a. Seal all conduit passing through room walls.
b. Seal conduit entering equipment panel boards and field panels containing electronic equipment.

5. Existing or Precast Wall (Underground): Core drill wall and install a watertight entrance seal device.

6. Nonwaterproofed Wall or Floor (Underground, without Concrete Encasement):
a. Provide Schedule 40 galvanized pipe sleeve, or watertight entrance seal device.
b. Fill space between raceway and sleeve with expandable plastic compound or oakum and lead joint, on each side.

7. Handholes:
a. Metallic Raceways: Provide insulated grounding bushings. b. Nonmetallic Raceways: Provide bell ends flush with wall. c. Install such that raceways enter as near as possible to one end of wall, unless otherwise shown.

3.07 SUPPORT
A. Support from structural members only, at intervals not exceeding NFPA 70 requirements, and in any case not exceeding 6 feet. Do not support from piping, pipe supports, or other raceways. A support shall be located within 3 feet of any termination or change of direction.

B. Multiple Adjacent Raceways: Provide ceiling trapeze. For trapeze-supported conduit, allow 20 percent extra space for future conduit.

Project Owner RACEWAY AND BOXES
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 05 33 -
16 C. Application/Type of Conduit Strap:

1. Rigid Steel Conduit: Zinc coated steel, pregalvanized steel or malleable iron.

2. PVC-Coated Rigid Steel Conduit: PVC-coated metal.

D. Provide and attach wall brackets, strap hangers, or ceiling trapeze as follows:

1. Wood: Wood screws.

2. Hollow Masonry Units: Toggle bolts.

3. Concrete or Brick: Expansion shields, or threaded studs driven in by powder charge, with lock washers and nuts.

4. Steelwork: Machine screws.

5. Location/Type of Hardware:
a. Dry, Noncorrosive Areas: Galvanized.
b. All Others: Stainless steel.

E. Nails or wooden plugs inserted in concrete or masonry for attaching raceway not permitted. Do not weld raceways or pipe straps to steel structures. Do not use wire in lieu of straps or hangers.

3.08 BENDS
A. Install concealed raceways with a minimum of bends in the shortest practical distance.

B. Make bends and offsets of longest practical radius. Bends in conduits and ducts being installed for fiber optic cables shall be not less than 20 times cable diameter, 15 inches minimum.

C. Install with symmetrical bends or cast metal fittings.

D. Field-made bends and offsets, where necessary, shall be made with an acceptable hickey or bending machine. Do not heat metal raceways to facilitate bending.

E. Make bends in parallel or banked runs from same center or centerline with same radius so that bends are parallel.

F. Factory elbows may be installed in parallel or banked raceways if there is change in plane of run, and raceways are same size.

G. PVC Conduit:

1. Bends 45 Degrees and Larger

2. Use manufacturer's recommended method for forming smaller bends.

H. Flexible Conduit: Do not make bends that exceed allowable conductor bending radius of cable to be installed or that significantly restricts conduit flexibility.

Project Owner RACEWAY AND BOXES
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 05 33 -
17 3.09 EXPANSION/DEFLECTION FITTINGS
A. Provide on all raceways at all structural expansion joints, and in long tangential runs.

B. Provide expansion/deflection joints for 50 degrees F maximum temperature variation.

C. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.10 PVC CONDUIT
A. Solvent Welding:

1. Provide manufacturer recommended solvent; apply to all joints.

2. Install such that joint is watertight.

B. Adapters:

1. PVC to Metallic Fittings: PVC terminal type.

2. PVC to Rigid Metal / PVC Coasted Rigid Steel Conduit : PVC female adapter.

C. Belled-End Conduit: Bevel the unbelled end of the joint prior to joining.

3.11 PVC-COATED RIGID STEEL CONDUIT
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Tools and equipment used in cutting, bending, threading and installation of PVC-coated rigid conduit shall be designed to limit damage to PVC coating.

C. Provide PVC boot to cover all exposed threading.

D. Touch up with manufacturer's recommended methods to repair damage and nicked PVC coatings. PVC paint will not be accepted. A PVC patch is the method required to keep the 40-mil thickness.

3.12 TERMINATION AT ENCLOSURES
A. Cast Metal Enclosure: Provide manufacturer's premolded insulating sleeve inside metallic conduit terminating in threaded hubs.

B. Nonmetallic, Cabinets, and Enclosures:

1. Terminate conduit in threaded conduit hubs, maintaining enclosure integrity.

2. Metallic Conduit: Provide ground terminal for connection to maintain continuity of ground system.

C. Sheet Metal Boxes, Cabinets, and Enclosures:

1. General:

Project Owner RACEWAY AND BOXES
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 05 33 -
18 a. Install insulated bushing on ends of conduit where grounding is not required.
b. Provide insulated throat when conduit terminates in sheet metal boxes having threaded hubs.
c. Utilize sealing locknuts or threaded hubs on sides and bottom of NEMA 3R and NEMA 12 enclosures.
d. Terminate conduits at threaded hubs at the tops of NEMA 3R and NEMA 12 boxes and enclosures.
e. Terminate conduits at threaded conduit hubs at NEMA 4 and NEMA 4X boxes and enclosures.

2. Rigid Galvanized Conduit:
a. Provide one lock nut each on inside and outside of enclosure. b. Install grounding bushing.
c. Provide bonding jumper from grounding bushing to equipment ground bus or ground pad.

3. PVC-Coated Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit:
a. Provide PVC-coated, liquid-tight, metallic connector. b. Install grounding bushing.
c. Provide bonding jumper from grounding bushing to equipment ground bus or ground pad.

D. Motor Control Center, Switchboard, and Free-Standing Enclosures: Terminate metal conduit entering bottom or top with grounding bushing; provide a grounding jumper extending to equipment ground bus or grounding pad.

3.13 UNDERGROUND RACEWAYS
A. Grade: Maintain minimum grade of 4 inches in 100 feet, either from one handhole, or pull box to the next, or from a high point between them, depending on surface contour.

B. Cover: Maintain minimum 2-foot cover above conduit and concrete encasement, unless otherwise shown.

C. Make routing changes as necessary to avoid obstructions or conflicts.

D. Couplings: In multiple conduit runs, stagger so couplings in adjacent runs are not in same transverse line.

E. Union type fittings not permitted.

F. Spacers:

1. Provide preformed, nonmetallic spacers, designed for such purpose, to secure and separate parallel conduit runs in a trench or concrete encasement.

Project Owner RACEWAY AND BOXES
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 05 33 -
19 2. Install at intervals not greater than 5 feet.

G. Support conduit so as to prevent bending or displacement during backfilling or concrete placement.

H. Transition from Underground or Concrete Embedded to Exposed: All exposed conduit stub-ups or risers shall be PVC-RGS a minimum of 6 inches above finished grade or 3” inside cabinets.

I. Transition from PVC to PVC-RGS shall be a minimum of 5-feet with a minimum of 4 feet 6 inches of PVC-RGS prior to entering or going under a structure footing or underground wall without couplings or conduit fittings (6 inches shall be within the concrete poured wall of footing).

J. Installation with Other Piping Systems:

1. Crossings: Maintain minimum 12-inch vertical separation.

2. Parallel Runs: Maintain minimum 12-inch separation.

3. Installation over valves or couplings not permitted.

K. Provide expansion fittings that allow minimum of 4 inches of movement in vertical conduit runs from underground where exposed conduit will be fastened to or will enter building or structure.

L. Provide deflectional/expansion fittings in conduit runs that exit building or structure belowgrade. Conduit from building wall to fitting shall be PVC-coated rigid steel.

M. Concrete Encasement:

1. Concrete Color: Red iron oxide pigment, in the proportion of 2 pounds per sack of cement.

2. Concrete shall be 2 sack mix, Class C (500PSI minimum).

N. Backfill:

1. Controlled low strength fill is an acceptable bedding and pipe zone material.

2. Do not backfill until inspected by Engineer.

3.14 OUTLET AND DEVICE BOXES
A. Install suitable for conditions encountered at each outlet or device in wiring or raceway system, consistent with the raceway system, and sized to meet NFPA 70 and NFPA 820 requirements.

B. Size:

1. Depth: Minimum 2 inches, unless otherwise required by structural conditions.

Box extensions not permitted.

Project Owner RACEWAY AND BOXES
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 05 33 -
20 a. Hollow Masonry Construction: Install with sufficient depth such that conduit knockouts or hubs are in masonry void space.

2. Ceiling Outlet: Minimum 4-inch octagonal device box, unless otherwise required for installed fixture.

3. Switch and Receptacle: Minimum 2-inch by 4-inch device box.

C. Locations:

1. Drawing locations are approximate.

2. To avoid interference with mechanical equipment or structural features, relocate outlets as directed by Engineer.

3. Light Switch: Install on lock side of doors. In case of double doors, install on side with door knob.

4. Light Fixture: Install in symmetrical pattern according to room layout, unless otherwise shown.

D. Mounting Height:

1. General:
a. Dimensions given to centerline of box.
b. Where specified heights do not suit building construction or finish, adjust up or down to avoid interference. Do not straddle CMU block or other construction joints.

2. Light Switch: 48 inches above floor.

3. Thermostat: 54 inches above floor.

4. Convenience Receptacle:
a. General Interior Areas: 15 inches above floor.
b. Industrial Areas, Workshops: 48 inches above floor.
c. Outdoor, All Areas: 24 inches above finished grade.

5. Switch, Motor Starting: 48 inches above floor, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.

E. Install plumb and level.

F. Flush Mounted:

1. Install with concealed conduit.

2. Install proper type extension rings or plaster covers to make edges of boxes flush with finished surface.

3. Holes in surrounding surface shall be no larger than required to receive box.

G. Support boxes independently of conduit by attachment to building structure or structural member.

Project Owner RACEWAY AND BOXES
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 05 33 -
21 H. Install bar hangers in frame construction or fasten boxes directly as follows:

1. Wood: Wood screws.

2. Concrete or Brick: Bolts and expansion shields.

3. Hollow Masonry Units: Toggle bolts.

4. Steelwork: Machine screws.

I. Threaded studs driven in by powder charge and provided with lock washers and nuts are acceptable in lieu of expansion shields.

J. Boxes embedded in concrete or masonry need not be additionally supported.

K. Install galvanized mounting hardware in industrial areas.

L. Install separate junction boxes for flush or recessed lighting fixtures where required by fixture terminal temperature.

M. Boxes Supporting Fixtures: Provide means of attachment with adequate strength to support fixture.

N. Open no more knockouts in sheet steel device boxes than are required; seal unused openings.

3.15 JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES
A. Install where shown and where necessary to terminate, tap-off, or redirect multiple conduit runs.

B. Install pull boxes where necessary in raceway system to facilitate conductor installation.

C. Install in conduit runs at least every 150 feet or after the equivalent of three (90 degree) right-angle bends.

D. Use outlet boxes as junction and pull boxes wherever possible and allowed by applicable codes.

E. Use conduit bodies as junction and pull boxes where no splices are required and their use is allowed by applicable codes.

F. Installed boxes shall be accessible with 42 inches minimum clearance in front.

G. Do not install on finished surfaces.

H. Install plumb and level.

I. Support boxes independently of conduit by attachment to building structure or structural member.

J. Install bar hangers in frame construction or fasten boxes directly as follows:

Project Owner RACEWAY AND BOXES
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 05 33 -
22 1. Wood: Wood screws.

2. Concrete or Brick: Bolts and expansion shields.

3. Hollow Masonry Units: Toggle bolts.

4. Steelwork: Machine screws.

K. Threaded studs driven in by powder charge and provided with lock washers and nuts are acceptable in lieu of expansion shields.

L. Boxes embedded in concrete or masonry need not be additionally supported.

M. At or Below grade:

1. Install boxes for below grade conduit flush with finished grade in locations outside of paved areas, roadways, or walkways.

2. If adjacent structure is available, box may be mounted on structure surface just above finished grade in accessible but unobtrusive location.

3. Obtain Engineer's written acceptance prior to installation in paved areas, roadways, or walkways.

4. Use boxes and covers suitable to support anticipated weights.

N. Flush Mounted:

1. Install with concealed conduit.

2. Holes in surrounding surface shall be no larger than required to receive box.

3. Make edges of boxes flush with final surface.

O. Mounting Hardware:

1. Noncorrosive Dry Areas: Galvanized.

2. Noncorrosive Dam/ Wet Areas: Type 304 stainless steel.

3. Corrosive Areas: Type 316 stainless steel.

P. Install Drain/breather fittings in NEMA 250 Type 4 and Type 4X enclosures.

3.16 HANDHOLES
A. Excavate, shore, brace, backfill, and final grade.

B. Do not install until final raceway grading has been determined.

C. Install such that raceways enter at nearly right angles and as near as possible to one end of wall, unless otherwise shown.

D. Identification: Field stamp covers with manhole or handhole number as shown.

Stamped numbers to be 1-inch minimum height.

Project Owner RACEWAY AND BOXES
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 05 33 -
23 3.17 EMPTY RACEWAYS
A. Provide permanent, removable cap over each end.

B. All empty conduits shall be capped with a threaded cap except at the end that is terminated in an enclosure.

C. Provide 200 pound nylon pull cord affixed to a washer that is larger than the conduit opening. In case of 2 inch and larger, tie/affix pull-cord in a way to avoid pull-cord tip from going inside the duct.

D. Identify, as specified in Article Identification Devices, with waterproof tags attached to pull cord at each end, and at intermediate pull point.

3.18 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
A. Raceway Tags:

1. Identify in accordance with the Circuit and Raceway Schedule.

2. For exposed raceways, install tags at each terminus, near midpoint, and at minimum intervals of every 50 feet, whether in ceiling space or surface mounted.

3. The Contractor is required to label all conduits and affix the 1 inch brass tag to the conduit within the motor control center and on conduits before they enter a junction box or unit control panel.

4. Provide stainless steel mechanic wire for attachment only.

B. Nameplates shall be permanently affixed to the junction box cover in accordance with the manufacturer's approved methods, so as to not jeopardize the NEMA rating, and labeled with the nomenclature as illustrated on the construction drawings.

C. Warning Tape: Install approximately 12 inches above underground or concrete-encased raceways. Align parallel to, and within 12 inches of, centerline of runs.

3.19 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK
A. Protect products from effects of moisture, corrosion, and physical damage during construction.

B. Provide and maintain manufactured watertight and dust-tight seals over all conduit openings during construction.

C. Touch up painted conduit threads after assembly to cover nicks or scars.

D. Touch up coating damage to PVC-coated conduit, fittings, and supports with patching compound approved by manufacturer. PVC paint is not acceptable. Compound shall be kept refrigerated according to manufacturers' instructions until time of use.

END OF SECTION
Project Owner CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 05 47 - 1

SECTION 26 05 47

CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Work Included
A. Materials, testing, and installation of cabinets and enclosures.

1.2 Related Work
A. Section 01 22 00: Unit Prices
B. Section 01 33 00: Submittal Procedures
C. Section 01 40 00: Quality Requirements
D. Section 01 61 00: Common Product Requirements
E. Section 01 65 00: Product Delivery Requirements
F. Section 01 66 00: Product Storage and Handling Requirements G. Section 01 73 00: Execution
H. Section 01 73 24: Seismic Restraint
I. Section 02 05 00: Basic Civil Engineering Requirements J. Section 26 05 02: Basic Electrical Requirements
K. Section 26 05 04 : Basic Electrical Materials and Methods L. Section 26 05 26: Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems M. Section 26 05 33: Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems N. Section 26 08 00: Commissioning of Electrical Systems O. Section 26 14 13 : Switchboard
P. Section 26 22 00 : Low Voltage Transformer
Q. Section 26 24 16 : Panel Board
R. Section 26 29 23 : VFD
S. Section 26 32 13 : Package Engine Generator
T. Section 26 36 00 : Automatic Transfer Switch

1.3 System Description
A. Furnish and install cabinets and enclosures, including appurtenant structural, mechanical and/or electrical mountings or connections required for compliance with Manufacturer’s installation requirements and applicable building codes and standards.

1.5 References
A. Reference publications below form part of this specification to extent referenced and are referred to within text by basic designation only.

1. ANSI Z55.1 Gray Finishes for Industrial Apparatus and Equipment

2. NEMA/ANSI 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment

3. NFPA 70 National Electric Code (NEC)

1.6 Submittals
A. Furnish the following submittals.

Project Owner CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 05 47 - 2

SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION
Shop Drawings Submit per equipment Shop Drawing requirements. .

Product Data Submit per Product Data requirements.

Installation
Instructions
Submit per Installation Instruction requirements.

Warranty Furnish one-year warranty from date of final acceptance B. Refer to Section 01 33 00 for definition of requirements for shop drawings, catalog data, installation instructions, and certificates of compliance.

1.7 Delivery, Storage, and Handling
A. Refer to Sections 01 66 00 for delivery, storage, and handling requirements.

B. Strictly follow Manufacturer’s instructions and warranty requirements for delivery, storage, and handling of cabinets and enclosures.

1.8 Unit Prices
A. Payment for Work in this section shall be included as part of lump-sum or unit-price bid amount for which such Work is appurtenant.

B. Refer to Section 01 22 00 for measurement and payment clauses for cabinets and enclosures.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Acceptable Manufacturers
A. Acceptable Manufacturers include:

ITEM MANUFACTURER
NEMA 1 –
General Purpose
Enclosures
Hoffman-Panduit / Pentair
Integra Enclosures / Winncom
Accepted equal
NEMA 2 – Dripproof Enclosures Hoffman-Panduit / Pentair Integra Enclosures / Winncom
Accepted equal
NEMA 3R –
Rainproof, SleetResistant
Enclosures
Hoffman-Panduit / Pentair
Integra Enclosures / Winncom
Accepted equal
NEMA 4X –
Stainless Steel
Watertight,
CorrosionResistant
Enclosures
Hoffman-Panduit / Pentair
Accepted equal
NEMA 4X –
Fiberglass
Watertight,
CorrosionResistant
Enclosures
Carlon / Lamson & Session Co
Hoffman-Panduit / Pentair
Accepted equal
Project Owner CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 05 47 - 3

ITEM MANUFACTURER
NEMA 12 –
Industrial Use
Enclosures
Hoffman-Panduit / Pentair
Integra Enclosures / Winncom
Accepted equal

2.2 Materials
A. Refer to Section 01 61 00 for basic requirements for products and materials.

B. Cabinets and enclosures shall meet selection requirements of NEC Table 110.20.

C. Materials for cabinets shall be:

ITEM MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
NEMA 1 – General
Purpose Enclosures
Steel NEMA 1
NEMA 2 Damp-Proof
Enclosures
Steel NEMA 2
NEMA 3 – Dust-Tight,
Rain-Tight Enclosures
Steel NEMA 3
NEMA 3R – Rainproof,
Sleet-Resistant
Enclosures
Steel NEMA 3R
NEMA 4 – Watertight
Enclosures
Steel NEMA 4
NEMA 4X – Watertight,
Corrosion-Resistant
Enclosures
Stainless Steel NEMA 4X
14-gauge
Gasketed
NEMA 4X – Watertight,
Corrosion-Resistant
Enclosure Transparent
Covers
Polycarbonate
NEMA 12 – Industrial
Use Enclosures
Steel NEMA 12
14-gauge
Gasketed
D. The following product design criteria, options and accessories are required:

ITEM DESCRIPTION
All Panels Terminal Blocks Provide in panel for connecting panel-mounted devices to field wires.

Do not terminate field wires directly
on panel-mounted devices.

Terminal to Wireway
Clearance
Provide at least 2 inches between
terminal blocks and any wireway.

NEMA 4X – Watertight,
Corrosion-Resistant
Stainless Steel
Enclosures
Enclosure Continuously welded seams
Provide rolled lip around sides of
door and around sides of enclosure
opening.

Door Provide full-length piano hinges with
door removable by pulling stainlesssteel hinge pin.

Gasket Attach with oil-resistant adhesive and
secure with steel retaining strips
Project Owner CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 05 47 - 4

ITEM DESCRIPTION
Hardware Provide clamps, screws, hinge pins,
hasp, and staple for padlocking
Print Pocket Provide in each enclosure
Exterior Finish Do not paint. Grind door front
smooth.

Interior Finish Manufacturer’s white enamel on print
pockets and interior panels.

NEMA 4X – Watertight,
Corrosion-Resistant
Fiberglass Enclosures
Enclosure Heavy-duty hot compression molded
Door Cover hinges manufactured from
nonmetallic materials
Gasket Neoprene cemented into molded
labyrinth on cover
Hardware Provide nonmetallic latches suitable
for padlocking
Print Pocket Provide in each enclosure
NEMA 12 – Industrial
Use Enclosures
Enclosure Continuously welded seams
Provide rolled lip around sides of
door and around sides of enclosure
opening.

Door Provide full-length piano hinges with
door removable by pulling stainlesssteel hinge pin.

Gasket Attach with oil-resistant adhesive and
secure with steel retaining strips
Hardware Provide three point latch and flange
mounted disconnect switch.

Print Pocket Provide in each enclosure
Exterior Finish ANSI 61 Gray polyester powder
Interior Finish Manufacturer’s white enamel or
epoxy on print pockets and interior
panels.

Lighting and Utility
Circuitry (PLC
enclosures)
For PLC enclosures, provide 120VAC
15-amp duplex output and singlepole 120VAC 15-amp circuit breaker.

Provide LED lamp in panel.

E. The following electrical design criteria are required for equipment specified in this section:

ITEM DESCRIPTION
Electrical Work NEC Article 505
Classification
Nonhazardous
Enclosures – Indoor Dry
Locations
NEMA 250 Enclosure
Rating
NEMA 1 – General Purpose
As shown on plans
Enclosures – Indoor
Damp Locations
NEMA 250 Enclosure
Rating
NEMA 12 – Industrial Use
Enclosures – Outdoor
Wet Locations
NEMA 250 Enclosure
Rating
NEMA 4X – Watertight, CorrosionResistant, Stainless steel Enclosures – Outdoor
Dry locations
NEMA 250 Enclosure
Rating NEMA 3R – Dust-tight, Rain-tight
Project Owner CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 05 47 - 5

ITEM DESCRIPTION
All Enclosures Construction Lockable
With powdercoat epoxy finish on
steel surfaces
IEC 60529 Enclosure
Rating for Underground
Equipment
IP 65 water jet
Enclosure or Instrument
Mounting
Local Mount See plans
Remote Mount See plans
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Preparation
A. Make field measurements needed to install cabinets and enclosures before submitting shop drawings or ordering. Make minor changes in dimensions and alignments as needed to avoid utilities or structural conflicts.

B. Examine areas and conditions under which work of this section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of Work.

3.2 Installation
A. Refer to Sections 01 70 XX for basic execution and installation requirements.

B. Furnish and install cabinets and enclosures at locations shown on Plans and Submittals.

C. The following installation standards shall be followed:

1. Applicable OSHA regulations

2. Electrical Code Article 312 “Cabinets, Cutout Boxes, and Meter Socket Enclosures”

3. California Electrical Code Chapter 4 “Equipment for General Use”

4. Other applicable building, fire, and electrical code requirements

5. Manufacturer’s installation and warranty requirements D. Refer variances between above documents and Contract Documents to Owner’s Representative.

E. Install cabinets and enclosures to tolerances recommended by Manufacturer. Unless otherwise shown, install cabinets and enclosures true, plumb, and level using precision gauges and levels.

F. Install panels and enclosures in accessible locations, and provide working clearances meeting NEC requirements for electrical equipment.

G. Top-mounted air-conditioning units installed on enclosures shall be constructed to prevent condensation from damaging electrical equipment or enclosure.

H. Component mounting inside panels shall be done as follows:

1. General: Components, except those on front panels, shall be mounted behind on fixed or swing-out panels; terminal blocks for field connections shall be mounted on fixed channels located near bottom of sections but clear of conduit entry area. Locate fixed panels so as not to prevent access within cabinets to other components, wiring, and terminal blocks on fixed panels or front panels.

Project Owner CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 05 47 - 6

2. Attach components with screws. Subpanel shall be threaded. Do not use rivets or backof-panel nuts.

I. VFD enclosures shall be constructed as follows:

1. Nema 12 floor standing enclosure with flange mounted disconnect switch. The enclosure will contain the disconnect switch, line reactor, VFD, load reactor, control devices, and terminal blocks per the wiring diagram. The VFD’s HMI will be mounted on the door with all other indicator lights, selector switches and push buttons. All the 480VAC and 120VAC components will be separated from the 24VDC low voltage components. Fans and louvers shall be provided to maintain cooling inside the VFD enclosures.

J. Pump Back Control enclosure shall be constructed per the plan and this specification.

K. Mission Communication RTU enclosure shall be constructed per the plan and this specification.

L. The SCADA termination panel shall be constructed per the plan and this specification.

M. All enclosures the Trash Screen location will be mounted minimum 3 feet from the finished floor.

N. Trash Screen Control Panel shall be constructed per manufacturer’s plan and specification.

3.3 Field Quality Control
A. Field testing shall include:

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER

TEST STANDARD) FREQUENCY
FIRST
TEST

PAID FOR
BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
Cabinets
and
Enclosur
es
Installation
& Leakage
Visual inspection of
finished installation
1 inspection Owner Owner
Condensati
on
No visible
condensation from
top-mounted AC
units
1 inspection Owner Owner
NEC
Clearances
Meet NEC §110.26
clearance
requirements
1 inspection Owner Owner
Field
Performanc
e
Demonstrate
compliance to
Contract Documents
1 test Contractor Contractor
Project Owner CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 05 47 - 7

ITEM TEST FOR

TEST STANDARD
(ASTM OR OTHER

TEST STANDARD) FREQUENCY
FIRST
TEST

PAID FOR
BY

RETESTS

PAID FOR
BY
and Manufacturer’s
printed Literature
11-month
Warranty
Inspection
Demonstrate
compliance to
Contract Documents
and Manufacturer’s
printed Literature
1 test Owner Contractor

3.4 Spare Parts
A. Furnish the following spare parts:

QUANTITY PART
One for
each type
Relays, Timers, LED lights, IMM module, OMM module, LFM module.

END OF SECTION
Project Owner CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 05 47 - 8

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Project Owner COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 08 00 - 1
SECTION 26 08 00

COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUBMITTALS
A. Informational Submittals:

1. Submit 30 days prior to performing inspections or tests:
a. Schedule for performing inspection and tests.
b. List of references to be used for each test.
c. Sample copy of equipment and materials inspection form(s). d. Sample copy of individual device test form.
e. Sample copy of individual system test form.

2. Submit test or inspection reports and certificates for each electrical item tested within 30 days after completion of test:

3. Operation and Maintenance Data:
a. In accordance with Section 01 10 02 Sequence of Operation. b. After test or inspection reports and certificates have been reviewed by Engineer and returned, insert a copy of each in Operation and Maintenance Manual.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Firm Qualifications:

1. Corporately and financially independent organization functioning as an unbiased testing authority.

2. Professionally independent of manufacturers, suppliers, and installers of electrical equipment and systems being tested.

3. Employer of engineers and technicians regularly engaged in testing and inspecting of electrical equipment, installations, and systems.

4. Supervising engineer accredited as Certified Electrical Test Technologist and having a minimum of 5 years' testing experience on similar projects.

5. Registered Professional Engineer to provide comprehensive Project report outlining services performed, results of such services, recommendations, actions taken, and opinions.

6. In compliance with OSHA CFR 29, Part 1910.7 criteria for accreditation of testing laboratories or a full member company of NETA.

Project Owner COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 08 00 - 2
B. Test equipment shall have an operating accuracy equal to or greater than requirements established by NETA ATS.

C. Test instrument calibration shall be in accordance with NETA ATS. Test equipment shall have been calibrated within 12 months of said test. A calibration sticker shall be affixed to test equipment indicating calibration date.

1.03 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate testing with other work. Testing, review, and approval shall occur prior to equipment being placed into service. Multiple testing sessions may be required.

B. Perform inspection and electrical tests after equipment listed herein has been installed.

C. Perform tests with apparatus de-energized whenever feasible.

D. Inspection and electrical tests on energized equipment shall be:

1. Scheduled with owner prior to de-energization.

2. Minimized to avoid extended period of interruption to the operating plant equipment.

E. Notify Engineer at least 24 hours prior to performing tests on energized electrical equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE)
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL
A. Tests and inspections shall establish:

1. Electrical equipment is operational within industry and manufacturer's tolerances and standards.

2. Installation operates properly.

3. Equipment is suitable for energization.

4. Installation conforms to requirements of Contract Documents and NFPA 70, NFPA 70E, NFPA 101, and IEEE C2.

B. Perform inspection and testing in accordance with NETA ATS, industry standards, and manufacturer's recommendations.

C. Set, test, and calibrate circuit breakers, power monitoring meters, and other applicable devices in accordance with values established by short circuit available of loads or equipmemt.

D. Adjust mechanisms and moving parts of equipment for free mechanical movement.

Project Owner COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 08 00 - 3
E. Adjust and set electromechanical electronic relays and sensors to correspond to operating conditions, or as recommended by manufacturer.

F. Verify nameplate data for conformance to Contract Documents and approved Submittals.

G. Realign equipment not properly aligned and correct unlevelness.

H. Properly anchor electrical equipment found to be inadequately anchored.

I. Tighten accessible bolted connections, including wiring connections, with calibrated torque wrench/screw driver to manufacturer's recommendations, or as otherwise specified in NETA ATS.

J. Clean contaminated surfaces with cleaning solvents as recommended by manufacturer.

K. Provide proper lubrication of applicable moving parts.

L. Inform Engineer of working clearances not in accordance with NFPA 70.

M. Investigate and repair or replace:

1. Electrical items that fail tests.

2. Active components not operating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3. Damaged electrical equipment.

N. Electrical Enclosures:

1. Remove foreign material and moisture from enclosure interior.

2. Vacuum and wipe clean enclosure interior.

3. Remove corrosion found on metal surfaces.

4. Repair or replace, as determined by District or Engineer, door and panel sections having dented surfaces.

5. Repair or replace, as determined by District or Engineer, poor fitting doors and panel sections.

6. Repair or replace improperly operating latching, locking, or interlocking devices.

7. Replace missing or damaged hardware.

8. Finish:
a. Provide matching paint and touch up scratches and mars. b. If required due to extensive damage, as determined by owner or Engineer, refinish entire assembly.

O. Replace fuses and circuit breakers that do not conform to size and type required by the Contract Documents or approved Submittals.

P. Replace transformer insulating oil not in compliance with ASTM D923.

Project Owner COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 08 00 - 4

3.02 CHECKOUT AND STARTUP
A. Voltage Field Test:

1. Check voltage at point of termination of power company supply system to Project when installation is essentially complete and is in operation.

2. Check voltage amplitude and balance between phases for loaded and unloaded conditions.

3. Record supply voltage (all three phases simultaneously on same graph) for 24 hours during normal working day.
a. Submit Voltage Field Test Report within 5 days of test.

4. Unbalance Corrections:
a. Make written request to power company to correct condition if balance (as defined by NEMA) exceeds 1 percent, or if voltage varies throughout the day and from loaded to unloaded condition more than plus or minus 4 percent of nominal.
b. Obtain written certification from responsible power company official that voltage variations and unbalance are within their normal standards if corrections are not made.

B. Equipment Line Current Tests:

1. Check line current in each phase for each piece of equipment.

2. Make line current check after power company has made final adjustments to supply voltage magnitude or balance.

3. If phase current for a piece of equipment is above rated nameplate current, prepare Equipment Line Phase Current Report that identifies cause of problem and corrective action taken.

3.03 SWITCHBOARD ASSEMBLIES
A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:

1. Insulator damage and contaminated surfaces.

2. Proper barrier and shutter installation and operation.

3. Proper operation of indicating devices.

4. Improper blockage of air-cooling passages.

5. Proper operation of drawout elements.

6. Integrity and contamination of bus insulation system.

7. Check door and device interlocking system by:
a. Closure attempt of device when door is in OPEN position. b. Opening attempt of door when device is in ON position.

8. Check nameplates for proper identification of equipment title and tag Project Owner COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 08 00 - 5
number with latest one-line diagram.

9. Verify fuse and circuit breaker ratings, sizes, and types conform to those specified.

10. Check bus and cable connections for high resistance by low resistance ohmmeter and calibrated torque wrench applied to bolted joints. a. Resistance value to be zero.
b. Bolt torque level in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.12, unless otherwise specified by manufacturer.

11. Check operation and sequencing of electrical and mechanical interlock systems by:
a. Closure attempt for locked open devices.
b. Opening attempt for locked closed devices.

12. Verify performance of each control device and feature.

13. Control Wiring:
a. Compare wiring to local and remote control and protective devices with elementary diagrams.
b. Proper conductor lacing and bundling.
c. Proper conductor identification.
d. Proper conductor lugs and connections.
e. Proper torque on lugs and terminations.

14. Exercise active components.

15. Perform phasing check on double-ended equipment to ensure proper bus phasing from each source.

B. Electrical Tests:

1. Insulation Resistance Tests:
a. Applied megohmmeter dc voltage in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.1.
b. Each phase of each bus section.
c. Phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground for 1 minute.
d. With breakers open.
e. With breakers closed.
f. Control wiring except that connected to solid state components. g. Insulation resistance values equal to, or greater than, resistance values established by manufacturer.

Project Owner COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 08 00 - 6

2. Overpotential Tests:
a. Applied ac or dc voltage and test procedure in accordance with IEEE C37.20.1, C37.20.2, C37.20.3, and NEMA PB 2.

Alternatively use NETA ATS, Table 100.2.
b. Each phase of each bus section.
c. Phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground for 1 minute.
d. Test results evaluated on a pass/fail basis.

3. Current Injection Tests:
a. For entire current circuit in each section.
b. Secondary injection for current flow of 1 ampere.
c. Test current at each device.

4. Control Wiring:
a. Apply secondary voltage to control power and potential circuits. b. Check voltage levels at each point on terminal boards and each device terminal.

5. Operational Test:
a. Initiate control devices.
b. Check proper operation of control system in each section.

3.04 PANELBOARDS
A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: Include the following inspections and related work:

1. Inspect for defects and physical damage, labeling, and nameplate compliance with requirements of up-to-date drawings and panelboard schedules.

2. Exercise and perform operational tests of mechanical components and other operable devices in accordance with manufacturer’s instruction manual.

3. Check panelboard mounting, area clearances, and alignment and fit of components. Minimum clearance shall be 36 inches in front of cabinet.

4. Check tightness of bolted electrical connections with calibrated torque wrench.

Refer to manufacturer’s instructions for proper torque values.

5. Perform visual and mechanical inspection for overcurrent protective devices.

6. Verify bus barriers installed, where applicable.

B. Electrical Tests: Include the following items performed in accordance with manufacturer’s instruction:

1. Insulation Resistance Tests:

Project Owner COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 08 00 - 7
a. Applied megohmmeter dc voltage in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.1.
b. Each phase of each bus section.
c. Phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground for 1 minute.
d. With breakers open.
e. With breakers closed.
f. Control wiring except that connected to solid state components. g. Insulation resistance values equal to, or greater than, resistance values established by manufacturer.

2. Ground continuity test ground bus to system ground.

3.05 DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS
A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:

1. Physical and insulator damage.

2. Proper winding connections.

3. Bolt torque level in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.12, unless otherwise specified by manufacturer.

4. Defective wiring.

5. Proper operation of fans, indicators, and auxiliary devices.

6. Removal of shipping brackets, fixtures, or bracing.

7. Free and properly installed resilient mounts.

8. Cleanliness and improper blockage of ventilation passages.

9. Verify tap-changer is set at correct ratio for rated output voltage under normal operating conditions.

10. Verify proper secondary voltage phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground after energization and prior to loading.

B. Electrical Tests:

1. Insulation Resistance Tests:
a. Applied megohmmeter dc voltage in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.5 for each:
1) Winding-to-winding.
2) Winding-to-ground.
b. Test Duration: 10 minutes with resistances tabulated at 30 seconds, 1 minute, and 10 minutes.

Project Owner COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 08 00 - 8
c. Results temperature corrected in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.14.
d. Temperature corrected insulation resistance values equal to, or greater than, resistance values established by manufacturer. e. Insulation resistance test results to compare within 1 percent of adjacent windings.

2. Perform tests and adjustments for fans, controls, and alarm functions as suggested by manufacturer.

3.06 LOW VOLTAGE CABLES, 600 VOLTS MAXIMUM
A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:

1. Inspect each individual exposed power cable for:
a. Physical damage.
b. Proper connections in accordance with single-line diagram. c. Cable bends not in conformance with manufacturer's minimum allowable bending radius where applicable.
d. Color coding conformance with specification.
e. Proper circuit identification.

2. Mechanical Connections For:
a. Proper lug type for conductor material.
b. Proper lug installation.
c. Bolt torque level in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.12, unless otherwise specified by manufacturer.

3. Shielded Instrumentation Cables For:
a. Proper shield grounding.
b. Proper terminations.
c. Proper circuit identification.

4. Control Cables For:
a. Proper termination.
b. Proper circuit identification.

5. Cables Terminated Through Window Type CTs: Verify neutrals and grounds are terminated for correct operation of protective devices.

B. Electrical Tests for Conductors:

1. Insulation Resistance Tests:

Project Owner COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 08 00 - 9
a. Utilize 1,000-volt dc megohmmeter for 600-volt insulated conductors and 500-volt megohmmeter for 300-volt insulated conductors. b. Test each conductor with respect to ground and to adjacent conductors for 1 minute.
c. Evaluate resistance values by comparison with conductors of same length and type.
d. Investigate values less than 50 megohms.

2. Continuity test by ohmmeter method to ensure proper cable connections.

C. Low-voltage cable tests may be performed by installer in lieu of independent testing firm.

All tests shall be performed in the presence of the District's Engineer or inspector, documented on District form CVWD-889, and submitted for review.

3.07 SAFETY SWITCHES, 600 VOLTS MAXIMUM
A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:

1. Proper blade pressure and alignment.

2. Proper operation of switch operating handle.

3. Adequate mechanical support for each fuse.

4. Proper contact-to-contact tightness between fuse clip and fuse.

5. Cable connection bolt torque level in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.12.

6. Proper phase barrier material and installation.

7. Verify fuse sizes and types correspond to one-line diagram or approved Submittals.

8. Perform mechanical operational test and verify interlocking system operation and sequencing.

B. Electrical Tests:

1. Insulation Resistance Tests:
a. Applied megohmmeter dc voltage in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.1.
b. Phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground for 1 minute on each pole. c. Insulation resistance values equal to, or greater than, resistance values established by manufacturer.

2. Contact Resistance Tests:
a. Contact resistance in microhms across each switch blade and fuse holder.
b. Investigate deviation of 50 percent or more from adjacent poles or similar switches.

Project Owner COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 08 00 -
10 3.08 MOLDED AND INSULATED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. General: Inspection and testing limited to circuit breakers rated 70 amperes and larger and to motor circuit protector breakers rated 50 amperes and larger.

B. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:

1. Proper mounting.

2. Proper conductor size.

3. Feeder designation according to nameplate and one-line diagram.

4. Cracked casings.

5. Connection bolt torque level in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.12.

6. Operate breaker to verify smooth operation.

7. Compare frame size and trip setting with circuit breaker schedules or one-line diagram.

8. Verify that terminals are suitable for 75 degrees C rated insulated conductors.

C. Electrical Tests:

1. Insulation Resistance Tests:
a. Utilize 1,000-volt dc megohmmeter for 480-volt and 600-volt circuit breakers.
b. Pole-to-pole and pole-to-ground with breaker contacts opened for 1 minute.
c. Pole-to-pole and pole-to-ground with breaker contacts closed for 1 minute.
d. Test values to comply with NETA ATS, Table 100.1.

2. Contact Resistance Tests:
a. Contact resistance in microhms across each pole.
b. Investigate deviation of 50 percent or more from adjacent poles and similar breakers.

3. Primary Current Injection Test to Verify:
a. Long-time minimum pickup and delay.
b. Short-time pickup and delay.
c. Ground fault pickup and delay.
d. Instantaneous pickup by run-up or pulse method.

Project Owner COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 08 00 -
11 e. Trip characteristics of adjustable trip breakers shall be within manufacturer’s published time-current characteristic tolerance band, including adjustment factors.
f. Trip times shall be within limits established by NEMA AB 4, Table 5-

3. Alternatively, use NETA ATS, Table 100.7.
g. Instantaneous pickup value shall be within values established by NEMA AB 4, Table 5-4. Alternatively, use NETA ATS, Table 100.8.

3.09 GROUNDING SYSTEMS
A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:

1. Equipment and circuit grounds in motor control center, panelboard, switchboard, and switchgear assemblies for proper connection and tightness.

2. Ground bus connections in motor control center, panelboard, switchboard, and switchgear assemblies for proper termination and tightness.

3. Effective transformer core and equipment grounding.

4. Accessible connections to grounding electrodes for proper fit and tightness.

5. Accessible exothermic-weld grounding connections to verify that molds were fully filled and proper bonding was obtained.

B. Electrical Tests:

1. Fall-of-Potential Test:
a. In accordance with IEEE 81, Section 8.2.1.5 for measurement of main ground system's resistance.
b. Main ground electrode system resistance to ground to be no greater than 3 ohm(s).

2. Two-Point Direct Method Test:
a. In accordance with IEEE 81, Section 8.2.1.1 for measurement of ground resistance between main ground system, equipment frames, and system neutral and derived neutral points.
b. Equipment ground resistance shall not exceed main ground system resistance by 0.25 ohm.

3.10 AC INDUCTION MOTORS
A. General: Inspection and testing limited to motors rated 5 horsepower and larger.

B. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:

1. Proper electrical and grounding connections.

2. Shaft alignment.

3. Blockage of ventilating air passageways.

Project Owner COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 08 00 -
12 4. Operate motor and check for:
a. Excessive mechanical and electrical noise.
b. Overheating.
c. Correct rotation.
d. Check vibration detectors, resistance temperature detectors, or motor inherent protectors for functionability and proper operation. e. Excessive vibration, in excess of values in NETA ATS, Table 100.10.

5. Check operation of space heaters.

C. Electrical Tests:

1. Insulation Resistance Tests:
a. In accordance with IEEE 43 at test voltages established by NETA ATS, Table 100.1 for:
(1) Motors above 200 horsepower for 10-minute duration with resistances tabulated at 30 seconds, 1 minute, and 10 minutes. (2) Motors 200 horsepower and less for 1-minute duration with resistances tabulated at 30 seconds and 60 seconds.
b. Insulation resistance values equal to, or greater than, resistance values established by manufacturers.

2. Insulation resistance test on insulated bearings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3. Measure running current and voltage, and evaluate relative to load conditions and nameplate full-load amperes.

3.11 LOW-VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL
A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:

1. Proper barrier and shutter installation and operation.

2. Proper operation of indicating and monitoring devices.

3. Proper overload protection for each motor.

4. Improper blockage of air-cooling passages.

5. Proper operation of drawout elements.

6. Integrity and contamination of bus insulation system.

7. Check door and device interlocking system by:
a. Closure attempt of device when door is in OPEN position. b. Opening attempt of door when device is in ON position.

8. Check key interlocking systems for:
a. Key captivity when device is in ON position.

Project Owner COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 08 00 -
13 b. Key removal when device is in OFF position.
c. Closure attempt of device when key has been removed. d. Correct number of keys in relationship to number of lock cylinders. e. Existence of other keys capable of operating lock cylinders; destroy duplicate sets of keys.

9. Check nameplates for proper identification of:
a. Equipment title and tag number with latest one-line diagram. b. Pushbuttons.
c. Control switches.
d. Pilot lights.
e. Control relays.
f. Circuit breakers.
g. Indicating meters.

10. Verify fuse and circuit breaker sizes and types conform to Contract Documents.

11. Verify current and potential transformer ratios conform to Contract Documents.

12. Check bus connections for high resistance by low-resistance ohmmeter and calibrated torque wrench applied to bolted joints:
a. Resistance value to be zero.
b. Bolt torque level in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.12, unless otherwise specified by manufacturer.

13. Check operation and sequencing of electrical and mechanical interlock systems by:
a. Closure attempt for locked open devices.
b. Opening attempt for locked closed devices.
c. Key exchange to operate devices in OFF-NORMAL positions.

14. Verify performance of each control device and feature furnished as part of motor control center.

15. Control Wiring:
a. Compare wiring to local and remote control, and protective devices with elementary diagrams.
b. Check for proper conductor lacing and bundling.
c. Check for proper conductor identification.
d. Check for proper conductor lugs and connections.

16. Exercise active components.

17. Inspect contactors for:

Project Owner COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 08 00 -
14 a. Correct mechanical operations.
b. Correct contact gap, wipe, alignment, and pressure.
c. Correct torque of connections.

18. Compare overload heater rating with full-load current for proper size.

19. Compare motor protector and circuit breaker with motor characteristics for proper size.

20. Perform phasing check on double-ended motor control centers to ensure proper bus phasing from each source.

B. Electrical Tests:

1. Insulation Resistance Tests:
a. Applied megohmmeter dc voltage in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.1.
b. Bus section phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground for 1 minute on each phase.
c. Contactor phase-to-ground and across open contacts for 1 minute on each phase.
d. Starter section phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground on each phase with starter contacts closed and protective devices open.
e. Test values to comply with NETA ATS, Table 100.1.

2. Current Injection through Overload Unit at 300 Percent of Motor Full-Load Current and Monitor Trip Time:
a. Trip time in accordance with manufacturer's published data. b. Investigate values in excess of 120 seconds.

3. Control Wiring Tests:
a. Apply secondary voltage to control power and potential circuits. b. Check voltage levels at each point on terminal board and each device terminal.
c. Insulation resistance test at 1,000 volts dc on control wiring, except that connected to solid state components; 1 megohm minimum insulation resistance.

4. Operational test by initiating control devices to affect proper operation.

3.12 LOW VOLTAGE SURGE ARRESTORS
A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:

1. Adequate clearances between arrestors and enclosures.

2. Ground connections to ground bus.

Project Owner COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 08 00 -
15 B. Electrical Tests:

1. Varistor Type Arrestors:
a. Clamping voltage test.
b. Rated RMS voltage test.
c. Rated dc voltage test.
d. Varistor arrestor test values in accordance with IEEE C62.33, Section 4.4 and Section 4.9.

END OF SECTION

Project Owner INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 09 00 - 1
SECTION 26 09 00

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Scope:

1. General: This Section specifies general requirements applicable to process instrumentation systems consisting of process sensors, monitoring and control devices, and accessories required to provide a complete and fully functional monitoring and control system.

2. Responsibility: The Contractor shall provide, configure, calibrate, test, and commission all Mechanical and Electrical components of the instrumentation, control, communications, and network systems supplied unless specifically noted otherwise (UNO). The Contractor shall place the completed systems in operation, and making final adjustments to instruments as required during plant start-up. The Contractor shall provide the services of instrument technicians for testing and adjustment activities.

3. Programming of I/O Concentrators/SCADA systems, including the Schematic/Ladder Logic, HMI, network, and communications systems programming

4. Programming of vendor supplied equipment to communicate with network system is as part of the contractor's scope of work.

B. Contract Requirements:

1. General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1 apply to Work in this Section.

C. Definitions:

1. General: The definitions of terminology used in these specifications shall be defined in ISA Standard S51.1, unless otherwise specified.

2. Approved Equal: Items that are accepted and approved by the owner, the owners designated project representative, or the engineer as being functionally equivalent for the application and acceptable substitutes for items specified in the contract documents.

3. Contractor: The general contractor is responsible for overall project construction.

The party with whom the contract is executed.

4. CSI: Control System Integrator. An organization engaged in the business of programming I/O Concentrators/SCADA systems.

5. Data Sheets: Data sheets as used in this specification shall refer to ISA S20.

6. Galvanic Isolation: Pertaining to an electrical node having no direct current path to another electrical node. As used in this specification, galvanic isolation refers to a device with electrical inputs and/or outputs which are galvanically isolated from Project Owner INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 09 00 - 2
ground, the device case, the process fluid, and any separate power supply terminals, but such inputs and/or outputs are capable of being externally grounded without affecting the characteristics of the devices or providing path for circulation of ground currents.

7. HMI: Human Machine Interface.

8. Integrated Circuit: A number of circuit elements inseparably associated on or within a continuous body to perform the function of a circuit.

9. CP: Control Panel

10. NA: Not Applicable

11. Panel: An instrument support system which may be either a flat surface, a partial enclosure, or a complete enclosure for instruments and other devices used in process control systems. Panels may provide mechanical protection, electrical isolation, and protection from dust, dirt, and chemical contaminants which may be present in the atmosphere. "Panel" shall be understood to include consoles, cabinets, and racks.

12. Project Representative: In reference to a person the term project shall be used to refer to the owner or representatives of the owner designated by the owner.

13. Packaged System: Integrated equipment systems that are specified in other divisions and sections of the specifications. These systems include process and mechanical equipment as well as electrical and controls equipment that conforms to the requirements of Division 26 and 40. These systems may include skid mounted and loose items. Some items provided with the equipment may require installation and connection by others. Some related items identified as "supplied by others" may not be supplied with the system but may nonetheless be required for some of the functions of the system.

14. SCADA: Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition.

15. Signal Types: The following types of signals are used in systems specified in this division.
a. Low Level Analog: A signal that has a full output level of 100 millivolts or less. This group includes thermocouples and resistance temperature detectors.
b. Digital Code: Coded information such as that derived from the output of an analog to digital converter or the coded output from a digital computer or other digital transmission terminal. This type includes those cases where direct line driving is utilized and not those cases where the signal is modulated.
c. Pulse Frequency: Counting pulses such as those emitted from speed transmitters.
d. High Level Analog: Signals with full output level greater than 100 millivolts but less than 30 volts, including 4-20 rnA transmission. e. Modulated Signals: Signals emanating from modems or low level audio signals. Normal signal level is plus 4 dBm to minus 22 dBm. Frequency range is 300 to 10,000 hertz.
f. Discrete Events: Dry contact closures monitored by solid-state equipment.

If the conductors connecting to dry contacts enter enclosures containing Project Owner INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 09 00 - 3
power or control circuits and cannot be isolated from such circuits in accordance with NEC Article 725, this signal shall be treated as low voltage control.
g. Low Voltage Control: Contact closures monitored by relays, or control circuits operating at less than 30 volts and 250 milliamperes. h. High Level Audio Signals: Audio signals exceeding plus 4 dBm, including loud speaker circuits.
i. Radio Frequency Signals: Continuous wave, alternating current signals with fundamental frequency greater than 10 kilohertz.
j. 120 VAC control: Contact closures monitored by relays, or control circuits operating at 120 volts AC.

16. Solid State: Circuitry or components of a type which convey electrons by means of solid material such as silicon or crystals, or which work on magnetic principles such as ferrite cores. Vacuum tubes, gas tubes, slide wires, stepping motors, or other devices are not acceptable substitutes for solid-state components or circuitry.

17. Two-wire Transmitter: A transducer which derives operating power supply from the signal transmission circuit and therefore requires no separate power supply connections. As used in this specification, two-wire transmitter refers to a transmitter which produces a 4 to 20-milliampere, current-regulated signal in a series circuit with a 24-volt direct current driving potential and a maximum circuit resistance of 600 ohms.

18. UNO: Unless specifically Noted Otherwise. All general requirements statements shall apply as stated except where specific exceptions are stated, in which case the general requirement shall be modified by the stated exception.

D. Reference Sections: Requirements of the sections listed below apply to and are related to the work of this Section. Other Sections, not referenced below, may also apply and be related to the proper performance of this work. The Contractor is responsible to perform all the work required by the Contract.

1. Division 01 All Sections, as applicable
Section 26 05 05 Conductors

2. Section 26 05 33 Raceway and Boxes

3. Division 40 Instrumentation and Control, all included sections

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards: The latest edition of the documents listed below are included in the Contract where referenced. The most stringent collective interpretation of the requirements shall govern where conflict or overlap exists between any of these documents and the Contract Documents.

1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

2. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE)

3. Underwriters' Laboratories (UL)

4. The Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society (ISA) Project Owner INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 09 00 - 4
API RP550 Manual on Installation of Refinery Instruments and Control Systems, Part I – Process Instrumentation and Control
Sections 1 Through 13

5. API RP 551 Process Measurement Instrumentation

6. API RP 552 Transmission Systems -First Edition

7. ANSI/ISA S5.4 Instrument Loop Diagrams

8. ISA S20 Specification Forms for Process Measurement and Control Instrumentation, Primary Elements, and Control Valves

9. ANSI/ISA S5.1 Instrumentation symbols and Identification

10. ANSI/ISA S51.1 Process Instrumentation Terminology

11. ISA S5.3 Graphic Symbols for Distributed Control/Shared Display Instrumentation, Logic, and Computer systems

12. ISA RP12.2.02 Recommendations for the Preparation, Content, and Organization of Intrinsic Safety Control Drawings

13. NFPA 70 National Electric Code (NEC), Title 24, Part 3, California Electrical Code (CEC)

14. NFPA 79 Electrical Standards for Industrial Machinery

15. NFPA 820 Fire Protection in Wastewater Treatment and Collection Facilities

16. IBC 1632 International Building Code

17. UL 508 Industrial Control Equipment
B. Listing:

1. All materials and equipment specified herein shall be within the scope of Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) examination services, be approved by the NRTL for the purpose for which they are used, and shall bear the appropriate listing/label.

2. Equipment shall be listed/labeled by an NRTL acceptable to the local authority having jurisdiction.

3. When a product is not available with a listing/label for the purpose for which it is to serve, the product may be required by the inspection authority to undergo a special inspection at the manufacturer's place of assembly or as a completed assembly in the field. All costs and expenses incurred for such inspections shall be included in the original contract price.

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit information per Division 1.

B. Media: All submittals shall be provided in Electronic format shall be PDF that is compatible with Microsoft Windows / Adobe Reader except he As-built Submittal will add CAD files with PDF.

Project Owner INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 09 00 - 5
C. Organization and Format: Submittal organization shall be the same as the specifications.

Provide submittals bound with section coversheets and tabbed dividers with specification section numbers for submittal organization. Bill of materials, cut sheets, shop drawings, schematics, panel layouts, schedules, etc., shall be cross-referenced, indexed, or otherwise related by unique identifier for each item. The project may reject improperly organized or notated submittals. Provide .pdf file page numbers in table of contents as well as bookmark links to section coversheets in pdf file.

D. Reviews and Re-Submittals: Suppliers shall provide re-submittals which include responses to all submittal review comments separately and at a level of detail commensurate with each comment. Supplier responses shall indicate how the supplier resolved the issue pertaining to each review comment. Responses that only indicate that the review comment was noted, will be looked into, etc., are not satisfactory.

Re-submittals which do not comply with this requirement may be rejected and returned without review. Contractor shall be allowed no extensions of any kind to any part of their contract due to the rejection of noncompliant submittals. Submittal review comments not addressed by the contractor in re submittals shall continue to apply whether restated or not in subsequent reviews until adequately addressed by the contractor to the satisfaction of the reviewing and approving authority.

E. Product Data: Submit catalog cut sheets for all products. Identify all cut sheets by unique bill of material item number, index, or key. Notate catalog cuts to indicate only those items, models, options, or series of equipment to be furnished. Cross out or otherwise obliterate all extraneous materials and information. Clearly identify all configuration options for the equipment to be furnished.

F. Bill of Materials: Submit bill of materials including all items, products, and assemblies supplied. Documents shall be updated following submittal review, factory test, and commissioning. Updates shall be provided to the Project Representative in a timely manner. Bill of materials shall include the following information:

1. Item number, index, or key relating to submitted cut sheets, drawings, schedules, etc.

2. Item manufacturer's name, model, and part numbers. Supplier unique part numbers are not acceptable.

3. Description

4. Quantity supplied

5. Supplier contact information
G. Notated Specifications: Submit copies of all Division 26 and Division 40 specification sections with each paragraph notated to indicate compliance. A check mark shall indicate complete compliance. Explanations shall be provided for all noncompliant items in accordance with Division 1.

H. Notated P&ID Drawings: Submit copies of all project Process and Instrumentation drawings with each drawing element notated to indicate compliance. A check mark shall indicate complete compliance. Explanations and markups shall be provided for all non-compliant items and in accordance with Division 1
I. Notated Electrical and Instrumentation Drawings: In the case of deviations from the contract documents, particularly related to the impact of the configuration of submitted Project Owner INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 09 00 - 6
packaged equipment supplied to the project, submit marked up copies of applicable Electrical and Instrumentation contract drawings notated to identify and explain all proposed deviations from the contract documents. Items not notated on the submitted marked up copies shall be assumed to be 100% compliant with the bid documents. This requirement applies to electrical one lines, MCCs, MCC control schematics, panel schedules, and control schematics. This requirement does not apply to plan drawings and conduit schedule which shall be marked up to reflect the as constructed project configuration and submitted as record drawings.

J. Seismic: Submit Seismic design information. Include a list of equipment weighing 200 pounds or more.

K. Drawings: Submit all drawings described in this and other Division 26 and Division 40 sections including elementary, loop, schematic, fabrication, installation, field wiring, panel layout and assembly, etc., drawings. Drawings shall be updated following submittal review, factory test, and commissioning. Updates shall be provided to the Project Representative in a timely manner. Cross reference drawing elements with BOM and catalog cut sheet unique references. Drawings shall use project tag formats and numbers.

Unique and separate drawings shall be provided for each item supplied including but not limited to all panels and all MCC units. Typical drawings that apply to multiple panels or multiple MCC motor control units are not acceptable. Individual 110 schematics diagrams are to be provided for each 110 slot based on the typical in the design and the I/O CONCENTRATOR110 List. Individual motor starter schematics are to be provided for each starter unit including FVNR, VFD and breaker units as well as spare or space units.

L. Packaged Equipment: All packaged equipment suppliers shall provide submittals in compliance with Division 26 and Division 40. This shall include packaged equipment purchased under the contract as well as any pre purchased packaged equipment assigned to the contractor.

M. Component Drawings: Dimensional, installation, and wiring diagrams and drawings for all supplied components.

N. Testing and Calibration: Test plans, calibration forms, test forms, test results, and test reports required by any Division 26 and Division 40 specification section. Per Section 40 90 00.

O. Spare Parts: Spare parts lists

1.04 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Full compensation for Instrumentation and Control for Electrical Systems including furnishing all materials, labor, tools, equipment, and incidentals and performing all work described in this Section and as indicated on the Plans shall be included in the Contract lump sum price paid for "Furnish and Install Misc. Electrical Appurtenances" and no additional compensation shall be allowed therefor.

1.05 SERVICE REQUIREMENTS
A. Environmental Conditions: All equipment shall be suitable for operation in Calexico ambient conditions. Modify equipment if necessary, as required to function in this environment.

Project Owner INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 09 00 - 7

1.06 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM
A. General:

1. System Scope: The instrumentation and control system shall include the instruments, control devices, programmable controllers, input and output devices, sensors, interfacing devices, communications devices, cabinets, enclosures, and other components, as required to implement the functional requirements of the Contract. All panels shall be done by UL certified personnel.

2. Design and Assembly: The detailed design of instrumentation and control system shall be designed to be an integrated system composed completely of components that are specifically designed and intended to be used for and in conjunction with the control and operation of motor-driven pumps and process equipment. The control system shall be provide and assembled by the contractor to provide:
a. Control of motor driven pumps, equipment, and processes. b. Monitoring of operation of motor driven pumps, equipment, and processes. c. Indication of operating status of motor driven pumps, equipment, and of processes.
d. The capabilities indicated and implied by Contract documents. e. Reliable communications with the plant SCADA system or Alarm system.

3. Contractor shall be responsible for proper function of the electrical and mechanical components of the instrumentation and control system, including all plant programmed functions of the instrumentation and control system.

4. Custom Parts: System components shall be commercial, off-the-shelf (COS) components. Custom designed or manufactured components shall require Project Representatives approval.

B. Functional Requirements:

1. Bid Documents: As defined in Division 26 and Division 40 specifications and the contract drawings.

2. Manual Functions: The system shall readily enable manual operation of any and all equipment functions. Manual equipment operation shall not be reliant on any programmable electronic devices or equipment.

3. Fault Tolerance: The system shall be immune to single point failures to the maximum extent practical.

4. Location of Functions: The system shall include manual, automatic, programmed, and hardwired functions. The devices that provide these functions shall be located at field mounted control stations, packaged system local control panels, motor control equipment, process area control panels, and plant SCADA equipment.

1.07 CONTRACTOR AND SUBCONTRACTOR SCOPES OF WORK
A. GC Responsibility:

1. All programmed functions of the I/O concentrators/SCADA instrumentation and industrial electronic shall be provided under the supervision of a single Control Project Owner INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 09 00 - 8
System Integrator, who is regularly engaged in the construction, configuration, and installation of similar systems of equal or greater scope and complexity.

2. Itemized Responsibilities: The Contractor shall be responsible for the following equipment and services:
a. Detailed Design of Control Panels: The contract drawings depict the functional and operational requirements of the control system and are at times diagrammatic. The Contractor shall provide detailed, scaled design of all components on and in control panels and determine specific physical, thermal, and electrical requirements.
b. Detailed Design of Control Circuitry: The drawings depict the functional and operational requirements of the control system and are at times diagrammatic. The Contractor shall be responsible for the final selection of all control system components, except for components specified as "no equal" or "not substitute", and all detailed circuit design and component interconnection required to meet the general and functional requirements indicated in or implied by the Drawings and Specifications. Where components are specified as "no equal" or "not substitute", the Contractor shall provide all detailed design, including specification of miscellaneous or interfacing components required to integrate the specified component into the Contractor's control system design. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that all devices selected, and the proposed interconnection of those devices, perform as intended to provide a complete and operable system meeting the requirements of the anticipated environment and area classifications. The Contractor shall define all requirements for all interfacing components and shall supply all appurtenances, accessories, and all such devices which may be required for proper functioning and interfacing of components as part of the control system. An example of such appurtenances would be interposing relays or analog isolators. All such aforementioned necessary ancillary components not specifically indicated in the Contract Documents shall be considered incidental to the contract and shall be required just as if they had been specifically indicated.
c. Interconnecting Wiring: The design of all interconnecting wiring of control equipment, including remote control panels, packaged equipment panels, mechanical equipment with control components, etc..

d. Integration Testing: Integration testing of all system and related components simultaneously in the Contractor's facility. This testing shall include all panels, instruments, process switches, test fixtures, VFDs, motor controllers, available equipment packages, communications and networking equipment, SCADA system hardware, I/O concentrator system hardware, etc. Per Section 40 90 00
e. Calibration: Calibration of all field instruments UNO. Per Section 40 90 00. f. Communications and Networks: Set up, configure, test, and verify all communications equipment, channels, and networks including new and reused telephone circuits.

Project Owner INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 09 00 - 9
g. Startup and Testing: System start up, commissioning, electrical and mechanical testing, and functional testing of systems that are not programmed following installation. Per Section 40 90 00. Contractor shall provide electrical and mechanical support to the CSI during the testing of systems that are programmed.
h. Instruments: Provide all instruments specified unless specifically noted otherwise. Some instruments shall be provided by packaged equipment vendors. The Contractor shall be responsible for program integration of vendor provided instruments and equipment into the packaged equipment control system.
i. Configuration Configure all supplied devices, and equipment unless specifically noted otherwise. Configuration and programming of devices and equipment supplied as a part of packaged systems shall be provided by the vendor of each packaged system and is the responsibility of the Contactor.
j. Equipment Submittal Review: Review all equipment and packaged system submittals which include Division 26 and Division 40 items. Notify the CSI of any and all needed modifications to submitted equipment, package system scope of services or supply, or CSI programming required to accommodate and integrate submitted equipment into the Contractor's work. Specifically note how submittals which include variances from the contract documents will impact CSI provided programs if accepted by the contractor.
k. Sole Responsibility: In accordance with A above, the Control System Integrator (CSI) shall be solely and completely responsible for programming of the Plant I/O concentrators/SCADA system, and commissioning of the programmed functions of the control system with the exception of control equipment provided as a part of packaged equipment systems or otherwise noted as exceptions.
l. Design and Performance: The control system hardware and assemblies shall be designed by the Contractor to provide the control capabilities and functions indicated in and implied by the drawings and these specifications and to provide trouble-free operation with a minimum of maintenance. m. Coordination and Integration: The CSI shall coordinate the programming of the I/O concentrators/SCADA system with motor controls/VFD, packaged equipment controls, and other related equipment. The Contractor shall be responsible to provide information on equipment provided by the Contractor or other suppliers or disciplines and to support the CSI as necessary to integrate all the equipment into the control system to form a complete working system as outlined by the Contract Documents. n. Proactive Communication: The CSI shall communicate directly with the Contractor, manufacturer(s) and supplier(s) of all related equipment to determine all details of the equipment that may influence or affect the programmed functions of the Plant I/O Concentrators/SCADA system. The CSI shall determine all requirements for and shall cause integration of the control system into a unified operating system. All correspondence shall include a Copy to the General Contractor.

Project Owner INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 09 00 - 10
o. Itemized Responsibilities: The CSI shall be responsible for the following equipment and services:
(1) Integration Testing: Integration testing of all programmed systems and related components simultaneously in the Contractor's facility.

This testing shall include all panels, instruments, process switches, test fixtures,VFD/motor controllers, available equipment packages, communications and networking equipment, SCADA system
software (UNO) etc. Per Section 40 90 00.
(2) Coordination with Contractor: The CSI shall supply the Contractor with Plant I/O concentrators/SCADA programming information if necessary for installation of control components and sensing devices as required for proper system operation.
(3) Calibration: I/O Concentrators/SCADA system calibration of and scaling of all field instruments into the I/O Concentrator/SCADA UNO. Per Section 40 90 00.
(4) Communications and Networks: Set up, configure, test, and verify of all programmed communications equipment, channels, and networks including new and reused telephone circuits. All equipment hardware and installation is by the contractor. (5) Startup And Testing: System start up, commissioning, and functional testing of all programmed systems following installation.

Per Section 40 90 00.
(6) Instruments: The CSI shall integrate alarms, data points, etc. of vendor provided controllers into the I/O Concentrators/SCADA system program application via the control system network. (7) Configuration Configure all supplied devices, and equipment into the I/O Concentrators/SCADA software unless specifically noted otherwise. All configuration and programming of devices and equipment supplied as a part of packaged systems shall be provided by the vendor of each packaged system.
(8) Equipment Submittal Review: Review all equipment and packaged system submittals which include Division 26 and Division 40 items.

Notify the Contractor of any and all needed modifications to submitted equipment, package system scope of services or supply, or CSI supplied programming required to accommodate and integrate submitted equipment into the Contractor's work.

Specifically note how submittals which include variances from the contract documents will impact Contractor provided control panels.

B. Intent of Drawings and Specifications:

1. General: Due to the fact that the contract documents cannot dictate the use of specific brands or models of components and equipment unless there is a compelling reason to do so, the control system drawings are intended to primarily convey detailed functional and operational requirements of the control system rather than specific component selection, assembly, and interconnection information. The substantial interconnection information provided in the Contract Drawings is general in nature and is provided for the purpose of indicating the general scope of work and the aforementioned functional and operational Project Owner INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 09 00 - 11
requirements, and shall not be construed to represent detailed shop drawings or parts thereof.

2. Ancillary Components Required: Components not explicitly indicated in the Contract Documents but none-the-less implied, required for the environment or area classification indicated, or required for the proper functioning of the system as indicated shall be considered required just as though they had been explicitly indicated. The aforementioned components shall be considered incidental to the Contract and shall not constitute a basis for claim by the Bidder for additional compensation or time allowed to complete the Work.

3. Conflicts in Documents: In any case of conflicting statements or requirements in the contract drawings and specifications, the most demanding statement or combination of statements shall govern. All stated requirements shall be met or exceeded.

1.08 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. General: The Contractor, suppliers of packaged control systems/VFD, suppliers of control panels, shall develop all shop drawings required for design, fabrication, assembly, installation, operation, and maintenance of the supplied control system components.

Drawings shall be prepared utilizing a computer aided drafting program. CAD shop drawings shall be updated and provided to the Project Representative prior to factory testing, prior to system installation, and with the O&M manuals. All drawings shall be supplied in electronic file formats per paragraph 1.03.B of this section.

1. Diagrams: Submit detailed interconnection diagrams, wiring diagrams, elementary diagrams, communications diagrams, and loop diagrams with all electrical and electronic components clearly identified by project tag number consistent with the contract drawings and schedules. Diagrams for each circuit or element shall be separate and unique. Typical diagrams are not allowed. Diagrams shall carry a date and brief description of the revisions. Diagrams shall carry a uniform and coordinated set of wire and terminal block numbers in compliance with panel work wiring, and the contract drawings.

2. Panel Layouts: Submit detailed construction drawings for panel layouts and equipment enclosures with dimensions in inches. Show both exterior and interior views.

3. Wire and TB Numbers: Wiring, schematic and loop diagrams shall carry a uniform and coordinated set of wire numbers, terminal block numbers or device terminal numbers.

4. Unique Drawings: Contractor base on typical wiring diagrams/schematic or layout panels in contract drawings to provide unique drawings for control circuit, control loop, control panel layout design, motor control schematic, I/O Concentrator schematic, etc., .Control circuits, loop diagrams, and panel layouts referenced to typical diagrams are not acceptable.

5. Symbols: Drawing symbol format shall comply with NFPA 79, ISA 5.1, ISA 5.3 and where appropriate, ISA RP 12.2.02.

6. Record Drawings: Provide record drawings per Division 1.

7. Format: Drawings shall be prepared utilizing a computer based drafting program and shall be formatted as follows:

Project Owner INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 09 00 - 12
a. SIZE: Hardcopy plots shall be 11-inch by 17-inch.
b. TEXT: Minimum Text size: 0.125 inch for 24 x 36 inch drawings. c. BORDERS: Drawings shall have borders and title blocks identifying the Contract, facility, system, revisions to the drawing, and type of drawing. d. REVISIONS: Each release of a drawing shall carry a revision number, date, and a brief description of the changes. All changes associated with a given release shall be indicated on the drawing by a revision flag. Changes on the latest revision shall be indicated by clouding.
e. CAD: Drafting software shall be AutoCAD 2015 or latter. Bind all x-refs.

8. Field Equipment Terminals: All schematics, diagrams, and drawings showing connections to field equipment shall provide correct terminal block numbers for the connections at the field equipment. This includes packaged system control panels, control panels, VFDs, valve actuators, instruments, switches, etc. The contractor, subcontractors, and suppliers shall coordinate as needed to accomplish this.

B. Elementary and Loop Diagrams: Provide elementary diagrams for all discrete loops. Loop diagrams shall be prepared in compliance with ISA S5.4 and shall be provided for all analog loops. Elementary diagrams and loop diagrams shall show circuits and devices of a system. These diagrams shall be arranged to emphasize device elements and their functions as an aid to understanding the operation of a system and maintaining or troubleshooting that system.

1. Provide complete elementary diagrams for equipment control.

2. Comply with NFPA 79.

3. Show wire numbers, color codes, signal polarities, and terminal block numbers.

Tables for wire numbers, signal polarity, and terminal block numbers are not acceptable.

C. Schematic Diagrams: Provide schematic drawings showing all control panel components, the interconnection of all control panel components, all field devices, and the connection of all field devices to control panels. Schematic diagrams shall also show all communications components, their interconnection, and their interface with other control panel components.

D. Panel Fabrication and Arrangements Drawings: Provide arrangement drawings of all panel front and internal-mounted instruments, switches, devices, and equipment indicated. All panel mounting details shall be shown. Outer dimensions of all panels shall be included on the drawing. Deviations from approved arrangements shall require Project Representatives approval prior to installation. Arrangement drawings shall be drawn to scale using standard Architectural or Engineering scales.

E. Record Drawings:

1. Also referred to as as-built drawings.

2. Shop Drawings: All submitted drawings shall be updated over the course of the construction project to reflect the installations and equipment as-built. A full set of record drawings shall be provided to the Project Representative upon completion Project Owner INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 09 00 - 13
of the project and shall be included in the O&M manuals. Record drawing requirements shall be the same as submittal drawing requirements.

3. Contract Drawings: The contractor shall maintain a set of record plan and P&ID markup drawings on site during construction. The contractor shall mark up the record drawing set to indicate any and all deviations of the installed systems from the contract documents. The marked-up drawings shall be provided to the project representative at project close out.

F. Wiring Diagrams:

1. Panels: comply with NFPA79.

2. Show components of a control panel in an arrangement similar to the actual layout of the panel.

3. Show internal wiring between devices within the panel.

4. Show all terminal blocks whether used for internal or field wiring. Those used for field wiring shall be clearly identified as such.

5. Wiring diagrams shall indicate insulation color code, signal polarities, wife numbers, and terminal block numbers.

6. Land all spare wires in spare terminal blocks.

G. Interconnection Diagrams:

1. Submit complete interconnection diagrams for field wiring.

2. Show each panel and field devices.

3. Show wire numbers, cable numbers, panel numbers, and field device tag numbers.

4. Comply with NFPA79.

H. Certifications:

1. Temperature: Provide test data certified by the manufacturer to demonstrate that field electronic devices are suitable for the specified ambient temperatures.

2. Corrosion: Provide test data showing design features of the electronic equipment provided to protect against damage by the specified atmospheric contaminants and specific evidence that similarly protected electronic equipment has operated in similar environments for a period of not less than five years without failure due to corrosion.

1.09 SEISMIC DESIGN
A. Procedure and submittals: per Section 26 05 02.

B. Structures and equipment shall be braced to prevent damage from specified forces.

C. Equipment shall not be required to function properly during periods of seismic disturbance, but shall be capable of manual restart without repair or modification following a disturbance.

Project Owner INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 09 00 - 14

1.10 PRECEDENCE OF REQUIREMENTS
The Contractor, Sub Contractors, CSI and equipment suppliers shall comply with all requirements specified in the contract documents, individually and in combination. In the case of redundant, overlapping, or conflicting requirements, the most stringent and demanding interpretation of the requirements statements collectively shall govern unless specifically clarified by the project. The Contractor and equipment suppliers shall request needed clarification of requirements during bid, otherwise the project's interpretation shall govern. The System Supplier shall diligently scrutinize all parts of all bid documents prior to bid.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Products: All products provided by the Contractor shall be manufactured to comply American Buy Act and other requirements as indicated in the Contract. System components shall be commercial, off-the-shelf components to the maximum extent possible. Custom designed or manufactured components shall require Project Representative's approval.

2.02 MATERIALS
A. General: Material shall be new, free from defects, and of the quality specified. All equipment and materials utilized in the system shall be the products of Manufacturers with at least five (5) years of experience in the manufacture of similar equipment. Similar items in the system shall be the products of the same Manufacturer. All equipment shall be of industrial grade and of standard construction, shall be capable of long, reliable, trouble-free service, and shall be specifically intended for control and monitoring of operation of motor-driven pumps and process equipment. All equipment shall be of modular design to facilitate interchangeability of parts and to assure ease of servicing.

B. Electronic Components: Unless otherwise specified, electronic equipment shall be of solid-state construction. Components of standard electronic assemblies shall not be replaced with components of different characteristics in order to meet the performance requirements of the specification. Parts shall be as shown in the instruction manuals and shall be replaceable with standard commercial components of the same description without degrading the performance of the completed assembly.

2.03 INSTRUMENTS
Application requirements are specified in the individual specification sections, and/or on the drawings. The major instruments required to implement the process instrumentation and control systems are identified on the P&IDs. Instruments identified shall be supplied with the exception of those identified within the limit of supply of vendor equipment.

Instruments within vendor boundaries will be supplied by equipment suppliers. All instrument functions specified on the P&IDs and contract drawings have Division 26 and Division 40 specification references and shall be provided by the Contractor. Any additional instruments or devices required to complete the instrument loops because of unique characteristics of the particular equipment selected by the Contractor (such as Project Owner INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 09 00 - 15
isolation Ills) shall be provided. Such additional instruments shall be considered incidental to the contract and shall be provided and included in the original contract price even when not specified in the contract drawings.

2.04 SPARE PARTS
A. In addition to spare parts mentioned elsewhere in Division 26 & 40 specification sections, the Contractor shall supply the following spare parts for use by the Owner:

1. Qty 1 Relay of each type used or 10%, whichever is the greater amount

2. Qty 1 lamp fixtures of each type used or 20%, whichever is the greater amount.

3. Qty 2 spare fuses and 1 miniature din rail circuit breaker for each type of fuse/circuit breaker supplied minimum
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 DESIGN AND ASSEMBLY
A. General: With the exception of any packaged equipment control systems, the supplied control systems shall be designed by the Contractor per paragraph 1.06. The supplied control system shall be completely assembled in the shop of and by the Contractor. All components and equipment shall be prewired to the maximum extent possible.

B. Electrical and Mechanical Integration: The Contractor shall determine all requirements for and shall cause electrical, mechanical and network integration of the supplied control systems, and any supplied packaged equipment control systems into a complete and unified system. The Contractor shall be responsible for the electrical and mechanical coordination and integration of the supplied control system with motor controls and other related equipment.

C. Program Integration: The CSI shall determine all requirements for and shall cause programmed integration of the supplied control systems, and any supplied packaged equipment control systems into a complete and unified system. The CSI shall be responsible for the programmable coordination and integration of the supplied control system with control panels/SCADA panels and other related equipment. Vendor package equipment programming will be the responsibility of the contractor/equipment vendor.

D. Review of Submittals: The Contractor shall be directly responsible to obtain submittal information on related equipment supplied by others and to integrate this information as required with the overall control system to form a complete working package.

E. Coordination: The Contractor shall communicate directly with the Manufacturer(s) and Supplier(s) of all related equipment to determine all details of the equipment that may influence or affect the supplied control system components.

3.02 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Shipping:

1. Anchor, brace, and protect equipment during shipping handling.

Project Owner INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 09 00 - 16

2. No internal wiring shall be disconnected for transportation.

B. Delivery Inspection: Notify the Project Representative and provide access for inspection upon arrival of any material or equipment to be incorporated into the work. Remove protective covers when required.

C. Storage:

1. After delivery and prior to installation, equipment shall be stored in clean, dry locations in such a manner to protect equipment from physical damage, from the effects of weather, and to prevent formation of moisture or condensation on equipment.

D. Supplied Control Panels:

1. Completely wired and tested in the factory prior to being shipped to the job site.

2. Shipped as a single unit to job site after testing is complete.

3. No internal wiring shall be disconnected for transportation.

3.03 INSTALLATION
A. General:

1. Installation by Contractor: The control system and associated instruments and connections shall be installed by the contractor.

2. Installation Instructions: The control system shall be installed in accordance with the installation drawings and instructions provided by the manufacturer, packaged system suppliers, and other equipment suppliers.

3. Supervision: The Contractor's instrumentation and controls project engineer shall supervise and coordinate all activities related to the installation of Division 26 and Division 40 requirements.

4. Expertise of Installer: Installation shall be performed by the workers who are skilled and experienced in the installation of electrical instrumentation and control systems. Installation shall include all elements and components of the control systems and all conduit and interconnecting wiring between all elements, components, sensors, valve operators, etc.

5. Location: Equipment shall be located so that it is readily accessible for operation and maintenance.

6. Instrument Technician: The Contractor shall provide the services of skilled instrument technicians for testing, calibration, and adjustment activities per 40 90

00. B. Signal Connection and Transmission:

1. Unless otherwise specified, analog signal transmission between electric or electronic instruments not located within a common panel shall be 4 to 20 milliamperes and shall have a loop compliance of at least 500 ohms.

2. Two-wire loop transmitters shall operate at 24 VDC.

Project Owner INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 09 00 - 17

3. Unless otherwise shown, Milliampere signals from the field shall be converted to 1 to 5 VDC signals at the field terminal block of each panel. Conversion error shall not exceed 0.1 %. All instruments within a panel shall be parallel wired with 1-5 VDC signals.

4. Loops shall be grounded at the field terminal block by bonding to the instrument panel signal ground bus. Separate grounded conductors shall be provided for each loop. Daisy chaining of grounded conductors from one loop to another is not allowed.

5. Provide isolating amplifiers for field equipment possessing a grounded input or output, or having a common mode voltage other than system ground.

6. Convert high frequency (greater than 50 Hz) pulse rate signals from field transmitters to analog 1-5 VDC signals at the panel.

7. Convert platinum resistance temperature detector (RTD) outputs to 4-20 Milliampere signals at the RTD, or where shown on the Drawings. The temperature Milliampere signal may be brought from the field to the panel and converted to a 1-5 Volt DC signal.

8. All other transmission systems, such as impulse duration, low frequency pulse rate, and voltage regulated, will not be permitted. When transmitters with nonstandard outputs are specified, their output shall be converted to 4 to 20 milliamperes at the field instrument.

C. Tagging: All field devices and conduits shall be labeled with tag number indicated in the bid documents or consistent with project tagging conventions when not shown in the bid documents. Comply with project naming and numbering conventions. Tag shall be 10ga, 316 stainless steel with stamped letters and numbers attached to device with 12ga, 316 stainless steel wire.

D. Field Equipment:

1. Installation: Equipment shall be provided as specified on the drawings such that ports and adjustments are accessible for in-place testing and calibration. Where possible, equipment shall be located between 48 inches and 60 inches above the floor or a permanent work platform. Instrumentation equipment shall be mounted for unobstructed access, but mounting shall not obstruct walkways. Equipment shall be mounted where shock or vibration will not impair its operation. Support systems shall not be attached to handrails, process piping or mechanical equipment except for measuring elements and valve positioners. Instruments and cabinets supported directly by concrete or concrete block walls shall be spaced out not less than 5/8 inch by framing channel between instrument and wall.

2. Support Systems: Steel used for support of equipment shall be hot-dip galvanized in dry locations and stainless steel in damp and wet locations. Support systems including panels shall be designed in accordance with the applicable building code and seismic zone and shall prevent deformation greater than 118 inch under the attached equipment load and an external load of 200 pounds in any direction.

E. Electrical Power Connections:

1. Electric power wiring and equipment shall be in compliance with Division 26.

Project Owner INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 09 00 - 18

2. Disconnect Switches: Power disconnect switches shall be provided within sight of equipment and shall be labeled to indicate opened and closed positions and specific equipment served. "Within sight of" is defined as having a clear unobstructed view from the equipment served and within 50 feet of the equipment served. Disconnect switches shall be lockout tag and mounted between 36 inches and 72 inches above the floor or permanent work platform. Where equipment location is such that the above requirements cannot be met by a single disconnect switch, two switches, one at the equipment and one at the work platform, shall be provided.

3. Surge Arrestors: Each VFD shall be provided with a surge arrestor .The surge arrestor shall be bonded to the plant ground grid with a min No.8 AWG bare copper conductor.

4. Control Panels: All control panels shall be provided with a main power disconnect equipped with auxiliary contacts as required to disconnect all power sources to the panel or shall be labeled to indicate the multiple power sources not disconnected by the main disconnect. Field wiring for all power sources not disconnected by the main disconnect shall land on fused disconnect type terminal blocks. Control Panel must have UL label.

3.04 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
Per Section 40 90 00.

3.05 CALIBRATION, START-UP, AND COMMISSIONING
Per Section 40 90 00.

3.06 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND WARRANTY
A. Contractor Solely Responsible: The Contractor shall be solely and completely responsible for all electrical and mechanical maintenance of control systems they supply from time of installation to the date of substantial completion of all work under the contract. The Contractor shall correct all deficiencies and defects and make any and all repairs, replacements, modifications, and adjustments as malfunctions or failures occur. The contractor shall perform all such work required or considered to be required by the owner to properly maintain the system.

B. Defects and Repairs: The Contractor shall make any and all repairs, replacements, modifications, and adjustments required to eliminate any and all defects in design, materials, and workmanship which are discovered within the one year guarantee period.

The Contractor shall begin all repairs, replacements, modifications and adjustments within twenty-four (24) hours of notification by telephone by the owner and shall complete such repairs, replacements, modifications and adjustments within forty-eight (48) hours of notification.

C. Acceptance of Work: The Contractor shall anticipate that the Owner may delay acceptance of all work under the contract if, in the judgment of the Owner, malfunctions or failures in operation of the supplied control system repeatedly occur after start-up to an unacceptable extent. The Contractor shall not be entitled to an extension of time or to any claim for damages because of hindrances, delays, or complications caused by or resulting Project Owner INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 09 00 - 19
from delay by the owner in accepting the work because of malfunctions or failures in operation of the supplied control system.

D. Packaged Systems: Packaged system suppliers shall provide warranty support meeting the above stated requirements for their supplied systems.

3.07 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. O&M Manuals: The Contractor shall prepare and assemble six (6) sets of electrical and mechanical operation and maintenance (O&M) manuals in accordance with the project general requirements and Paragraph 1.3 of this section. These manuals shall be submitted two weeks prior to training. O&M manuals shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

1. Trouble-shooting procedures.

2. Calibration procedures.

3. Testing procedures.

4. Component replacement procedures.

5. Preventative maintenance procedures.

6. Listing of recommended spare parts.

7. Listing of recommended maintenance tools and equipment.

8. Catalog data for all equipment and devices supplied, organized per submittal requirements.

9. Configuration and setup manuals for all devices supplied including VFDs, instruments, etc.

10. Communication channel test forms.

11. Calibration and test forms for all field switches, instruments, I/O concentrators, VFD, etc., per Section 40 90 00.

12. Configuration files for all configurable electronic devices and equipment supplied for this project.

13. System user's manual covering all functions supplied by the contractor for this project as described below.

B. Record Documents: All contract P&ID drawings and control strategy specification sections and all submittal drawings shall be revised to reflect as-built conditions at the end of the project. Record drawings and documents shall be submitted in accordance with the project general requirements and Paragraph 1.3 of this section. Record drawings and documents shall be submitted with the O&M manuals. Record drawings and documents shall include the following:

1. Shop drawings per 1.8 of this section.

2. Wiring diagrams of cabinet and enclosure contained assemblies

3. Wiring diagrams of all system connections and interconnections including all loops, field equipment, communications interfaces, networks, etc.

4. All other submitted shop and installation drawings and details not listed Project Owner INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 09 00 - 20

5. Bill of Material

6. Contract P&ID drawings

7. Contract control strategy specification sections

3.08 SYSTEM USERS MANUAL
A. SCOPE: The Contractor shall develop and submit a detailed user manual covering all aspects of the operation and use of the components and systems they supply. The manual shall cover the following

1. Overview: An overview of the architecture of the control system including control panels, field devices, networks, remote access, etc.

2. Functions: All hardware/hardwired, manual, automatic, display, control, alarming, networking, etc. features and functions of the systems and components they supply.

3. Hardwired Elements: Descriptions of the meaning and function of all hardwired panel, and field mounted discrete operator interface monitoring and control devices. Correlate functions to the control strategies.

4. Start Up: System start up procedures for electrical and mechanical systems supplied and configured by the contractor for the project.

B. Used In Training: The system user's manual shall be completed prior to and shall be used for required training. The manual shall be updated to incorporate comments received during training and re submitted for inclusion in the O&M manual. Submit 2 weeks prior to training.

C. Packaged Equipment: Packaged equipment suppliers shall supply user's manuals per the above requirements for the systems they supply.

D. I/O Concentrators/SCADA System Manuals: The I/O Concentrators/SCADA system OM&M Manuals shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractor shall obtain from the CSI the programming documents necessary for inclusion in the appropriate section of the O&M Manuals.

3.09 TRAINING
A. General: The Contractor shall conduct specifically organized training sessions to educate and train the owner's personnel in the maintenance and operation of all aspects and components of the control system they supply. Training on all system components shall include, but not be limited to, the following subjects:

1. All electrical and mechanical O&M manual items

2. All system users' manual items
B. Training Sessions: The Contractor shall provide a minimum of 16 hours of on-site instruction to the owner's employees after start-up and commissioning of the system. The owner shall be allowed to video tape all or any part of the training sessions. The Contractor shall prepare and assemble specific instruction materials for each training Project Owner INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 09 00 - 21
session and shall supply such materials to the Project Representative at least two (2) weeks prior to the time of the training. The O&M manuals and the system users' manual shall be complete and shall be used in the training sessions.

C. I/O Concentrators/SCADA System Training: I/O Concentrators/SCADA System Training shall be conducted by the CSI.

D. VFD Training: Training shall cover details of operation of VFD's from the HIM (Human Interface Module). Training shall provide detailed instructions on the modification of VFD operating parameters typically requiring adjustment by operators. The contractor shall develop and provide "cheat sheets" which provide step by step instructions required to accomplish the following:

1. Copy VFD configuration to HIM

2. Copy HIM configuration to VFD

3. Switch between auto and manual modes

4. Manually adjust speed

5. Adjust minimum and maximum speed limits

6. Adjust acceleration and deceleration ramp times

7. Access parameters and fault codes/Alarm codes

END OF SECTION
Project Owner SWITCHBOARDS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 14 13 - 1

SECTION 26 14 13

SWITCHBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUBMITTALS
A. Action Submittals:

1. Descriptive product information with manufacturers printed literature describing the standard series, not one-of-a-kind fabrication.

2. Itemized Bill of Material.

3. Dimensional drawings.

4. Operational description.

5. One-line, three-line, and control schematic drawings.

6. Connection and interconnection drawings.

7. Circuit Breakers: Copies of time-current characteristics.

8. Ground Fault Protection: Relay time-current characteristics.

9. Bus data.

10. Incoming line section equipment data.

11. Conduit entrance locations.

12. Anchoring instructions and details.

13. Enclosure color options, with color chip samples.

14. Proof of ATS UL 1008 listing or a certificate of UL compliance.

15. Seismic anchorage and bracing drawings and cut sheets.

B. Informational Submittals:

1. Seismic anchorage and bracing calculations.

2. Manufacturer’s installation instructions.

3. Factory Test Report.

4. Prototype testing report.

5. Component and attachment testing seismic certificate of compliance.

6. Operation and Maintenance Data: As specified in Section 01 78 23, Operation and Maintenance Data.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ):

1. Provide the Work in accordance with the latest version of NFPA 70, Project Owner SWITCHBOARDS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 14 13 - 2

National Electrical Code (NEC). Where required by the AHJ, material and equipment shall be labeled or listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory or other organization acceptable to the AHJ in order to provide a basis for approval under NEC.

2. Materials and equipment manufactured within scope of standards published by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. shall conform to those standards and shall have an applied UL listing mark.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Materials, equipment, and accessories specified in this section shall be products of:

1. Eaton.

2. General Electric.

3. Square D.

B. Supplied equipment shall be equal in every way to that offered by the first named manufacturer specified herein, including quality, operation, and function.

Contractor shall be responsible for changes in the facility work made necessary from installation of equipment other than specified, without additional cost to the District.

2.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Utility Service Entrance Switchboard: Equipment suitable for 480Y/277 volt, three-phase, four-wire, solidly grounded-wye electrical system having available short-circuit current at line terminals of 35,000 amperes rms symmetrical, unless otherwise specified by the utility.

B. Non-Utility Service Entrance, and Other Switchboards: Equipment suitable for 480 volt, three-phase, three-wire, solidly grounded-wye electrical system having available short-circuit current at line terminals of 35,000 amperes rms symmetrical
C. Comply with NEMA PB 2, ICS-2-322, UL 891, UL 845, and NEC.

D. Switchboard and its major components to be manufactured and assembled by single manufacturer in order to achieve standardization for appearance, operation and maintenance, spare parts replacement, and manufacturer’s services.

Project Owner SWITCHBOARDS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 14 13 - 3

E. Material and equipment shall be new and current, delivered to the Site completely wired, tested and ready for installation, in accordance with the Electrical Drawings. Equipment shall be proven to be reliable and compatible.

F. Operating handles shall not be more than 78 inches above the operating floor when the switchboard is installed on a 3 inch concrete pad.

G. Lifting lugs on equipment and devices weighing over 100 pounds.

H. Operating Conditions:

1. Ambient Temperature: Maximum 50 degrees C.

2. Equipment shall be fully rated without derating for the above operating conditions.

2.03 STATIONARY STRUCTURE
A. Type: NEMA PB 2 construction, dead front, completely metal enclosed, self-supporting.

B. Sections bolted together to form one rigid assembly capable of being moved into position and bolted directly to floor without use of floor sills.

2.04 ENCLOSURE
A. Equipment Finish: Baked enamel applied over rust-inhibiting phosphated base coating.

1. Color:
a. Exterior: Gray as approved by owner Engineer. Submit color chips for approval.
b. Interior: Gray.
c. Unpainted Parts: Plated for corrosion resistance.
d. Provide one gallon of identical exterior color paint from the factory.

B. Indoor Enclosure; NEMA 250, Type 1, Gasketed:

1. Rear, full-height, bolt-on panels for each enclosure section.

2. Cable Termination Access: Padlock provision.

3. Front Access:
a. Service line and load terminations, internal devices, device and bolted bus connections, and protective device removal, serviceable from front only.

Project Owner SWITCHBOARDS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 14 13 - 4

b. Sections aligned across back to permit placement flush against wall.
c. Working Space: As required by NFPA 70.

4. Transition sections as required or shown.

5. Side and Top Covers: Removable, captive, screw-on plates with formed edges on each side.

6. Front Cover: Hinged, gasketed door with formed edges.

2.05 BUSWORK
A. Material: Phase isolated and insulated silver-plated copper throughout entire length, of sufficient cross-section to limit temperature rise at rated current to 55 degrees C.

B. Bus Arrangement: A-B-C, left-to-right, top-to-bottom, and front-to-rear, as viewed from front.

C. Brace for short-circuit currents as shown.

D. Main Horizontal Bus: Nontapered, continuous current rating as shown.

E. Neutral Bus: Where required, Continuous current rating 100 percent of main horizontal bus rating.

F. Ground Bus:

1. Copper.

2. Rating: 500 amperes.

3. Bolted to each vertical section.

4. Bus Connections and Joints: Bolted with Belleville washers.

G. Extend each bus entire length of switchboard with provisions for extension to future units.

2.06 PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A. Molded-Case Circuit Breakers:

1. Main, Tie, and Branch Feeder Protective Devices: Group mounted, suitable for use with 75 degree C wire at full 75 degree C ampacity when mounted in switchboard.

2. Arrangement: Fully rated, 600V, thermal magnetic, 2- or 3-pole, trip free, toggle type, quick make, quick break, single operator handle with positive position indication.

Project Owner SWITCHBOARDS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 14 13 - 5

3. Breakers 225-Ampere Frame and Above: Continuously adjustable magnetic pickups five to ten times trip rating.

4. Breakers 400 Ampere Frame and Above: Solid-state trip unit.

5. Interrupting Rating: 35,000 amperes rms symmetrical at 480 volts.

6. Mechanical interlock to prevent opening compartment door while breaker is in closed position.

2.07 SOLID-STATE TRIP UNIT
A. Flux-shift trip and current sensors.

B. Protective Programmers:

1. Self-powered, automatic rms sensing micro-electronic processor.

2. No external relays or accessories.

3. Printed circuit cards with gold-plated contacts.

4. Programmable Controls:
a. Fixed-point, with repetitive accuracy and precise unit settings. b. Trip adjustments made by nonremovable, discrete step switching.

5. Field-Installable Rating Plugs:
a. Long-time pickup LED indicator and test receptacle.
b. Matching load and cable requirements.
c. Interlocked with tripping mechanism.
d. Breaker to remain trip-free with plug removed.
e. Keyed rating plugs to prevent incorrect application.

6. Long-time pickup light.

7. Selective Coordination Time/Current Curve Shaping Adjustable Functions:
a. Current setting.
b. Long-time pickup.
c. Long-time delay.
d. Instantaneous pickup.
e. Short-time pickup.
f. Short-time delay with I2T function, and IN-OUT switch. g. Ground fault pickup.
h. Ground fault delay with I2T function.

8. Fault Trip Indicators: Mechanical push-to-reset type for overload and short-circuit overload plus ground fault trip.

9. Rejection Pins: For each programmer frame size.

2.08 POWER METERING
Project Owner SWITCHBOARDS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 14 13 - 6

A. Provide Meter socket to meet IID standards. Meter and CTs by IID.

2.09 CONTROL WIRING
A. Control, Instrumentation, and Power/Current Circuits: NFPA 70, Type SIS, single-conductor, Class B, stranded copper, rated 600 volts, and UL listed.

B. Transducer Output/Analog Circuits: Shielded cable rated 600 volts, 90 degrees C minimum.

C. Conductor Lugs: Preinsulated, crimp-type, self-locking, spade-type, with reinforced sleeves.

D. Identification: Individually, with permanent wire markers at each end.

E. Enclose in top and vertical steel wiring troughs, and front-to-rear in nonmetallic wiring troughs.

F. Splices: Not permitted in switchboard wiring.

2.10 TERMINAL BLOCKS
A. Enclosed in steel wiring troughs.

B. Rated 600 volts, 30 amperes minimum, DIN rail mounted, one-piece barrier type with strap screws. Shall accommodate No. 18 to No. 10 AWG, and a minimum multiple connection of two No. 12 AWG wires per terminal.

C. Shorting type for current transformer leads.

D. Provide terminal blocks for:

1. Conductors connecting to circuits external to switchboard.

2. Internal circuits crossing shipping splits.

3. Equipment parts requiring replacement and maintenance.

E. Spare Terminals: Not less than 20 percent.

F. Group terminal blocks for external circuit wiring leads.

G. Maintain 6-inch minimum space between columns of terminal blocks.

H. Identification: Permanent, for each terminal and columns of terminal blocks.

Terminal numbers shall not be duplicated anywhere within the switchboard, Project Owner SWITCHBOARDS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 14 13 - 7

unless the terminal point is the same potential and function throughout, (L1, L2, N, etc.)

2.11 IDENTIFICATION
A. Nameplates:

1. Master:
a. Deep-etched aluminum, with manufacturer’s name and model number.
b. Riveted to main vertical section.

2. Circuit Breaker Cubicle and Door-Mounted Device:
a. Engraved, NEMA ES-1, 3-ply, 1/16-inch thick, beveled, satin finish.
b. Color: Black with white.
c. Characters: Block-type, 3/16-inch high.
d. Size: Manufacturer’s standard.
e. Inscription: As shown on one-line diagram.
f. Blank plates for future spaces.
g. Attachment Screws: Stainless steel panhead.

B. Section Identification:

1. Stamped metallic, riveted to each vertical section.

2. Serial number, bus rating, and section reference number.

3. Size: Manufacturer’s standard.

C. Cubicle Labels:

1. Nonmetallic, applied inside each cubicle compartment.

2. Device serial number, rating, and description.

D. Control Switches: Deep etched, aluminum escutcheon plate.

E. Relays and Devices:

1. Stamped metallic, riveted to instrument case.

2. Manufacturer’s name, model number, relay type, and rating data.

F. Switchboard Sign:

1. Two signs each on front of switchboard.

2. Engraved, acrylic.

3. Size: Manufacturer’s standard.

Project Owner SWITCHBOARDS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 14 13 - 8

4. Color: Red with white.

5. Characters: Arial font, 1-inch high.

6. Inscription: DANGER/HIGH VOLTAGE/KEEP OUT.

7. Attachment: Four rivets each sign.

2.12 FACTORY TESTING
A. Performance tests in accordance with UL 891 and production tests in accordance with NEMA PB-2.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations.

B. Secure to mounting pads with anchor bolts of sufficient size and number adequate for specified seismic conditions.

C. Install plumb and in longitudinal alignment with pad or wall.

D. Coordinate terminal connections with installation of secondary feeders and other trades.

3.02 MANUFACTURER’S SERVICES
A. Furnish startup services and training of District’s personnel at such times as requested by District.

END OF SECTION
Project Owner LOW-VOLTAGE AC INDUCTION MOTORS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 20 00 - 1

SECTION 26 20 00

LOW-VOLTAGE AC INDUCTION MOTORS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED SECTIONS
A. This Section applies only when referenced by a motor-driven equipment specification. Application, horsepower, enclosure type, mounting, shaft type, synchronous speed, and deviations from this Section will be listed in the equipment specification. Where such deviations occur, they shall take precedence over this Section.

1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. CISD-TEFC: Chemical industry, severe-duty enclosure.

B. EXP: Explosion-proof enclosure.

C. Inverter Duty Motor: Motor meeting applicable requirements of NEMA MG 1, Section IV, Parts 30 and 31.

D. Motor Nameplate Horsepower: That rating after any derating required to allow for extra heating caused by the harmonic content in the voltage applied to the motor by its controller.

E. ODP: Open drip-proof enclosure.

F. TEFC: Totally enclosed, fan cooled enclosure.

G. TENV: Totally enclosed, nonventilated enclosure.

H. WPI: Open weather protected enclosure, Type I.

I. W PII : O p e n we a t h er pr ot e c te d e nc lo su r e , T y p e I I. 1 . 0 3 SUBMIT T A L S
A. Act io n Su b m it t a ls :

1. Descriptive information.

2. Nameplate data in accordance with NEMA MG 1.

Project Owner LOW-VOLTAGE AC INDUCTION MOTORS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 20 00 - 2

3. Additional Rating Information:
a. Service factor.
b. Locked rotor current.
c. No load current.
d. Safe stall time for motors 20 hp and larger.
e. Adjustable frequency drive motor load classification (for example, variable torque) and minimum allowable motor speed for that load classification.
f. Guaranteed minimum full load efficiency and power factor. g. No Load Speed (RPM).
h. Full Load Speed (RPM).
i. Frame Number.
j. Type.
k. Enclosure.
l. Phase/Hertz.
m. Insulation Class.
n. Ambient Temperature.
o. Max Temp. Rise.
p. Service Factor.
q. Efficiency at full, 3/4 & 1/2 load.
r. Power Factor at full, 3/4 & 1/2 load.
s. NEMA kVA/hp Code.
t. NEMA Design Letter.
u. Torque at Full Voltage Locked (Start) & Pull out (break down) percent of Full Load.
v. Shaft Type: Hollow or Solid.

4. Enclosure type and mounting (such as, horizontal, vertical).

5. Dimensions and total weight.

6. Conduit box dimensions and usable volume as defined in NEMA MG 1 and NFPA 70.

7. Bearing type.

8. Bearing lubrication.

9. Bearing life.

10. Space heater voltage and watts.

11. Description, ratings, and wiring diagram of motor thermal protection.

12. Motor sound power level in accordance with NEMA MG 1.

13. Maximum brake horsepower required by the equipment driven by the motor.

14. Description and rating of submersible motor moisture sensing system.

15. Seismic anchorage and bracing data sheets and drawings.

B. Informational Submittals:

Project Owner LOW-VOLTAGE AC INDUCTION MOTORS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 20 00 - 3

1. Seismic anchorage and bracing calculations.

2. Factory test reports.

3. Operation and Maintenance Data: As specified in Section 01 78 23, Operation and Maintenance Data.

1.04 MANUFACTURER’S WARRANTY
A. The equipment shall be warranted for a period of 1 year, commencing on the date on which the District takes possession of the Work, to be free from defects in workmanship, design, or material. Any defects in material or workmanship which are discovered during the time of warranty shall be replaced or repaired at no cost to the District. Duties and obligations for correction or removal and replacement of defective work are specified in Part V, General Conditions.

B. Optional Additive Service: Manufacturer shall include a separate line item in the Proposal Price for the option of an extended warranty direct to the District for 4 years beyond the required 1 year warranty.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Reliance Electric.

B. MagneTek.

C. Siemens Energy and Automation, Inc., Motors and Drives Division.

D. Baldor.

E. U.S. Electrical Motors.

F. TECO-Westinghouse Motor Co.

G. Toshiba International Corp., Industrial Division.

H. WEG Electric Motors Corp.

I. General Electric.

2.02 GENERAL
A. For multiple units of the same type of equipment, furnish identical motors and accessories of a single manufacturer.

B. In order to obtain single source responsibility, utilize a single supplier to provide a drive motor, its driven equipment, and specified motor accessories.

C. Meet requirements of NEMA MG 1 and NFPA 820.

Project Owner LOW-VOLTAGE AC INDUCTION MOTORS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 20 00 - 4

D. Frame assignments in accordance with NEMA MG 13.

E. Provide motors for hazardous (classified) locations that conform to UL 674 and have an applied UL listing mark.

F. Motors shall be Underwriters Laboratories (UL) or Factory Mutual (FM) listed.

G. Motors shall be specifically designed for the use and conditions intended, with a NEMA design letter classification to fit the application.

H. Lifting lugs on all motors weighing 100 pounds or more.

I. Operating Conditions:

1. Ambient temperature: 50 degrees C.

2. Motors shall be suitable for operating conditions without any reduction being required in the nameplate rated horsepower or exceeding the rated temperature rise.

3. Overspeed in either direction in accordance with NEMA MG 1.

2.03 HORSEPOWER RATING
A. As designated in motor-driven equipment specifications.

B. Constant Speed Applications: Brake horsepower of the driven equipment at any operating condition not to exceed motor nameplate horsepower rating, excluding any service factor.

C. Adjustable Frequency and Adjustable Speed Applications (Inverter Duty Motor):

Driven equipment brake horsepower at any head capacity point on the pump curve not to exceed motor nameplate horsepower rating, excluding any service factor.

2.04 SERVICE FACTOR
A. Inverter-duty Motors: 1.0 at rated ambient temperature, unless otherwise noted.

B. Other Motors: 1.15 minimum at rated ambient temperature, unless otherwise noted.

2.05 VOLTAGE AND FREQUENCY RATING
A. System Frequency: 60 Hz.

B. Voltage Rating: Unless otherwise indicated in motor-driven equipment specifications:

Project Owner LOW-VOLTAGE AC INDUCTION MOTORS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 20 00 - 5

Size Voltage Phases
1/2 hp and smaller 115 1
3/4 hp through 800 hp 460 3
C. Suitable for full voltage starting.

D. 40 hp and larger also suitable for reduced voltage starting with 65 percent or 80 percent voltage tap settings on reduced inrush motor starters.

E. Suitable for accelerating the connected load with supply voltage at motor starter supply terminals dipping to 90 percent of motor rated voltage.

2.06 EFFICIENCY AND POWER FACTOR
A. For all motors except single-phase, under 1 hp, multispeed, short-time rated and submersible motors, or motors driving gates, valves, elevators, cranes, trolleys, and hoists:

1. Efficiency:
a. Tested in accordance with NEMA MG 1, Paragraph 12.59. b. Guaranteed minimum at full load in accordance with
NEMA MG 1 Table 12-12, Full-load Efficiencies for NEMA Premium Efficiency Electric Motors Rated 600 Volts or Less (Random Wound), or as indicated in motor-driven equipment specifications.

2. Power Factor: Guaranteed minimum at full load shall be manufacturer’s standard or as indicated in motor-driven equipment Specification.

2.07 LOCKED ROTOR RATINGS
A. Locked rotor kVA Code G or lower, if motor horsepower not covered by NEMA MG 1 tables.

B. Safe stall time 12 seconds or greater.

2.08 INSULATION SYSTEMS
A. Single-Phase, Fractional Horsepower Motors: Manufacturer’s standard winding insulation system.

B. Three-Phase and Integral Horsepower Motors: Unless otherwise indicated in motor-driven equipment specifications, NEMA Class F with Class B rise at nameplate horsepower and designated operating conditions, except EXP and DIP motors which must be Class B with Class B rise.

Project Owner LOW-VOLTAGE AC INDUCTION MOTORS
New River Improvement Project – Calexico 26 20 00 - 6

2.09 ENCLOSURES
A. Enclosures to conform to NEMA MG 1.

B. TEFC and TENV: Furnish with a drain hole with porous drain/weather plug.

Calexico City CouncilAugust 10, 2022

Calexico City Council
August 10, 2022